Home

Operators Manual

1. 10 RE THIS PROGRAM VERIFIES THE ACCURACY OF A FLUKE 45 AT 10V DC 20 INIT PORT 0 INITIALIZE THE INTERFACE 30 CLEAR PORT 0 40 PRINT 81 VDC RATE 5 AUTO TRIGGER 2 SETS FLUKE 45 TO 10V DC 50 PRINT G1 OUT 10 V OPER SET THE 5520A TO 10V DC 60 PRINT 084 WAI OUT WAIT FOR SETTLE REQUEST THE OUTPUT VALUE 70 PRINT 04 V U F V2 U2 GE HE DATA FROM THE 5520A 80 PRINT 81 TRG VAL TRIGGER 45 TO TAKE READING 90 INPUT 01 V GE HE DATA FROM THE 45 100 ER ABS V VM V 1E6 COMPUTE ERROR 110 PRINT 5520 OUTPUT V U PRINI THE RESULTS 120 PRINT 45 MEASURED VM v 130 PRINT ERROR PER PPM 140 END Verifying a Meter on the RS 232 UUT Serial Port This program selects 10 V dc output verifies that the Calibrator is set to 10 V then triggers a Fluke 45 to take a reading It displays Calibrator output the Fluke 45 reading and the meter error in ppm The program assumes that the Calibrator uses the IEEE 488 interface with bus address is 4 and the Fluke 45 is on the Calibrator SERIAL 2 TO
2. Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Harmonic Value V p p Frequency Value dB dB dB 2nd harmonic 0 0399 50kHz 33 3rd harmonic 0 0399 50kHz 38 2nd harmonic 0 099 50kHz 33 3rd harmonic 0 099 50kHz 38 2nd harmonic 0 399 50kHz 33 3rd harmonic 0 399 50kHz 38 2nd harmonic 12 50kHz 33 3rd harmonic 1 2 50kHz 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 50 kHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 50 2 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 100 kHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 100 kHz 38 2ndharmonic 5 5 200 kHz 33 harmonic 5 5 200 kHz 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 400 kHz 33 harmonic 5 5 400 kHz 38 2ndharmonic 5 5 800 kHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 800 kHz 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 1MHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 1 2 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 2MHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 2MHz 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 4 MHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 4 MHz 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 8 MHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 8 MHz 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 10MHz 33 harmonic 5 5 10 2 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 20MHz 33 harmonic 5 5 20 MHz 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 40MHz 33 harmonic 5 5 40 MHz 38 2ndharmonic 5 5 80 MHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 80 2 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 100 MHz 33 harmonic
3. 10 INIT PORTO IFC the bus 20 CLEAR PORTO DCL the bus 30 INITIALIZE THE 5520A SRO HANDLER 40 PRINT 6 SRE 8 Enable STB EAV error available 50 SRO GOTO 1100 Install SRQ handler 60 Body of the application goes here 1100 Bus SRQ handler 1110 CLEAR PORTO Make sure devices are not confused 1120 IF SPL 6 AND 64 THEN GOSUB 1200 If STB RQS call SRQ 1130 EST OTHER DEVICES ROS BITS IF DESIRED 1140 RESUME 1200 5520A SRQ handler 1210 IF SPL 6 AND 8 THEN GOSUB 1300 If STB EAV call handler 1220 Test other STB bits if desired here 1299 RETURN 1300 5520A STB EAV error handler 1320 PRINT 66 ERR Read and clear error 1330 INPUT 6 E ES Read in error and explanation 1340 PRINT Error E ES Print error and explanation 1350 IF E lt gt 0 THEN GOTO 1320 Until no more errors 1360 STOP Other commands for your app 1370 END 5 46 5 61 5 62 5 63 Remote Operation Remote Program Examples 5 Verifying a Meter on the IEEE 488 Bus This program selects 10 V dc output verifies that the Calibrator is set to 10 V then triggers a Fluke 45 to take a reading It displays calibrator output Fluke 45 reading and the meter error in ppm The program assumes that the Calibrator bus address is 4 and the Fluke 45 bus address is 1
4. Deviation 1 Year Spec Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p mV mV 10 0 mV 160 MHz 0 30 10 0 mV 200 MHz 0 30 10 0 mV 220 MHz 0 30 10 0 mV 235 MHz 0 30 10 0 mV 250 MHz 0 30 40 0 mV 500 kHz 0 70 40 0 mV 1MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 1 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 2 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 5 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 10 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 20 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 50 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 100 MHz 0 70 40 0 mV 125 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 160 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 200 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 220 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 235 MHz 0 90 40 0 mV 250 MHz 0 90 100 0 mV 500 kHz 1 60 100 0 mV 1 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 1 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 2 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 5 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 10 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 20 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 50 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 100 MHz 1 60 100 0 mV 125 MHz 2 10 100 0 mV 160 MHz 2 10 100 0 mV 200 MHz 2 10 8 93 5520A Operators Manual 8 94 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Flatness cont Deviation 1 Year Spec Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p mV mV 100 0 mV 220 MHz 2 10 100 0 mV 235 MHz 2 10 100 0 mV 250 MHz 2 10 400 0 mV 500 kHz 6 10 400 0 mV 1MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 1 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 2 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 5 MHz 6
5. LCOMP off Max Distortion amp Noise 10 Hz Max Absolute Uncertainty Compliance to 100 kHz Inductive Range Frequency tcal 5 adder BW Load t of output uA t uA V t output 90 days 1 year floor uH 29 00 uA to 10 Hz to 20 Hz 0 16 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 05 0 15 0 5 uA 200 329 99 uA 20 Hz to 45 Hz 0 12 0 1 0 15 0 1 0 05 0 1 0 5 uA 45 Hzto 1kHz 0 1 0 1 0 125 0 1 0 05 0 05 0 5 nA 1 kHz to 5 kHz 0 25 0 15 0 3 0 15 1 5 0 5 0 5 uA 5kHzto 10 kHz 0 6 0 2 0 8 0 2 1 5 1 04 0 5 uA ka kHz to 30 1 24 0 4 1 6 0 4 10 1 2 0 5 uA 2 0 33 mA to 10 Hz to 20 Hz 0 16 0 15 0 2 0 15 0 05 0 15 1 5 uA 200 3 2999 mA 20Hzto45Hz 0 140 15 0 125 40 15 0 05 0 06 1 5 pA 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 08 0 15 0 1 0 15 0 05 0 02 1 5 uA 1kHzto5kHz 0 1640 2 10 2402 1 5 0 5 1 5gA 5 kHz to 10 kHz 0 4 0 3 0 5 0 3 1 5 1 0 1 5 uA ME 0 8 0 6 1 0 4 0 6 10 1 2 0 5 uA 2 3 3 10 2 020 2 015 2 0 18 2 0 05 015 5 50 32 999 mA 20 Hz to 45 Hz 0 075 2 0 09 2 0 05 0 05 5 uA 45 Hzto 1 kHz 0 03542 0 04 2 0 05 0 07 5 1 kHz to 5 kHz 0 065 2 0 08 2 1 5 0 3 5 uA 5 2 10 kHz 0 16 3 0 2 3 1 5 0 7 5 pA ih kHz to 30 0 32 4 0 44 4 10 1 0 0 5 uA z 33 mA to 10 Hz to 20 Hz 0 15 20 0 18 20 0 05 0 15 50 uA 50 329 99 mA 20Hzto45Hz 0 075 20 0 09 20 0 05 0 0
6. 1 2 Operation exeo ved 1 3 t ren tree eripi ee ete edet eee edd 1 4 Remote Operation RS 232 sess 1 5 Remote Operation IEEE 488 nana 1 6 Whereto Go from rient reb treo 1 6 1 7 Instr ction Manuals ter ett 1 8 5520A Operators 1 9 5520A Operators 1 10 5520A Programmers 1 11 5320 A Service Manual sui gu IS MM el tezinlo rm Rc 1 13 General Specifications ce cescesecssecsseceseceseeeseeeseeesaeeeaeeeeeeaaeenaes 1 14 DC Voltage Specifications sese 1 15 DC Current Specifications sisas nirisan iE 1 16 Resistance 1 17 AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications 1 18 AC Current Sine Wave Specifications 1 19 Capacitance Specifications eene 1 20 Temperature Calibration Thermocouple Specifications 1 21 Temperature Calibration RTD Specifications 1 22 DC Power Specification Summary 1 23 AC Power 45 Hz to 65 Hz Specification Summary PF 1 1 24 Power and Dual Output Limit S
7. TC TYPE X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Type command Sets the Thermocouple TC temperature sensor type The TC type is used when the output is set to a temperature value with the OUT command and the temperature sensor type is set to TC with the TS ENS TYPE command When the thermocouple type is changed while simulating a temperature output the temperature is changed to 0 C Once set the Calibrator retains the TC type until power off or reset Parameters B type thermocouple C type thermocouple E type thermocouple J type thermocouple K type thermocouple default N type thermocouple B C J K N R R type thermocouple S T X Y Z S type thermocouple T type thermocouple 10 uV C linear output relative humidity 1 mV C linear output Example TC TYPE J Set the thermocouple type for simulating a temperature output to a J type thermocouple Remote Commands Commands 6 TC TYPE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Type query Returns the Thermocouple TC temperature sensor type When the thermocouple type is changed while simulating a temperature output the temperature is changed to 0 C Responses B C K N R S si X Y Z B type thermoco
8. 8 0 Trigger Signal Specifications Pulse Function 8 10 Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker Function 8 11 Trigger Signal Specifications Edge Function 8 12 Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function 8 13 Trigger Signal Specifications seen 8 14 Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications 8 15 Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications 8 16 Overload Measurement 8 17 Oscilloscope Connections eese nenne 8 18 Starting the SC600 Option esee een 8 19 The Output Signal nente erret etes 8 20 Adjusting the Output Signal oo eee 8 21 Keying in a Val e eiit 8 22 Adjusting Values with the Rotary 2 8 23 Using 8 15 8 24 Resetting the SC600 8 25 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 26 Th VOLI Function oett rettet rettet nire zobe 8 27 The V DIV or trt reete trn eet e 5520A Operators Manual 8 28 Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude 8 29 Oscilloscope Amplitud
9. 8 8 Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker 8 9 Trigger Signal Specifications Edge 8 10 Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function 8 11 TV Trigger Signal 8 12 Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications 8 13 Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications 8 14 Overload Measurement 8 15 SCOPE Command Parameters eese rennen nnnm nennen 8 16 DC Voltage 8 17 AC Voltage Amplitude 8 18 AC Voltage Frequency 8 19 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 MQ output impedance 8 20 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 50 Q output impedance 8 21 Leveled Sine Wave 8 22 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Frequency output 8 23 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Harmonics eese 8 24 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness esee 8 25 Edge Verification Amplitude eese 8 26 Edge Verification Frequency eee eee 8 27 Edge Verification Duty
10. REMOTE I F Interface has selections term terminal factory default and comp computer EOL End of Line character is either Carriage Return Line Feed CRLF CR Carriage Return or LF Line Feed nn016f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 15 5520A Operators Manual SET FIRST EOF 1 A a la to N to K EOF End of File indicates the action taken at the end of a file by entering one or two ASCII characters EOF 012 000 EFF L3 HUL EOF EOF End of File ASCII characters entered with a range of 000 to 255 first character and 000 to 255 second character The factory defaults are 012 000 where the FF form feed character signals an advance to the next page and the NULL ignore character holds position When the NULL character is 000 then effectively the EOF is only the FF character or L for the factory GPIB PORT ADDRESS 4 i DOWN UPO a a a Ee GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus selects the port address when using the IEEE 488 bus The factory default is 4 DISPLAY DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST aan a CA to R toQ DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS and DISPLAY CONTRAST apply to both the Output Display and Control Display nn017f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees Ad
11. DATA STOP STALL FARITY SE O BITS BIT sone xmoFFl o none BALC 1 none ann a z none odd 600 rts cts Gen 1200 S400 4500 SE I nn125f eps 5520A Operators Manual 5 12 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Choose or adapt one of the following test procedures to test the Calibrator RS 232 UUT port via the RS 232 Host port Connect the UUT and PC as shown in 5 5 Note the use of a modem cable NOT null modem for UUT connection See Appendix C for information about RS 232 cables and connectors x Modem Cable v Null Modem Cable RS 232 SERIAL 2 C a A A Port UUT 5520A Calibrator Controller nn312f eps Figure 5 5 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Terminal This procedure uses the Terminal accessory supplied with Windows or equal to test RS 232 UUT port operation Visual Basic This procedure uses Visual Basic see Appendix D to test RS 232 Host port and RS 232 UUT port operation 5 13 Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 UUT port operation via the RS 232 Host port using the Windows Terminal accessory or equal 1 Complete RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure the 5520A 5 232 UUT port to match the parameters of the UUT RS 232 port 2 Complete Testing RS 232 Host Port Operat
12. 4 20 Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series High Amps Function 4 21 Cable Connections for Testing a 40 Series Watts Function 4 22 Cable Connections for Testing a 50 Series Thermometer 5 1 Typical IEEE 488 Remote Control 5 2 Typical RS 232 Remote Control Connections eee 5 3 Testing the 488 Port retient 5520A Operators Manual 5 4 Testing the RS 232 Host Port 5 5 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host 5 6 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 5 7 TEEE 488 Remote Message Coding eee 5 8 Status Register OvervieW ena 5 9 Status Byte and SRE Bit Definitions 5 10 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable ESE 5 11 Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCEs and ISCRS eene Tels the Duse iie he irr ie Hee e ee t e HE Rae nio 7 2 Accessing the Aur Filter suede ertet potter nta Foot oa 8 1 Oscilloscope Connection Channel and External Trigger 8 2 Tunnel Diode Pulser Connections essere enne 8 3 Oscilloscope Connection Channel and External Trigger
13. Capacitance Specifications Temperature Calibration Thermocouple Specifications Temperature Calibration RTD DC Power Specification Summary AC Power 45 Hz to 65 Hz Specification Summary PF 1 Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications Phase Specifications Calculating Power Uncertainty Additional Specifications Frequency Specifications Harmonics 2nd to 50th Specifications esses AC Voltage Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications AC Voltage Non Sine Wave Specifications AC Voltage DC Offset Specifications 5520A Operators Manual 1 2 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 37 1 38 AC Voltage Square Wave Characteristics AC Voltage Triangle Wave Characteristics typical AC Current Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications AC Current Non Sine Wave Specifications AC Current Square Wave Characteristics typical AC Current Triangle Wave Characteristics typical Introduction and Specifications Introduction 1 Introduction A Warning If the 5520A Calibrator is operated in any way not specified by this manual or other documentation
14. dBm Impedance query Returns the impedance used for dBm outputs ac volts Response character Impedance keyword Example DBMZ returns 2600 Remote Commands 6 Commands DBMZ D 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled dBm Impedance Default command Sets the power up and reset default impedance used for dBm outputs ac volts Parameters 750 50 ohms 275 75 ohms 290 90 ohms 2100 100 ohms 2135 135 ohms 2150 150 ohms 2300 300 ohms 7600 600 ohms 7900 900 ohms 21000 1000 ohms dBv 71200 1200 ohms Example DBMZ D 7600 This setting only applies when single output AC voltages are being sourced The dBm impedance is set to the default at power on reset and when going into single output AC mode DBMZ D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled dBm Impedance Default query Returns the power up and reset default impedance used for dBm outputs ac volts Response character Impedance keyword Example DBMZ D returns 2600 DC OFFSET IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled DC Voltage Offset command Applies a dc offset to an ac output voltage maximum six digits This command applies only to single ac voltage outputs If the selected offset is too large for the active ac voltage range
15. C 1 IEEE 488 Connector Pinout connection side C 2 SERIAL 1 FROM HOST Port Connector C 3 SERIAL 2 TO UUT Port Connector Pinout connection side C 4 Serial Port Connections 9 0 9 C 5 Serial Port Connections 9 25 xii 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 Introduction and Specifications Contents Introduction Operation Overview Local Remote Operation RS 232 Remote Operation IEEE 488 Where to Go from Here Instruction Manuals 5520A Operators Manual 5520A Operators Guide 5520A Programmers Guide 5520A Service Manual Specifications itii General Specifications DC Voltage Specifications DC Current Specifications Resistance Specifications Chapter 1 AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications AC Current Sine Wave Specifications
16. 5520A CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX SCOPE VDI A 0 SENSE AUX V ODO 1 OOP cer 1 nn011f eps Figure 3 1 Front Panel View cont Table 3 1 Front Panel Features cont The ENTER key loads a newly entered output value shown on the Control Display into the 5520A which appears on the Output Display The new value can come from the numeric keypad If you press ENTER without identifying the units for the entry in most cases the 5520A keeps the units that were last used This allows you for example to enter 1 mV and then later enter 10 to obtain 10 V The V units were saved from the last entry but not the multiplier m In the Error edit mode ENTER with no value restores the output to the value of the reference The SHIFT key selects alternate functions of the units keys and alternate multipliers of the multiplier keys These alternate selections are labeled with small letters in the upper left hand corner of the keys Numeric Keypad Used to enter the digits of the output amplitude and frequency The proper sequence to enter a value is to press the digits of the output value a multiplier key if necessary an output units key then ENTER For example to obtain an output of 20 mV you would press the following sequence of keys 2 0 _ Fm y Press opr to enable the output Pressing a digit key once the entry field is full and pressing the dec
17. OL_TRIP Returns the detected state of scope overload protection OUT_IMP Sets the output impedance of the SCOPE BNC OUT_IMP Returns the output impedance of the SCOPE BNC RANGE Sets the Calibrator range when in OVERLD PULSE or MEASZ scope modes SCOPE Sets the calibrator output to an oscilloscope mode SCOPE Returns the present oscilloscope mode TDPULSE Activates or deacvitates the tunnel diode pulser drive for the SC600 EDGE mode TDPULSE Returns whether the tunnel diode pulser drive for the SC600 EDGE mode is active TLIMIT Sets the time limit for SC600 OVERLD mode to stay in operate TLIMIT Returns the time limit for SC600 OVERLD mode to stay in operate TLIMIT_D Sets the power up and reset default for the time limit for SC600 OVERLD mode to stay in operate TLIMIT_D Returns the power up and reset default for the time limit for SC600 OVERLD mode to stay in operate TMWAVE Selects the waveform for MARKER mode TMWAVE Returns the timemark waveform setting for MARKER mode TRIG Sets the frequency of the signal at the TRIG OUT BNC TRIG Returns the frequency of the signal at the TRIG OUT BNC VAL Returns the last thermocouple pressure or for the SC600 impedance measurement value VIDEOFMT Selects the format for VIDEO mode VIDEOFMT Returns the VIDEO mode format VIDEOMARK Sets the VIDEO mode line marker location
18. E 6 13 Thermocouple TC Measurement Commands 6 14 Commands 00022 2 2 00000000000000003 5520A Operators Manual 6 2 Remote Commands Introduction 6 6 3 CLS ESE 5 ESR IDN OPC OPC OPT PUD PUD RST SRE SRE STB TRG TST WAI Introduction This chapter documents the IEEE 488 RS 232 remote commands for the 5520A Calibrator hereafter referred to as the Calibrator Remote commands duplicate activities that can be initiated from the front panel in local operation Following the summary table is a complete alphabetical listing of all commands complete with protocol details Separate headings in the alphabetical listing provide the parameters and responses plus an example for each command For information on using commands see Chapter 5 Remote Operation Command Summary by Function Common Commands Clear status Clears the ESR ISCRO ISCR1 the error queue and the RQS bit in the status byte This command terminates pending operation complete commands OPC or OPC Loads a byte into the Event Status Enable register Returns the contents of the Event Status Enable register Returns the contents of the Event Status Register and clears the register Identification query Returns instrument model number serial number and firm
19. Output al dat V lt DIV MODE SCOPE 1 volt AC output 1 volt DC output 306 edge levzine narker Wavegen 20 00 mV 2 SDIV 1 MODE up down up 1 down valt E ai zm 1Y 1 1 a 3 z 10 4 al 20 iuc I amp pa iun a glo25i eps Each item in the V DIV menu is described below e V div Changes the scale of the output display by changing the number of volts that are represented by each division The available settings shown in the figure above are provided in 1 2 5 step increments Press the softkey under UP to increase the volts per division Press the softkey under DOWN to decrease the volts per division s DIV Specifies the number of divisions that establish the value of the waveform The value can be adjusted from one to eight divisions The amount denoted by each division is displayed in the V div field Press the softkey under UP to increase the signal s height and press the softkey under DOWN to decrease it 8 96 Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude The and keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an oscilloscope in a 1 2 5 step sequence For example if the voltage is 40 mV then pressing increases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 50 mV Pressing DV decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 20 mV 8 70 5520A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Voltage Ampl
20. 0 AJ OOO E3ES OOO doda BE ET POWER pi perte 47 0 cm 18 5 in ee 2 5 in For Cable Access nn032f eps Figure 1 3 5520A Calibrator Dimensional Outline 5520A Operators Manual 1 13 General Specifications Warmup Time Twice the time since last warmed up to a maximum of 30 minutes Settling Time Less than 5 seconds for all functions and ranges except as noted Standard Interfaces IEEE 488 GPIB RS 232 5725A Amplifier Temperature Performance Operating 0 C to 50 C Calibration tcal 15 C to 35 C Storage 20 C to 70 C 3 Temperature Coefficient Temperature Coefficient for temperatures outside tcal 5 C is 0 1X C of the 90 day specification or 1 year as applicable per C Relative Humidity 1 Operating 8096 to 30 C 7096 to 40 C 4096 to 50 C Storage lt 95 non condensing Altitude Operating 3 050 m 10 000 ft maximum Non operating 12 200 m 40 000 ft maximum Safety Complies with IEC 1010 1 1992 1 ANSI ISA S82 01 1994 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 Analog Low Isolation 20V EMC Designed to comply with FCC Rules Part 15 VFG 243 1991 If used in areas with Electromagnetic fields of 1 to 3 V
21. 3 3 SETUP Softkey Menu Tree entere teneret intend eni pendet e ande eode 3 4 SETUP softkey menu 4 1 EARTH AND EXGRD Internal Connections eene 4 2 UUT Connection Resistance Four Wire Compensation 4 3 Connection Resistance Two Wire Compensation 4 4 UUT Connection Resistance Compensation Off 4 5 UUT Connection Capacitance Two Wire 4 6 UUT Connection Capacitance Compensation 4 7 Connection DC Voltage AC 2 4 8 UUT Connection DC Current AC 4 9 UUT Connection Temperature RTD sss 4 10 UUT Connection Temperature Thermocouple eese 4 11 Wave Pm 4 12 Triangle i esee ese rte tetuer recle re tato vies vical dojeni rete EH ipa vek nie 4 13 Square Wave and Duty Cycle 4 14 Truncated Sine Wave 2 4 15 Measuring Press re indirim Tee Re 4 16 Two 5520 5 Sourcing Current in Parallel 4 17 Three Phase Power Calibration essere 4 18 Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series General Functions 4 19 Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series Current Function
22. When to Use EARTH and 2 2 22220040201 RMS Versus Amplitude sss eee eee eee Auto Range Versus Locked Range eee Setting the Output Setting DC Voltage Output Setting AC Voltage Output Setting DC Current 2 Setting AC Current Setting DC Power Output Setting AC Power Output Setting a Dual Setting a Dual DC Voltage AC Voltage Output Setting Resistance 2 Setting Capacitance Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple Setting Temperature Simulation RTD esee Measuring Thermocouple Temperatures Waveform Types 4 1 5520A Operators Manual 4 2 4 36 4 37 4 38 4 39 4 40 4 41 4 42 4 43 4 44 4 45 4 46 4 47 4 48 4 49 4 50 4 51 4 52 4 53 4 54 4 55 4 56 4 57 4 58 4 59 4 60 4 61 4 62 4 63 4 64 4 65 4 66 4 67 4 68 Sine Triangle Square Truncated Sine Wave Setting Adjusting the Phase Entering a Phase Angle Entering a Power Factor Entering a DC Offset
23. nennen nennen 8 28 Edge Verification Rise Time 8 29 Tunnel Diode Pulser eene 8 30 Marker Generator Verification 8 31 Marker Generator Verification Period sss esse eee 8 32 Marker Generator Verification Pulse Width eee 8 33 Input Impedance Verification 8 34 Input Impedance Verification 02 1 00 00 000 00 00 9 1 Options and ACCeSSOFIeS eie eie te e eta potu RR erp cre bna de Hee C l 488 Connection Cables cete er erit rine IR re erint 1_ C 2 Serial Port Connection Cables E l Error Message etc eme een e be IO ate den List of Figures Figure Title 1 1 5520 Multi Product Calibrator essent enne 1 2 RS 232 Remote Connections eesssesseesseeeeeee eere enne ener enne enne 1 3 5520A Calibrator Dimensional 1 9 1 4 Allowable Duration of Current gt 11 A 2 1 Accessing the Fuse and Selecting Line Voltage eee 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke eee 3 1 Front Panel View ie eee LH HE ERI Ee TR la echa 3 2 Rear Panel View iesu itae ere e os rea a ap nie sei
24. Oscilloscope Connections esee nennen nennen Starting the Oscilloscope Calibration Option The Output Signal t torte tt Adjusting the Output Signal ima elo thc biete terre tin ne e ede Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob Using AG M e Resetting the Oscilloscope Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope The Volt BUTICUON iore re Hehe Pee iinet Th V DIV M nU iiiter tee toten eer opener nt hts Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope Th Edge rtt testor tet Rt terii Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope The Leveled Sine Wave Function Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage The MORE OPTIONS Sweeping through a Frequency 2 2 2222 Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope The Time Marker Function eese Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope Testing the
25. lt Daly Ct OM ci tees 5 2 Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control 5 3 IEEE 488 Port Setup Procedure eee 5 4 Testing the IEEE 488 Port 5 5 Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control 5 6 RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure sss sese sees 5 7 Testing the RS 232 Host Port 5 8 Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal 5 9 Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic 5 10 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control 5 11 RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure eee 5 12 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port 5 13 Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal 5 14 Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation using Visual Basic 5 15 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port iii 5520A Operators Manual 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 49 5 50 5 51 5 52 5 53 5 54 5 55 5 56 5 57 5 58 5 59 5 60 5 61 5 62 5 63 5 64 5 65 5 66 5 67
26. Thermocouple Type Default query Returns the default thermocouple TC sensor type Responses B type thermocouple C type thermocouple E type thermocouple J type thermocouple K type thermocouple default N type thermocouple B C J K N R R type thermocouple S T X Y Z S type thermocouple T type thermocouple 10 uV C linear output relative humidity 1 mV C linear output Example TC_TYPE_D returns K Returns K when the thermocouple type default is a type K thermocouple TEMP STD X 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Temperature Degree Standard command Selects the temperature standard ipts 68 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard or its 90 1990 International Temperature Standard which is saved in the Calibrator non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands The default is its 90 Parameters IPTS 68 ITS_90 Example TEMP STD ITS 90 See the temperature standard to its 90 TEMP STD IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Temperature Degree Standard command Returns the temperature standard ipts 68 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard or its 90
27. 10 THIS PROGRAM LOADS 00010000 00000000 BINARY INTO THE ISCE 20 PRINT 66 ISCE 4096 LOAD DECIMAL 4096 INTO ISCE 30 PRINT 86 5 READ BACK ISCE VALUE 40 INPUT Q6 A 50 PRINT ISCE A PRINT IT IT SHOULD BE 4096 60 END Output Queue The output queue is loaded whenever a query is processed and holds up to 800 characters The controller reads it with a statement such as a BASIC INPUT statement removing what it reads form the queue If the queue is empty the Calibrator does not respond to the INPUT statement from the controller The Message Available MAV bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte is 1 if there is something in the output queue and 0 if the output queue is empty 5 57 Remote Operation 5 Remote Program Examples Error Queue When a command error execution error or device dependent error occurs its error code is placed in the error queue where it can be read by the ERR command See Appendix E for a list of error messages A way to decode an error code is to send the command EXPLAIN which returns a description of a error code Reading the first error with the ERR command removes that error from the queue response of 0 means the error queue is empty The Error Available EAV bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte indicates whether the queue is empty The error queue is cleared when you turn off the power and when you use the CLS Clear Status common command T
28. SERIAL 2 TO UUT FE 05 EPS Figure C 5 Serial Port Connections DB 9 DB 25 4 Appendix D Creating a Visual Basic Test Program Creating a Visual Basic Test Program The following procedure creates a test program in Visual Basic that you may use to test 5520A Calibrator RS 232 Host port and RS 232 UUT port operation This program is referenced in Chapter 4 under Testing RS 232 Host Operation using Visual Basic and Testing RS 232 UUT Operation using Visual Basic This procedure assumes you have access to the Custom Control Icons in your edition of Visual Basic and creates the least complicated program for RS 232 testing Complete the following procedure to create an RS 232 test program in Visual Basic 1 Open Microsoft Visual Basic from the Visual Basic group displaying the Form1 screen below 2 From the Toolbox double click the Command icon creating a Command button on the Form1 screen Repeat creating a Command2 button Repeat again creating a Command3 button D 1 5520A Operators Manual 3 Separate the Command buttons and resize the form for ease of use below is typical 4 From the Toolbox double click the Communications icon gt placing the icon on the Form1 screen This custom control icon provides complete serial communications capabilities for this program Position the icon anywhere on the Forml screen that is convenient 5 Double click on
29. UUT Receive Data query Returns data from the UUT in IEEE 488 2 Standard format over the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port The command may be sent over gpib or RS 232 ports but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation Response data binary block data in definite length format from UUT Example UUT RECV returns 211 1 99975E 0 Remote Commands 6 Commands Returns for example a measurement from the UUT The format is 42 two numbers follow 11 characters follow 1 99975E 0 11 characters UUT RECVB 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled UUT Receive Binary Data query Returns binary data as integers from the UUT serial port Use the UUT RECV command instead if receiving ASCII data Parameter Optional Maximum number of integers per line Response Indefinite ASCII Comma separated integers as follows 1 integer Number of data bytes returned excluding the count 2 integer Data from the UUT serial port as series of comma separated integers Example gt followed by a carriage return and a line feed returns 4 61 62 13 10 UUT SEND X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Send UUT Data command Sends data to the UUT serial port in binary block or string data format over the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT se
30. 8 smrt 2 To change only the pulse width enter value in seconds You can enter this value with units e g 200 ns or without units e g 0 0000002 To change only the period enter a frequency with units e g 20 MHz changing the period to 50 ns 5520A Operators Manual 8 45 Measuring Input Resistance and Capacitance Measured SCOPE MEASURE MODE terminal res 500 meas Z res 500 volt res edge cap levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the Impedance Capacitance MEAS Z menu is described below e Measured SCOPE terminal Indicates the location of the measured input s MEASURE Indicates the type of test You can select res 500 or res 1 MQ termination for impedance or cap capacitance e MODE Indicates the Calibrator is in MEAS Z mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes If you have selected Capacitance measurement the menu appears as follows Measured SCOPE SET MEASURE MODE terminal OFFSET cap meas 2 CLEAR OFFSET e SET OFFSET With the cable disconnected at the oscilloscope but still connected at the Calibrator press to cancel the capacitance of the Calibrator Press again to CLEAR OFFSE
31. 8 59 AC Voltage Frequency Verification 8 42 Table 8 18 AC Voltage Frequency Verification 1 MO output impedance unless noted Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 year Spec Value V p p Hz Value Hz Hz eem 2 1 10 0 000025 2 1 100 0 00025 2 1 1000 0 0025 2 1 10000 0 025 5520A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 8 60 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 MQ Output Impedance Table 8 19 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 MO output impedance Wave Shape square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square sine sine sine sine sine sine sine triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle Nominal Value V p p 0 0018 0 0119 0 0219 0 022 0 056 0 0899 0 155 0 219 0 22 0 56 0 899 3 75 6 59 30 8 L lO lG On l On l On 0 0018 0 0219 0 0899 0 219 0 899 6 59 0 0018 0 0219 0 0899 0 219 0 899 6 59 Frequency Hz 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 10 100 1000 10000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Measured Value V p p Deviation V p p 1 Year Spec V p p 0 000154 0 000457 0 000757 0 00076
32. 8 74 Input Impedance Verification Resistance 8 75 Input Impedance Verification Vrantcaexidile npe 8 76 8 77 Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications 8 78 Volt Function Specifications essere 8 79 Edge Function Specifications essere Contents continued 8 80 Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications 8 81 Time Marker Function Specifications 8 82 Wave Generator 8 83 Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function 8 84 Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function 8 85 Oscilloscope 8 86 Starting the Oscilloscope Calibration Option 8 87 The Output Signal s s iv sanke 8 88 Adjusting the Output Signal esee 8 89 Keytng 1n Value caesi te ta sei pova Re 8 90 Adjusting Values with the Rotary 8 91 Using M DE 8 92 Resetting the Oscilloscope 8 93 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 94 The
33. ISCEO and 1 instrument status change enable service request SRQ line 5 39 registers 5 42 service request enable register SRE 5 39 ISCRO and 1 instrument status change SETUP key 3 6 registers 5 42 SETUP softkey menu tree 3 12 ISR instrument status register 5 42 SHIFT key 3 8 SRE service reguest enable sine wave 4 47 remote commands softkey menu trees 3 3 SC300 oscilloscope commands detailed 8 83 softkeys 3 5 SC600 oscilloscope calibration remote commands Chapter 6 6 3 remote example verifying a meter 5 47 SP SET SP SET remote command 6 43 space or tab characters remote operation Chapter 5 5 4 specifications REMOTE remote command 6 39 ac current non sine wave 1 32 remote state 5 22 ac current sine wave extended band remote with lockout state 5 22 width 131 remote local operation changing between 5 22 ac current square wave characteristics RESET Key 3 6 typical 1 34 resetting parameters SC600 option 8 16 ac current triangle wave characteristics resistance typica 1 34 compensation off connections 4 14 ac power 45 Hz to 65 Hz summary 1 22 four wire connections 4 13 ac voltage two wire connections 4 13 setting the output response message syntax 5 36 RPT STR remote command 6 40 RPT STR remote command dc offset 1 30 ac voltage non sine wave 1 29 ac voltage sine wave extended ban
34. Coupled Edit command Sets the edit field to the primary secondary or frequency field EDIT 488 X R Parameters PRI SEC FRI OFF Example EDIT FREQ value in dual output functions edit the secondary value in dual output functions EQ edit the frequency value in single ac output functions Load FREQ into the edit field to edit frequency EDIT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 edit the value in single output functions and the primary output EWR edit is off which is the same as using the N X Sequential Overlapped Edit query Returns the edit field setting Responses Example character P1 RI value in dual output functions is in edit EC secondary value in dual output functions is in edit character S1 character RI character OFF no value is in edit ED IT returns OFF Returns OFF when no value is in edit EF command Coupled value in single output functions and the primary output EQ frequency value in single ac output functions is in edit 6 15 5520A Operators Manual ERR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Error query Returns the first error code contained in the Calibrator error queue then removes that error code from the queue
35. Overlapped Coupled Responses NONE impedance compensation is turns off WIRE2 2 wire impedance compensation is on WIRE4 4 wire impedance compensation is off Example ZCOMP returns NONE Returns NONE when no impedance compensation is applied to the resistance capacitance or RTD output ZERO MEAS X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Zero Offset for Pressure Measurement command Zeros the pressure module or sets the zero offset for capacitance measurement using the SC600 For pressure measurments if the pressure module is an absolute module the reference parameter must be supplied along with optional units as the second argument Parameter 1 boolean ON boolean OFF 2 Reference value for absolute pressure modules 6 57 5520A Operators Manual 6 58 Example ZERO_MEAS ON Sets the zero offset to the present measurement value Example ZERO_MEAS ON 14 7 Sets the zero offset to 14 7 for an absolute pressure module ZERO MEAS X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Zero Offset for Pressure Measurement query Returns the zero offset for the pressure module or capacitance measurement using the SC600 Parameter optional units of returned value Responses 1 character OFF no zero in effect ch
36. nn308f bmp 5 Select the Communications command from the Setting menu Enter the RS 232 parameters that match those selected at the Calibrator for the Host port If using the 5520A factory defaults the Communications dialog box for COMI will appear as shown below Select COM as required Click OK 110 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Data Bits Stop Bits 05 06 O7 61 O1s Parity Flow Control Connector None Xon Xoff None 2 COM1 Odd Hardware 2 Even O None O Mark O space Parity Check Carrier Detect nn309f bmp 6 Verify the Calibrator is powered and in the reset condition If in doubt press on the Calibrator front panel On the Terminal screen type the command REMOTE and press Enter Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL below REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local ISI a 05 The characters REMOTE should have appeared on the terminal screen as they were entered If they did not appear on the screen but the Control Display changed to REMOTE CONTROL then refer to step 4 of the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure and change the REMOTE I F setting from comp to term nn325f eps 59 Remote Operation 5 Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control If nonsense characters appeared on the screen then you have a mismatch is RS 232 parameters Refer to step 4 of the RS 232
37. 15 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 Press to select the polarity of the current default is 4 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press A The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries For example 123 4567 mV and 234 567 mA below 1z3 459 amp 65 mV 224 96 mh Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical STBY 4X nnO83f eps Press oPR to activate the calibrator output When changing power output levels you must reenter both voltage and current in either order Enter voltage or current and then a watts entry value using The remaining volts or current value is calculated and displayed 4 27 5520A Operators Manual 4 28 258 4987 mu OUT D f tied Ss 4 4 ls 4 e OUT selects AUX or 20A terminals Current outputs 3 or above are always on the 20A terminals e LO s ties or opens a connection between front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the 5520A The default is tied nn322f eps 4 27 Setting AC Power Output Note Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the
38. Editing and Error Output Settings Editing the Output Setting Displaying UUT Error Using Multiply and Divide Setting Output Limits Setting Voltage and Current Limits eee Measuring Pressure Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN OUT Using an External 10 MHz Clock eene Sourcing AC Current with Parallel Connected 5520As Three Phase Power Calibration Testing the Meter Calibrating the Meter Testing a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer Testing Watts VA VAR Performance Testing Harmonics Volts Performance Testing Harmonics Amps Performance Calibrating a Fluke 51 Thermometer eee Testing the Thermometer Calibrating the Thermometer Front Panel Operation 4 Introduction 4 1 4 2 Introduction A Warning The 5520A Calibrator is capable of supplying lethal voltages To avoid shock hazard do not make connections to the output terminals when any voltage is present Placing the instrument in standby may not be enough to avoid shock hazard since the opr key could be pressed accidentally Press the key and verify that the 5520A Calibrator is in standby before making connections to the out
39. The VOLT Eu fction neo Ete ee The m Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration Procedure Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope The Edge PUNCH On diit ioter tete ehe te bape pote arietes Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser The Leveled Sine Wave Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage The MORE OPTIONS Menu 8 3 5520A Operators Manual 8 4 8 37 8 38 8 40 8 42 8 73 8 75 Sweeping Through a Frequency Range eee Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope The Time Marker Function eese Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope Testing the Trigger SC600 Testing Video Triggers cien GR iaeiiai Verifying Pulse Capture sees Measuring Input Resistance and Capacitance Input Impedance Measurement sss sees esse sees eee eee ee eee Input Capacitance Measurement seen Testing Overload Remote
40. nnO51f eps Figure 4 21 Cable Connections for Testing a 40 Series Watts Function 4 68 Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications Verify that the EARTH indicator is lit if not press EARTH Set the calibrator output to 5 0 V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 30 mV at 60 Hz on the AUX output Press the WAVE MENUS then the amp REF MENUS softkey on the calibrator Ensure the AUX angle is 0 00 degrees Press oPR Select W from VAW on the Tester Press the mode button on the Tester for the text screen mode Verify that the W KW VA KVA and VAR KVAR readings are within the minimum and maximum limits specified in Table 4 3 Press the mode button on the Tester for the harmonics screen mode Verify that the fundamental frequency phase angle readings are between the minimum and maximum readings listed in Table 4 3 Repeat the previous three steps using the calibrator outputs and performance limits listed in Table 4 3 Press on the calibrator to remove the voltage from the Tester 4 64 Testing Harmonics Volts Performance l 2 Press the mode button on the Tester for the harmonics screen Press the VAW button on the Tester until V is displayed above the upper right corner of the harmonics screen Press the REF button on the Tester until Ad is displayed in the top status line Press the SMOOTH button on the Tester until 20s is displayed in the top status line Connect the calibrator
41. Output SCOPE SET TO MODE terminal 5806 PTIOMZ LAST F levsine A 5J AJ Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the frequency response 1 Reconnect the signal by pressing the key on the 5520A Select 50Q impedance or use a 50 Q external termination directly at the oscilloscope input gl032i eps 2 Adjust the sine wave settings in the Output Display according to the calibration recommendations in your oscilloscope manual For example for the Fluke PM3392A oscilloscope start at 120 mV 50 kHz To enter 120 mV press 1 2 10 Hm y then press enter 3 Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary The sine wave should appear at exactly six divisions p p as shown below If necessary make small adjustments to the voltage amplitude until the wave reaches exactly six divisions To fine tune the voltage press to bring a cursor into the Output Display move the cursor with the 4 key and turn the rotary knob to adjust the value See Fine Tuning Values earlier in this chapter gl009i bmp 8 78 5520A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 4 6 3 Increase the frequency to 60 MHz for 100 MHz instruments or 150 MHz for 200 MHz instruments To enter 60 MHz press 6 0 M then press E Continue to increase the frequency slowly until the waveform decreases to 4 2 div
42. Another softkey appears OUTPUT When you select 20 A for this parameter or you select a current above 3 A the calibrator switches to standby and you must change the test lead to the 20A terminal and press to activate the output 4 25 Setting AC Current Output Complete the following procedure to set an ac current output at the AUX or 20A terminals If you make an entry error press G to clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure ac current on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output maximum six numeric keys For example 123 456 5 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m 6 Press 4 24 Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 7 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 123 456 mA below 2 L nn079f eps 8 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output maximum five numeric keys Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press the kilo multiplier key k Then press the key For example 1 1234 KHz below 1253 456 mh 1 1234 kHz 2 L 9 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and co
43. Changing between Remote and Local Operation Local State Local with Lockout Remote State Remote with Lockout State RS 232 Interface Overview see IEEE 488 Interface Overview Using Commands Types of Commands Device Dependent Commands eene Common Commands essere eene nennen Query Commands Interface Messages IEEE 488 serene Compound Coupled Commands Overlapped Sequential Commands that Require the Calibration Switch Commands for RS 232 Only Commands for IEEE 488 Only Command Syntax Parameter Syntax oett entren et a aene Extra Space or Tab Characters eee Terminators Incoming Character Processing esee Response Message Syntax Checking 5520 Status Serial Poll Status Byte STB sse Service Request SRQ Line Service Request Enable Register SRE Programming the STB and SRE esee Event Status Register Event Status Enable Bit Assignments for ESE
44. NORMAL AUX SCOPE v 5 AUX V OUT A ON S aay wp ay 1000 RMS MAX MAX MAX Connection wiring must match thermocouple type e g K J etc nn049f eps Figure 4 10 UUT Connection Temperature Thermocouple 4 19 RMS Versus Amplitude The 5520A Calibrator ranges for sinusoidal ac functions are specified in rms root mean square the effective value of the wave form For example 1 0 to 32 999 mV 33 to 329 999 mV 0 33 to 3 29999 V and so forth The sine wave outputs are in rms while the triangle wave square wave and truncated sine wave outputs are in p p The relationship between p p and rms for the non sine wave types are as follows e Square wave p p x 0 5000000 rms e Triangle wave p p x 0 2886751 rms e Truncated Sine wave p p x 0 2165063 rms 5520A Operators Manual While the ac function ranges are directly compatible for sine waves the rms content of the other waveforms is less apparent This characteristic leads to subtle calibrator range changes For example if you enter a sine wave voltage of 6 V rms assumed the selected range is 3 3 to 32 9999 V If you then use the softkeys to change from a sine wave to a triangle wave for example the display changes from 6 V rms to 6 V p p This translates to 6 V p p x 0 2886751 1 73205 V rms and the range switches to 0 33 to 3 29999 V The Output Display shows the range change because the sine wa
45. Note Since this is a synthesized output be sure the terminal connections from the 5520A to the UUT are LO to LO and HI to HI Set the UUT to measure capacitance on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired capacitance output maximum five numeric keys For example 123 45 5 Press a multiplier key preceded with the key for the desired output For example press then m for The other multiplier keys include for pF and k for nF 6 Press F4 4 38 Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 7 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your capacitance entry For example 123 45 uF below 1z3 45 uF 2 L 8 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical ba Lal P DTI T STBY nn100f eps 9 Press to activate the calibrator output The softkey in the Control Display labeled COMP allows you to select one of three lead compensation settings COMP arr IS s a oF F 2 Wire nn101f eps e COMP Compensation Applies 2 wire compensation or turns compensation off Compensation refers to methods of connecting the 5520A to the UUT to cancel out test lead resistance NOT capacitance Compensation is available for capacitances of 110 nF and above This softkey will not function below 110 nF
46. Returns decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 if bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT are set to 1 ISCR1 X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register query Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register Response Example value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 ISCR1 returns 6272 Returns decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 if bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT are set to 1 6 23 5520A Operators Manual 6 24 ISR IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status Register query Returns contents of the Instrument Status Register Response value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example ISR returns 6272 Returns decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 if bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT are set to 1 LCOMP xX IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Inductive compensation command Activates or deactivates inductive load compensation for ac current output For current output compensation is allowed when the frequency is less than 440 Hz and the amplitude is less than 0 33 A Compensation is also a
47. VIDEOMARK Returns the VIDEO mode line marker location ZERO_MEAS Zeros the pressure module or sets the zero offset for capacitance measurement using the SC600 ZERO_MEAS Returns the zero offset for the pressure module or capacitance measurement using the SC600 6 7 Output Commands CFREQ DBMZ DBMZ DC_OFFSET DC_OFFSET Returns the optimum frequency value for stimulus for capacitance modes Sets the impedance used for dBm outputs ac volts Returns the impedance used for dBm outputs ac volts Applies a dc offset to an ac output voltage Returns the dc offset voltage 6 5 5520A Operators Manual 6 6 DPF DPF DUTY DUTY FUNC HARMONIC HARMONIC LCOMP LCOMP OPER OPER OUT OUT PHASE PHASE POWER RANGE RANGELCK RANGELCK REFCLOCK REFCLOCK REFPHASE REFPHASE STBY SYNCOUT WAVE WAVE ZCOMP ZCOMP Output Commands cont Sets the displacement power factor phase angle between the NORMAL and AUX terminals for ac power output only Returns the displacement power factor phase angle between the NORMAL and AUX terminals Sets the duty cycle of square wave outputs Returns the duty cycle of square wave outputs Returns the present output measurement or calibration function Makes the frequency of one output be a harmonic multiple of the other output called the fundamental Returns the present instrument harmonic and fundament
48. dc magnitude of limit ac sine wave magnitude of limit rms ac non sine wave magnitude of limit x 3 peak to peak ac with dc offset magnitude of limit x 2 4 absolute peak volts only Parameters positive value negative value Example LIMIT 100V 100V Limit the voltage output to 100 V dc 100 V rms 300 V peak to peak 240 V peak Example LIMIT 1A 1A Limit the current output to 1 A dc 1 A ac rms 3 A peak to peak LIMIT X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Limit query Returns the programmed output magnitude limits for voltage and current Response positive value voltage negative value voltage positive value current negative value current Example LIMIT returns 1020 0000 1020 0000 20 5000 20 5000 Returns the present value of the voltage and current limits reset values shown LOCAL IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Local command Puts the Calibrator into the local state clearing the remote state see the REMOTE command and front panel lockout see the LOCKOUT command This command duplicates the IEEE 488 GTL Go To Local message Parameter None Example LOCAL Set the instrument into the local state clearing the remote state and front panel lockout i
49. e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press oPR To disconnect the signal press stBy e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to cycle through the trigger settings The available trigger settings are off 1 trigger signal appears on each marker 10 trigger signal appears on every tenth marker and 100 trigger signal appears at every 100th marker You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing WS e MODE Indicates you are in Marker mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes 8 80 5520A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 8 108 Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This sample procedure uses the Time Marker function to check the horizontal deflection time base of your oscilloscope See your oscilloscope s manual for the exact time base values recommended for calibration Before you begin this procedure verify that you are in Marker mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output at SCOPE TRIG MODE terminal 520 OFF marker la 2 s gl034i eps Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the time base 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope Select 50 impedance or use an external 50
50. 0 5 100 kHz 03ns 0 5 10 MHz 0 3 ns 1 1 kHz 0 3 ns 4 100 kHz 0 3 1 10 MHz 03ns 25 1 kHz 03ns 25 100 kHz 03ns 25 10 MHz 03ns Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification Table 8 29 Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Hz Value V p p V p p V p p 100 0 2202 10000 0 2202 55 100 1 1002 55 10000 1 1002 100 100 2 0002 100 10000 2 0002 5520A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 8 71 Marker Generator Verification Table 8 30 Marker Generator Verification Period s Measured Value s Deviation s 1 Year Spec s 5 0 0251 s 2 0 00405 s 0 05 3 75E 06 s 0 02 5E 8 0 01 2 5E 8 1e 7 2 5E 13 5 8 1 25 13 26 8 5E 14 1e 8 2 5E 14 5e 9 1 25E 14 2e 9 5E 15 8 72 Pulse Generator Verification Period Table 8 31 Pulse Generator Verification Period Nominal Pulse Width Period Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p s s Value s s s 2 5 8E 08 2E 06 5E 12 25 0 0000005 0 01 2 5E 08 25 0 0000005 0 02 5E 08 8 73 Pulse Generator Verification Pulse Width Table 8 32 Pulse Generator Verification Pulse Width Nominal Pulse Width Period Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p
51. 5520A Operators Manual 6 4 Error Mode Commands EDIT EDIT ERR UNIT INCR MULT NEWREF OLDREF REFOUT ERR UNIT OUT ERR Sets the edit field PRI is specified for the output value in single output functions and the primary output value in dual output functions Returns the edit field setting Chooses how UUT error is shown Returns presently selected value of ERR UNIT Increments or decrements the output as selected by the edit field and enters error mode the same as using the output adjustment knob in local operation Multiplies the reference magnitude as selected by the edit field Sets the reference value to be the present Calibrator output value the same as pressing the NEW REF key in local operation Sets the Calibrator output to the previously programmed reference value the same as pressing the ENTER key in local operation Returns the UUT error computed after shifting the output with the INCR command Returns the value of the reference which is the output values of the Calibrator the last time a new reference was established with an OUT NEWREF or MULT 6 5 External Connection Commands CUR POST Selects the active binding posts for current output This applies to current and power outputs CUR POST Returns the active binding posts for current output EARTH Connects or disconnects the internal guard shield
52. 8 95 5520A Operators Manual 8 122 Marker Generator Function Verification Nominal Interval Measured Interval Deviation 1 Year Spec 5s 25 12 ms 2 00s 4 05 ms 1s 1 03 ms 500 00 ms 262 50 us 200 00 ms 45 00 us 100 00 ms 12 50 us 50 00 ms 3 75 us 20 00 ms 900 000 ns 10 00 ms 350 00 ns 5 00 ms 150 00 ns 2 00 ms 54 000 ns 1 00 ms 26 000 ns 500 00 us 12 750 ns 200 00 us 5 040 ns 100 00 us 2 510 ns 50 00 us 1 287 ns 20 00 us 0 506 ns 10 00 us 0 252 ns 5 00 us 0 125 ns 2 00 us 0 050 ns 1 00 us 0 025 ns 500 000 ns 0 013 ns 200 000 ns 5 000 ps 100 000 ns 2 500 ps 50 000 ns 1 250 ps 20 000 ns 0 500 ps 10 000 ns 0 250 ps 5 000 ns 0 125 ps 2 000 ns 0 050 ps 8 96 Contents Introduction Chapter 9 Accessories Rack Mount Dor ein E vetere IEEE 488 Interface 0 eene RS 232 Null Modem Cables RS 232 Modem 000 0000000000000 e oes 9 1 5520A Operators Manual 9 2 Accessories Introduction 9 9 1 Introduction Table 9 1 summarizes the available models options and accessories including cables and components Table 9 1 Options and Accessories Model Description 802303 552
53. A z gl002i eps Note Units and prefixes printed in red in the upper left corner of the keys are accessed through the key For example to enter 200 us press 2 0 0 Jswrr H 89 If you make an error press CE to clear the Control Display and return to the menu 2 Press to activate the value and move it to the Output Display Other settings in the display will remain unaltered unless you key in an entry and specify the units for that setting 5520A SC600 Option 8 Starting the SC600 Option 8 22 Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob To adjust values in the Output Display using the rotary knob 1 Turn the rotary knob A cursor appears in the Output Display under the lowest digit and begins changing that digit If you wish to place the cursor in the field without changing the digit press ing MHz gl003i eps 2 To move the cursor between the voltage and frequency fields press ERIT izo HG mP OPR 100 00 kd tla gl004i eps Use the 4 and K keys to move the cursor to the digit you want to change 4 Turn the rotary knob to change the value When you use the rotary knob in either VOLT mode or MARKER mode the Control Display shows the new value s percentage change from the reference value This is useful for determining the percentage of error on the oscilloscope You can set the reference value to the n
54. Returns 56 when bits 3 EAV 4 MAV and 5 ESR are enabled SRQSTR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Service Request String command Sets the Serial Mode SRQ Service Request response up to 40 characters in the Calibrator non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands The SRQSTR is sent to the host over the serial interface when the SRQ line is asserted terminal mode only Default format is SRO 02x 02x 04x 04x where the term 02x 8 bits means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 2 hex digits and 04x 16 bits means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 4 hex digits The string representations are SRO STB ESR ISCRO ISCR1 See the commands respectively STB ESR ISCRO and ISCR1 A typical string in the default format sent to the host is SRQ 44 00 0000 1000 This command is for format See the SPLSTR command for the serial poll response Parameter lt string gt n n represents the Line Feed character hex 0A Example SROSTR SRO 02x 02x 04 504 Set the SRQSTR to the default values SRO 02x 02x 04x 04x n SRQSTR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled
55. Service Information in Chapter 2 5520A Operators Manual 1 8 5520 Operators Manual This 5520A Operators Manual provides complete information for installing the 5520A Calibrator and operating it from the front panel keys and in remote configurations This manual also provides a glossary of calibration specifications and error code information The Operators Manual includes the following topics e Installation e Operating controls and features including front panel operation e Remote operation IEEE 488 bus or serial port remote control e Serial port operation printing displaying or transferring data and setting up for serial port remote control e Operator maintenance including verification procedures and calibration approach for the 5520A e Oscilloscope calibration options e Accessories 5520A Operator Manual includes two pocket sized booklets one for front panel operation and one for remote programming 1 9 55204 Operators Guide The 5520A Operators Guide contains a summary of operating instructions and a front panel and rear panel feature reference This guide is included with this manual and is available in seven languages listed on the previous page 1 10 5520A Programmers Guide The 5520A Programmers Guide contains a summary of remote commands and reference information useful in determining system status using the status byte and related registers This guide is included with this manua
56. Service Request String query Returns the string programmed for Serial Mode SRQ response This is the format of the Service Request String actual values come from the registers Also see the SPLSTR command Response lt string gt Example SROSTR returns SRO 02x 02x 04x 04x n Returns the SRQSTR string format default settings in this example STB 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Status Byte Register query Returns the byte for the Status Byte Register See Status Byte Register STB in Chapter 5 Response value the decimal equivalent of the STB byte 0 to 255 Example STB returns 72 Returns 72 if bits 3 EAV and 6 MSS are set 6 45 5520A Operators Manual 6 46 STBY X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Standby command Deactivates the Calibrator output if it is in operate This is the same as pressing the Calibrator front panel key Parameter None Example STBY Disconnect the selected output from the Calibrator front panel terminals SYNCOUT xX IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Synchronization Pulse command Sends a synchronization pulse out to a slave Calibrator through the 10 MHZ OUT BNC connector Parameter None
57. Summary of Commands and Queries see 5520A Operators Manual 8 58 8 111 Verification Tables 8 112 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 1 MQ Load 8 113 8 114 8 115 8 116 8 117 8 118 8 119 8 120 8 121 8 122 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 50 Load Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 50 Load Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 1 MQ Load Edge Function Verification Wave Generator Function Verification 1 MQ Load Wave Generator Function Verification 50 O Load Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Amplitude Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Flatness Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Frequency Marker Generator Function Verification 5520A SC300 Option 8 Introduction 8 76 Introduction The Oscilloscope Calibration Option provides functions that help you maintain your oscilloscope s accuracy by verifying the following oscilloscope characteristics Vertical deflection characteristics are verified by calibrating the voltage gain The Volt function lets you compare the voltage gain to the graticule lines on the oscilloscope Pulse response is checked using the Edge function by verifying the accuracy of the oscilloscope s measurement of pulse transitions Frequ
58. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage entry For example 123 456 mV below 123 4568 mV 2 L Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press A The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage and current entries For example 123 456 mV and 234 567 mA below 1253 496 mV zid SEF mA 2 L Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output maximum five numeric keys Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press the kilo multiplier key k Then press the key For example 1 1234 kHz 4 29 5520A Operators Manual 13 The Control Display now shows your entries For example 123 456 mV and 234 567 mA at 1 1234 KHz below 123 456 mV 1 1234 kHz 234 56 mh 2 L 14 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 234 567 m nn087f eps 15 Press to activate the calibrator output When changing power output levels you must reenter both voltage and current in either order Enter voltage or current and then a watts entry value using The remaining volts or current value is calculated
59. oT mil I OUT WAVE z MEHLIS HARMONIC Y WAVE I WAVE FHESE HEHLIZ sine zine operi 4 4 2 1 HIIS EO FUNDMTL normal na 4 1 tn normal au aux 60 00 Hz nn108f eps 3 Press the softkey FUNDMTL to select the 5520A Calibrator front panel terminals for the fundamental output either NORMAL or AUX The harmonic appears on the 5520A AUX terminals 4 Press the softkey HARMNIC to enter the desired harmonic 1 to 50 with a maximum frequency output of 10 kHz For example entering the 7th harmonic below When the control display shows the desired value press ENTER Harmonic 1 harmonic 2 AT A 5 Press one or more times to return to previous menus nn109f eps 4 41 Adjusting the Phase When in the dual ac voltage and ac power output modes you can set the calibrator to source two signals with adjustable phase difference All phase adjustments shift the AUX waveform in relation to the NORMAL waveform Phase shift adjustments are entered into the calibrator either as degrees 0 to 180 00 or as a power factor PF A leading or positive phase shift will cause the AUX waveform to lead the NORMAL waveform a lagging or negative phase shift will cause the AUX waveform to lag the NORMAL waveform 4 49 5520A Operators Manual 4 42 4 50 The softkey PHASE is available after pressi
60. 10 us to 1 296 196 to 9995 3 3 V p p 0 8 of period 100 ns of final value 0 01 Hz to 100 kHz 0 02 of period 100 ns 5096 duty cycle 0 05 of period 100 ns other duty cycles from 10 to 9096 1 34 AC Voltage Triangle Wave Characteristics typical Linearity to 1 kHz Aberrations 0 3 of p p value from 10 to 90 point lt 1 of p p value with amplitude gt 50 of range 1 35 AC Current Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty Max teal 5 Current Range Frequency of output of range Resolution All current ranges 330 mA 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 0 5 2 digits 5520A Operators Manual 1 32 1 36 AC Current Non Sine Wave Specifications Triangle Wave amp Truncated Sine Wave 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty Max Range tcal 5 Current p p Frequency t 96 of output of range Resolution 0 047 mA 0 01 Hzo 10 Hz 5 0 4 0 5 Two digits to 0 92999 mA 1 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 0 5 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 4 0 25 Six digits 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1042 0 93 mA to 0 01Hzto10Hz 5 0 4 0 5 Two digits 9 29999 mA 1 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 4 0 5 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 0 25 Six digits 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1042 9 3 mA to 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 40 5 Two digits 92 9999 mA 1 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 4 0 5 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 0 25 Six digits 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1042 93 mA to 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 4 0 5 Two digits
61. 2 2 This is the primary instrument setup menu The list below describes submenus available through each softkey and tells you where you can find further information in the manuals e CAL Calibration Opens the calibration menu You use softkeys in this menu to view the calibration dates print a calibration report and perform 5520A calibration and to run the Zero calibration routine Zero calibration is described later in this chapter e SHOW SPECS Show Specifications Displays published 5520A Calibrator specifications for the output value that is currently selected INSTMT SETUP Instrument Setup Lets you change the power up or reset default setting for various instrument parameters Many of the same parameters in this menu can be changed during operation but the changes you make during operation are volatile Changing them here makes them nonvolatile To restore factory defaults use the Format NV Memory menu under the UTILITY FUNCTNS menu Front Panel Operation 4 Using the Setup Menu UTILITY FUNCTNS Utility Functions Allows you to initiate self tests format the nonvolatile memory restore factory default settings and review the instrument configuration software versions and user report string These features are explained under Utilities Function Menu later in this chapter Using the Instrument Setup Menu The softkeys in the instrument setup menu accessed by pressing INSTMT SETUP softkey
62. 8 22 8 34 8 36 5520A SC600 Option Contents SC600 Option Specifications eese nennen Volt Specifications sessies ered enea MM Edge Sp cifiCatiOns c ree nhe m E ei Eh Leveled Sine Wave Time Marker Specifications sss eee eee eee eee Wave Generator Pulse Generator Specifications seen Trigger Signal Specifications Pulse Function Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker Function Trigger Signal Specifications Edge Function Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function Trigger Signal Specifications essen Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications Overload Measurement Specifications esee Oscilloscope Connections rresia Starting the SC600 The Output Signal ettet vee k aka Adjusting the Output Signal Ke ytng 1n a Value ene oett eerta cett ete eh etai Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob Using and rA Resetting the SC600 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope
63. Before the SC300 Option leaves the Fluke factory it is verified to meet its specifications at the following test points The verification test points are provided here as a guide when re verification is desired 8 112 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 1 MQ Load 5 0 mV 5 0 mV 5 0 mV 5 0 mV 5 0 mV 10 0 mV 20 0 mV 20 0 mV 20 0 mV 50 0 mV 89 0 mV 89 0 mV 100 0 mV 200 0 mV 200 0 mV 200 0 mV 500 0 mV 890 0 mV 890 0 mV 1 0V 1 0V 1 0V 2 0V 5 0 V 5 0 V 10 0 V 20 0 V 8 86 Nominal Value p p Freguency 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 Hz 10 kHz 10 kHz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 Hz 10 kHz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 Hz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz Measured Value p p Deviation 1 Year mV Spec mV 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 12 60 12 60 25 10 50 10 cer De Oe jS Slej l lalalala l ta O mimieolo o o nm 5520A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 1 MQ Load cont Deviation 1 Year Spec Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p mV mV 50 0 V 10 Hz 125 10 50 0 V 100 Hz 125 10 50 0 V 1 kHz 125 10 50 0 V 10 kHz 125 10 105 0 V 100 Hz 262 60 105 0 V 1 kHz 262 60 8 113 Voltage Function Verification
64. C of watts output 1 3 3 mA to 8 999 mA 90 mA to 329 99 mA 90 days 0 13 0 09 0 13 0 09 330 mV to 1020 V 0 11 0 07 1 year 33 to 329 999 mV 0 14 0 10 0 14 0 10 330 mV to 1020 V 0 12 0 08 0 12 0 08 Current Range 2 0 33 A to 0 9 A to 2 2 Ato 4 5 A to 0 8999 A 2 1999 A 4 4999 A 20 5 A aE Voltage Range Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C of watts output 1 90 days 33 to 329 999 mV 0 12 0 10 0 12 0 10 330 mV to 1020 V 0 10 0 08 0 11 0 09 year 33 to 329 999 mV 0 13 0 11 0 13 0 11 330 mV to 1020 V 0 11 0 09 0 12 0 10 1 To determine ac power uncertainty with more precision see the individual DC Voltage Specifications and DC Current Specifications and Calculating Power Uncertainty 2 Add 0 02 unless a settling time of 30 seconds is allowed for output currents gt 10A or for currents on the highest two current ranges within 30 seconds of an output current gt 10A 1 22 Introduction and Specifications Specifications 1 1 24 Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications lc rem Voltages Voltages Factor NORMAL Cans AUX PF dc O0ts1020V 010 20 5 01027 V 10 Hz to 45 Hz 33 mV to 32 9999 V 3 3 mA to 2 99999 A 10mVto5V 0to1 45 Hz to 65 Hz 33 mV to 1000 V 3 3 mA to 20 5A 10 mV to 5 V Oto 1 65 Hz to 500 Hz 330 mV to 1000 V 33 mA to 2 99999 A 100 mV to5 V Oto 1 65 Hz to 500 Hz
65. SHOW O INSTMT FUTILITY SPECS i SETUP FUNCTHS SHOW SPECS is an online summary of the programmed output specifications SELF FORMAT INSTMT i TEST i MY CONFIG Aj a la to AG to F to C If self test does not pass error codes are displayed See chapter 7 Maintenance a SWE SHOW SERTAL SHOW USER VERSIONS OPTIONS REPORT STRING AA a la toE to D SERIAL displays the serial number of the instrument When corresponding with the factory always include the serial number of the instrument USER REPORT STRING CONTENTS T5206 SH xxxxxx izt CAL A USER REPORT STRING CONTENTS refer to a string of characters entered by the user for reporting purposes nn014f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays 3 13 5520A Operators Manual SOFTWARE Hain 1 10 Inauard 1 3 REVISIONS Encoder 1 2 A laj a la Actual revision numbers replace 1 0 for each of the above E Fa rmat HM Memo ALL i CAL SETUP A A la la la Format NV non volatile Memory should be used with caution Changes are non reversible The softkeys function only when the rear panel CALIBRATION switch is set to ENABLE except for the softkey SETUP which is not dependent on the CALIBRATION switch position All sets all calibration and setup constants to factory s
66. The following description assumes that you have selected VOLT mode from the SCOPE menu The Control Displays appears as follows with VOLT mode selected Output SCOPE TRIG V DIV MODE 1 MQ DC AC off MENU volt The location of the output signal is indicated on the Control Display the display on the right side If your Calibrator is connected but the output does not appear on the oscilloscope you may have the Calibrator in standby mode The settings for the output signal are indicated in the Output Display the display on the left side If STBY is displayed press the key The Output Display will show OPR and the output should appear on the oscilloscope 8 20 Adjusting the Output Signal The Calibrator provides several ways to change the settings for the output signal during calibration Since oscilloscope calibration requires many adjustments of the output signal the three available methods for changing these settings for oscilloscope calibration are summarized below These methods provide the means of jumping to a new value or sweeping through a range of values 8 21 Keying in a Value The following example is for use in the LEVSINE mode To key a specific value directly into the Calibrator from its front panel 1 Key in the value you want to enter including the units and prefixes For example to enter 120 mV press 1 2 0 Pm y The Control Display will show 120 my
67. Write Status Register Command Command Serial Poll Status Byte STB STB Service Request Enable Register SRE SRE Event Status Register ESR ESR Event Status Enable Register ESE ESE Instrument Status Register ISR ISR Instrument Status Change Register ISCR ISCR ISCR 1 to 0 transition ISCRO ISCR 0 to 1 transition ISCR1 Instrument Status Change Enable Register ISCE ISCE ISCE 1 to 0 transition ISCEO ISCE 0 to 1 transition ISCE1 Each status register and queue has a summary bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte Enable registers are used to mask various bits in the status registers and generate summary bits in the Serial Poll Status Byte For IEEE 488 interface operation the Service Request Enable Register is used to assert the SRQ control line on detection of any status condition or conditions the programmer chooses For RS 232 interface operation the SRQSTR string is sent over the serial interface when the SRQ line is set See the SROSTR command description in Chapter 6 for more information 5 43 Serial Poll Status Byte STB The Calibrator sends the serial poll status byte STB when it responds to a serial poll This byte is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on The STB byte is defined as shown in Figure 5 9 If you are using the RS 232 as the remote control interface transmitting the P character in the Terminal mode hold down the lt Cntl gt key and press P returns the SPLSTR Serial
68. ZERO nn07Of eps 4 7 5520A Operators Manual 4 11 Using the Operate and Standby Modes When the OPERATE annunciator is lit and OPR is displayed the output value and function shown on the Output Display is active at the selected terminals When STBY is displayed in the Output Display all calibrator outputs are open circuited except for the front panel thermocouple TC terminals To enable the operate mode press oPR To place the calibrator in standby press setup If the calibrator is operating and any of the following events occur the calibrator automatically goes into the standby mode The key is pressed voltage gt 33 V is selected when the previous output voltage was less than 33 V e Output function is changed between ac or dc voltage when the output voltage is 2 33 V ac or dc current temperature and any other function resistance and any other function capacitance and any other function e A p p voltage output square wave triangle wave or truncated sine wave changes to rms voltage output 2 33 V sine wave For example if a p p output of 40 V is changed to rms output of 40 V by changing the wave form using the WAVE softkey the calibrator goes into the standby mode output location for current is changed from AUX to 20 A or vice versa e An overload condition is detected 4 8 Front Panel Operation 4 Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4 12 Connecting the Calibrato
69. causes the output signal to jump immediately to a new frequency setting Sweep causes the signal to sweep through a series of frequency values over a range you set Use the sweep function to watch the signal gradually change over a given bandwidth and see the point at which its amplitude changes Details for using the sweep function are provided under Sweeping Through a Frequency Range e RATE Used when FREQ CHANGE is set to sweep to toggle the sweep speed between fast and slow The slow speed is one tenth the fast speed The slow sweep rate lets you watch the frequency change very slowly After a fast sweep you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slow sweep over a subset of your previous frequency range 8 75 5520A Operators Manual 8 76 RANGE The softkeys toggle between two settings auto which adjusts the range limit automatically in accordance with the voltage level and locked which sets the available voltages to one range There are six range limits in Levsine mode 10 mV 40 mV 100 mV 400 mV 1 3 V and 5 5 V When set to auto the calibrator uses your voltage setting to automatically set the range limit that provides the most accurate output When set to locked the range limit remains fixed and you can decrease the voltage down to 0 V within any range limit For example assume the range limit is 40 mV If you set the 40 mV range to auto and then enter 1 mV the
70. mV mV 5 0 mV 50 kHz 0 300 10 0 mV 50 kHz 0 400 20 0 mV 50 kHz 0 600 40 0 mV 50 kHz 1 000 50 0 mV 50 kHz 1 200 100 0 mV 50 kHz 2 200 200 0 mV 50 kHz 4 200 5520A Operators Manual 8 92 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Amplitude cont oo ma Measured Value Deviation nee Nominal Value p p Freguency p P mV mV 400 0 mV 50 kHz 8 200 500 0 mV 50 kHz 1 200 1 3 V 50 kHz 26 200 2 0 V 50 kHz 40 200 5 5 V 50 kHz 110 200 8 120 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Flatness Nominal Value p p Freguency Measured Value p p mV mV 5 0 mV 500 kHz 0 17 5 0 mV 1 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 1 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 2 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 5 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 10 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 20 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 50 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 100 MHz 0 17 5 0 mV 125 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 160 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 200 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 220 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 235 MHz 0 20 5 0 mV 250 MHz 0 20 10 0 mV 500 kHz 0 25 10 0 mV 1 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 1 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 2 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 5 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 10 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 20 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 50 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 100 MHz 0 25 10 0 mV 125 MHz 0 30 5520A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Flatness cont
71. uP S E L 4 Press not several times until the message STORE CHANGES DISCARD CHANGES appears or if there were no changes the reset display If you select STORE CHANGES the gpib and host port setting are saved in the instrument non volatile memory nn120f eps Remote Operation 5 Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control 5 4 Testing the IEEE 488 Port The procedure below tests IEEE 488 communications between the PC and the Calibrator using the Win32 Interactive Control utility This utility is supplied with National Instruments interface cards for the PC which are the recommended interfaces See Chapter 9 Accessories A typical connection is shown in Figure 5 3 IEEE 488 Cable IEEE 488 IEEE 488 Port Port E s s 5520A Calibrator UUT Controller nn302f eps Figure 5 3 Testing the IEEE 488 Port Complete the following procedure to test IEEE 488 operation using Win32 Interactive Control 1 Complete the IEBE 488 Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5520A for GPIB operation Note the GPIB Address Port default is 4 2 Connect the PC and 5520A IEEE 488 ports using a standard IEEE 488 cable See Chapter 9 Accessories for IEEE 488 cables available from Fluke 3 From the programs menu select NI 488 2M software for your operating system 4 From the NIA88 2M software menu selec
72. unterminated action or interrupted action DDE Device Specific Error caused by the 5520A due to some condition for example overrange EXE Execution Error caused by an element outside of or inconsistent with the 5520A capabilities CME Command Error caused by incorrect command syntax unrecognized header or parameter of the wrong type QYE DDE FR Description F Error is displayed on the front panel as it occurs R Error is queued to the remote interface as it occurs S Error causes instrument to go to Standby D Error causes instrument returns to the power up state none Error is returned to the initiator only i e local initiator or remote initiator No Error Error queue overflow DDE FR D Inguard not responding send Text characters Up to 36 text characters E 1 5520A Operators Manual E 2 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 398 399 400 401 402 403 405 406 407 408 DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR DDE DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE
73. 0 0002485 0 0099 120 MHz 0 000298 0 0099 290 MHz 0 000298 0 0099 360 MHz 0 000496 0 0099 390 MHz 0 000496 0 0099 400 MHz 0 000496 0 0099 480 MHz 0 000496 0 0099 570 MHz 0 000496 0 0099 580 MHz 0 000496 0 0099 590 MHz 0 000496 0 0099 600 MHz 0 000496 8 47 5520A Operators Manual 8 48 Table 8 24 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Frequency Value V p p 0 01 50 kHz na na 0 01 30 MHz 0 00025 0 01 70 MHz 0 00025 0 01 120 MHz 0 0003 0 01 290 MHz 0 0003 0 01 360 MHz 0 0005 0 01 390 MHz 0 0005 0 01 400 MHz 0 0005 0 01 480 MHz 0 0005 0 01 570 MHz 0 0005 0 01 580 MHz 0 0005 0 01 590 MHz 0 0005 0 01 600 MHz 0 0005 0 025 50 kHz na na 0 025 30 MHz 0 000475 0 025 70 MHz 0 000475 0 025 120 MHz 0 0006 0 025 290 MHz 0 0006 0 025 360 MHz 0 0011 0 025 390 MHz 0 0011 0 025 400 MHz 0 0011 0 025 480 MHz 0 0011 0 025 570 MHz 0 0011 0 025 580 MHz 0 0011 0 025 590 MHz 0 0011 0 025 600 MHz 0 0011 0 039 50 kHz na na 0 039 30 MHz 0 000685 0 039 70 M
74. 5 5 100 2 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 200 2 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 200 2 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 400 MHz 33 harmonic 5 5 400 2 38 2nd harmonic 5 5 600 MHz 33 3rd harmonic 5 5 600 MHz 38 5520A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 8 65 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness Table 8 24 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Frequency Value V p p 0 005 50 kHz na na 0 005 30 MHz 0 000175 0 005 70 MHz 0 000175 0 005 120 MHz 0 0002 0 005 290 MHz 0 0002 0 005 360 MHz 0 0003 0 005 390 MHz 0 0003 0 005 400 MHz 0 0003 0 005 480 MHz 0 0003 0 005 570 MHz 0 0003 0 005 580 MHz 0 0003 0 005 590 MHz 0 0003 0 005 600 MHz 0 0003 0 0075 50 kHz na na 0 0075 30 MHz 0 0002125 0 0075 70 MHz 0 0002125 0 0075 120 MHz 0 00025 0 0075 290 MHz 0 00025 0 0075 360 MHz 0 0004 0 0075 390 MHz 0 0004 0 0075 400 MHz 0 0004 0 0075 480 MHz 0 0004 0 0075 570 MHz 0 0004 0 0075 580 MHz 0 0004 0 0075 590 MHz 0 0004 0 0075 600 MHz 0 0004 0 0099 50 kHz na na 0 0099 30 MHz 0 0002485 0 0099 70 MHz
75. 929 999 mA 1 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 4 0 5 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 4 0 5 Six digits 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1042 0 93 A to 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 5 1 0 8 49999 A 45 Hz to 1kHz 0 5 4 0 5 1 kHz to 10 kHz 10 2 Six digits 8 5 A to 57 A 2 45 Hz to 500 Hz 0 5 4 0 5 500 Hz to 1 kHz 10410 1 Frequency limited to 1 kHz with LCOMP on 2 Freguency limited to 440 Hz with LCOMP on Introduction and Specifications Additional Specifications 1 AC Current Non Sine Wave Specifications cont 1 Year Absolute Square Wave Uncertainty Max Range tcal 5 C Current p p Frequency t of output 96 of range Resolution 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 4 0 5 Two digits 0 047 mA to 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 4 0 5 0 65999 mA 1 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 0 25 Six digits 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1042 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 0 5 Two digits 0 66 mA to 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 40 5 6 59999 mA 1 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 0 25 Six digits 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1042 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 0 5 Two digits 6 6 mA to 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 0 5 65 9999 mA 1 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 0 25 Six digits 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1042 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 0 5 Two digits 66 mA to 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 0 5 659 999 mA 1 45HztoikHz 0 25 0 5 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1042 0 66 A to 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 5 1 0 Six digits 5 99999 A 2 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 5 0 5 1 kHz to 10 kHz 10 2 6 Ato 41 A 2 45 Hz to 500 Hz 0 5 4 0 5 500 Hz to 1 k
76. Distortion Characteristics 2nd Harmonic lt 35 dBc 3rd and Higher Harmonics lt 40 dBc 1 Extended frequency range to 350 MHz is provided but flatness is not specified to 3 V for frequencies above 250 MHz Amplitude is limited 2 Within one hour after reference amplitude setting provided temperature varies no more than 5 C 3 At frequencies below 120 kHz the resolution is 10 Hz For frequencies between 120 kHz and 999 9 kHz the resolution is 100 Hz 4 25 ppm 15 mHz for frequencies of 1 MHz and below 5520A SC300 Option Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications 8 8 81 Time Marker Function Specifications 1 us to 10 ns to Time Marker into 50 5 s to 100 us 20 ns 2 ns 1 Year Absolute 25 t 1000 25 t 15 000 25 ppm 25 ppm Uncertainty tcal 5 C ppm 1 ppm 1 Wave Shape pulsed pulsed sawtooth pulsed sine sawtooth sawtooth Typical Output Level gt 1V pk gt 1V pk gt 1V pk gt 2Vp p 2 Sequence 5 2 1 from 5 s to 2 ns e g 500 ms 200 ms 100 ms Adjustment Range At least 10 around each sequence value indicated above Resolution 4 digits 1 t is the time in seconds 2 The 2 ns time marker is typically gt 0 5 V p p 8 82 Wave Generator Specifications Wave Generator Characteristics Amplitude Range Sguare Wave Sine Wave and Triangle Wave into 50 O or 1 MO into 1 MO into 50 Q 1
77. Example SYNCOUT TC MEAS IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Measure command Selects the measure thermocouple mode Parameters CEL Celsius optional FAR Fahrenheit optional Example TC_MEAS CEL Measure the thermocouple temperature that is attached to the Calibrator TC terminals in Celsius TC OFFSET X 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Temperature Measurement Offset command Adds a temperature offset to thermocouple measurements 500 C This command does not apply to thermocouple sourcing Parameters value CEL offset in Celsius optional value FAR offset in Fahrenheit optional Example TC OHFFSET 10 CEL Add a temperature offset of 10 C to the thermocouple measurements TC OFFSET X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Temperature Measurement Offset query Returns the temperature offset used for thermocouple measurements 500 C Responses value CEL offset in Celsius optional value FAR offset in Fahrenheit optional Example TC OFFSET returns 1 000E 01 CEL Returns 10 Celsius when a temperature offset of 10 C has been added to the thermocoup
78. Examples SCOPE VIDEO OUT 90 Video 9096 output SCOPE VIDEO OUT 70 Video 70 output inverse video PULSE Oscilloscope PULSE mode Programs 100 ns pulse width 1 000 us period 2 5 V range FUNC returns PULSE Example SCOPE PULSE OUT 50 ns 500 ns RANGE TP8DB Pulse 50 ns pulse width 500 ns period 1 5 V range MEASZ Oscliiosesee Inpedance Capactancs measurement MEAS Z mode Programs 500 range FUNC returns MEASZ Example SCOPE MEASZ RANGE TZCAP MEAS Z mode capacitance range OVERLD Oscilloscope Overibad mode Programs 5 V dc range FUNC returns OVERLD Example SCOPE OVERLD OUT 7 V RANGE TOLAC Overload 7 V output ac range SCOPE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the oscilloscope s current mode of operation Returns OFF if the oscilloscope is off Parameter Response TRIG None character Returns OFF VOLT EDGE LEVSINE MARKER WAVEG EN VI D EO PULSE M IEEE 488 RS 232 Overlapped Programs the oscilloscope s trigger output BNC Parameters Example OFF Du Vj 100 EASZ or OVI Turns the trigger output off Turns the trigger output on Frequency is the same as the signal at SCOPE output Turns the trigger output on Frequency is 1 10 of the signal at SCOPI Turns the trigger output on Frequency is 1 100 of the signal at SCOPI TRIG DIV
79. Extended Bandwidth Specifications 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty Max Voltage Range Frequency tcal 5 Resolution Normal Channel Single Output Mode 10mVto33mV 0 01 Hz to 9 99 Hz 5 0 of output Two digits e g 25 mV 34 mV to 330 mV 0 5 of range Three digits 0 4 V to 33 V Two digits 0 3 V to 3 3 V 500 1 kHz to 1 MHz 10 dB at 1 MHz typical Two digits 1 001 MHz to 2 MHz 31 dB at 2 MHz typical Auxiliary Output Dual Output Mode 10 mV to 330 mV 0 01 Hz to 9 99 Hz 5 0 of output Three digits 0 4Vto5V 0 5 of range Two digits 1 28 Introduction and Specifications 1 Additional Specifications 1 31 AC Voltage Non Sine Wave Specifications Triangle Wave amp 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty Truncated Sine tcal 5 C Max Voltage Range p p 1 Frequency t of output of range 2 Resolution Normal Channel Single Output Mode 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 4 0 5 Two digits on 2 9 mV each range to 93 V 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 0 5 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 0 25 Six digits on 1 kHz to 20 kHz 0 5 0 25 each range 20 kHz to 100 kHz 3 5 0 0 5 Auxiliary Output Dual Output Mode 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 4 0 5 Two digits on 93 mV each range to 14 V 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 0 5 Six digits on 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 0 25 each range 1 kHz to 10 kHz 5 04 0 5 1 To convert p p to rms for triangle wave multiply the p p value by 0 2886751 To conve
80. Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont nn019f eps Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees I LIN 201 S000 i UPPER i LOWER I LIN 20 5000 i LIMIT i LIMIT A laj a laj 20 5000 to 20 5000 Wa LIH 1020 0000 UPPER LOWER We LIM 1020 0000 i LIMIT i LIMIT A 4 PS 1020 0000 to 1020 0000 GO day spec OOO UV 1 Year Spec OOO UV SHOW SPECS is an online summary of the programmed output specifications STORE CAL CAL fag PRINT COMNSTS i OATES i SETUP i REPORTS X Aa S MS to Y to AC to AA STOP REPORTS Select the desired CAL Calibration feature CAL to calibrate the 5520A see the Service Manual CAL DATES to review when the 5500A Calibrator was last calibrated CAL REPORTS to printout the calibration data Zero 1997 07 05 03 77 13 i MORE Ohms Zero l 7 0 03 03 27 13 i GATES Aa A A Y MATH 0197 09 09 08 22 13 MORE GG UGG us nnO20f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 19 5520A Operators Manual INTERYLI FORMAT DEST print i host ES LHS i i FAGE ear stored i active coms ts stored SCOPE OHMS ZERO AC CAL i CAL i ZERO i i backup A A A A A I Only if scope to AE to AD abort Gon L SS Lep option installed 5520A CAL opens the calibration menu Refer to the Ser
81. Following pulse verification the frequency response is checked by applying a leveled sine wave and acquiring a frequency reading at the 3 dB point when the amplitude drops approximately 30 8 31 The Edge Function The EDGE function is used for calibrating the pulse response for your oscilloscope To reach the EDGE menu press the softkey under MODE until edge appears Output at SCOPE TDPULSE TRIG MODE terminal 500 off off volt on 1 edge levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu Each option in the EDGE menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 500 Indicates the location and impedance of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press stev You cannot change the output impedance in EDGE mode TD PULSE Press once to turn the Tunnel Diode Pulser drive signal on again to turn the Pulser drive off This signal sources up to 100 V p p to drive a Tunnel Diode Pulser Fluke Part Number 606522 Tektronix 067 0681 01 or equivalent e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to toggle the trigger off and on When on the reading will show 1 which indicates that the external trigger is at the same frequency as the edge output The external trigger c
82. Pulse Width Input Impedance Verification Resistance Input Impedance Verification Capacitance 5520A SC600 Option 8 Introduction 8 1 Introduction The SC600 Option provides functions that help you maintain your oscilloscope s accuracy by verifying and calibrating the following oscilloscope characteristics 8 2 Vertical deflection characteristics are calibrated and verified The VOLT function lets you compare the voltage gain to the graticule lines on the oscilloscope Pulse transient response is checked and calibrated verifying the accuracy of the oscilloscope s measurement of pulse transitions using the EDGE function Also the calibrator supports even faster pulse response checks using an external tunnel diode pulser Frequency response is checked by verifying the bandwidth using the Leveled Sine Wave LEVSINE function Vertical deflection is monitored until the 3 dB point is observed on the oscilloscope Horizontal time base deflection characteristics are calibrated and verified using the Time MARKER function This calibration procedure is similar to the one for verifying the vertical deflection characteristics except that it checks the horizontal axis The oscilloscope s ability to display capture and measure pulse width is checked using the PULSE function This function allows you to vary both the
83. RTD TYPE select the output temperature using the OUT command Changes in temperature sensors changes the output to 0 C Once set the Calibrator retains the RTD type until power off or reset Parameters PT385 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 200 200 ohm RTD curve az0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 500 500 ohm RTD curve o 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 1000 1000 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT3926 100 ohm RTD curve 00 003926 ohms ohm C PT3916 100 ohm RTD curve o 0 003916 ohms ohm C CU10 10 ohm RTD empirical curve NI120 120 ohm RTD empirical curve Example RTD TYPE PT3926 Set the RTD type to a 100 ohm type using the pt3926 curve 00 003926 ohms ohm C The resistance of 100 ohms refers to the ice point characteristic the resistance of the RTD at 0 C 32 F TYPE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Resistance Temperature Detector Type query Returns the Resistance Temperature Detector RTD type used for RTD temperature simulations Responses PT385 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 200 200 ohm RTD curve a 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 500 500 ohm RTD curve 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 1000 1000 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT3926 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 003926 ohms ohm C PT3916 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 003916 ohms ohm C CU10 10 ohm RTD empirical c
84. and thermocouple measuring beads Appendices Appendix Contents A el ide B ASCII and IEEE 488 Bus Codes C RS 232 IEEE 488 Cables and Connectors D Creating a Visual Basic Test E Error MCSSA BES Rm Appendix A Glossary adc analog to digital converter A device or circuit that converts an analog signal to digital signals absolute uncertainty Uncertainty specifications that include the error contributions made by all equipment and standards used to calibrate the instrument Absolute uncertainty is the numbers to compare with the UUT for determining test uncertainty ratio accuracy The degree to which the measured value of a quantity agrees with the true correct value of that quantity For example an instrument specified to 1 uncertainty is 99 accurate apparent power The power value obtained by simply multiplying the ac current by the ac voltage on a circuit without consideration of any phase relationship between the two waveforms See true power for comparison assert To cause a digital signal to go into a logic true state af audio frequency The frequency range of human hearing normally 15 20 000 Hz artifact standard An object that produces or embodies a physical quantity to be standardized for example a Fluke 732A dc Voltage Reference Standard base units Units in the SI system that are dimensionally independent All other
85. except for steps 17 to 20 Caution When you are directed to short a switch grid on the 51 use only the elastomeric switch pad that is supplied because you could damage the printed circuit assembly pca if a hard tool is used 1 Turn the UUT off and remove the top case leaving the in the bottom case 2 Ensure the calibrator is in standby and connect the UUT to the calibrator as shown in Figure 4 22 When making this connection with the UUT case top removed make sure that the wide blade is oriented the same as the case top would normally allow 3 Simultaneously short the TP1 grid and turn on the UUT by shorting the ON OFF switch grid Hold the elastomeric switch pad on for at least 3 seconds after turn on This puts the UUT into the Thermocouple Calibration mode 4 Select C mode and on the UUT Note The next few steps require specific voltages to be present on the inputs of the Thermometer By using the 10 uV C type thermocouple selection of the calibrator you can specify the output voltage on the TC terminals 5 Press 0 enter Ensure the softkey labeled OUTPUT indicates If not press the OUTPUT softkey until it does 6 Press the TYPE softkey until 104 V C is displayed This selection allows you to specify the voltage on the TC terminal 7 Press the TC MENU softkey 4 73 5520A Operators Manual 4 74 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
86. more original frequencies Other forms of distortion are phase distortion and transient distortion errors The different types of errors described in this glossary are offset error linearity error random error scale error systematic errors and transfer error flatness A measure of the variation of the actual output of an ac voltage source at different frequency points when set to the same nominal output level A flat voltage source exhibits very little error throughout its frequency range A 2 Glossary Appendices A floor The part of the uncertainty specification of an instrument that is typically a fixed offset plus noise Floor can be expressed as units such as microvolts or counts of the least significant digit For the 5520A the floor specification is combined with fixed range errors in one term to determine total uncertainty full scale The maximum reading of a range of a meter analog to digital converter or other measurement device or the maximum attainable output on a range of a calibrator gain error Same as scale error Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter s response curve is not exactly 1 A meter with only gain error no offset or linearity error will read OV with OV applied but something other than 10V with 10V applied ground The voltage reference point in a circuit Earth ground is a connection through a ground rod or other conductor to the earth usually
87. output has a higher degree of predictability than a device that exhibits random change primary standard A standard defined and maintained by some authority and used to calibrate all other secondary standards process metrology Tracking the accuracy drift of calibration and other equipment by applying statistical analysis to correction factors obtained during calibration random error Any error which varies in an unpredictable manner in absolute value and in sign when measurements of the same value of a quantity are made under effectively identical conditions range The stated upper end of a measurement device s span Usually however a measurement device can measure quantities for a specified percentage overrange The absolute span including overrange capability is called In the 5520A however range and scale are identical reference standard The highest echelon standard in a laboratory the standard that is used to maintain working standards that are used in routine calibration and comparison procedures relative uncertainty 5520A uncertainty specifications that exclude the effects of external dividers and standards for use when range constants are adjusted Relative uncertainty includes only the stability temperature coefficient noise and linearity specifications of the 5520A itself reliability A measure of the uptime of an instrument A 5 5520A Operators Manual repeatability The de
88. you should calculate the actual ac power uncertainty for your selected parameters The method of calculation is best shown in the following examples using 90 day specifications Example 1 Output 100 V 1 A 60 Hz Power Factor 1 0 0 1 year specifications Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 150 ppm 2 mV totaling 100 V x 190 x 10 15 mV added to 2 mV 17 mV Expressed in percent 17 mV 100 V x 100 0 017 see AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 is 0 036 100 LA totaling 1 A x 0 00036 360 uA added to 100 uA 0 46 mA Expressed in percent 0 46 mA 1 A x 100 0 046 see AC Current Sine Waves Specifications PF Adder Watts Adder for PF 1 0 at 60 Hz is 0 see Phase Specifications Total Watts Output Uncertainty Upower 4 0 0177 0 046 07 0 04996 Example 2 Output 100 V 1 A 400 Hz Power Factor 0 5 60 Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is 150 ppm 2 mV totaling 100 V x 190 x 105 15 mV added to 2 mV 17 mV Expressed in percent 17 mV 100 V x 100 0 017 see AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0 036 100 uA totaling 1 A x 0 00036 360 uA added to 100 uA 0 46 mA Expressed in percent 0 46 mA 1A x 100 0 046 see AC Current Sine Waves Specifications PF Adder Watts Adder for PF 0 5 60 at 400 Hz is 0 76 see Ph
89. 0541 0 0751 0 0751 0 0751 0 0751 0 000154 0 000427 0 001447 0 00337 0 01357 0 0328 0 0751 0 000154 0 000427 0 001447 0 00337 0 01357 0 0328 0 0751 5520A SC600 Option 8 Verification Tables 8 62 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Amplitude 8 63 Table 8 21 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Amplitude Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Value V p p V p p V p p 0 005 50 kHz 0 0004 0 0075 50 kHz 0 00045 0 0099 50 kHz 0 000498 0 01 50 kHz 0 0005 0 025 50 kHz 0 0008 0 039 50 kHz 0 00108 0 04 50 kHz 0 0011 0 07 50 kHz 0 0017 0 099 50 kHz 0 00228 01 50 kHz 0 0023 0 25 50 kHz 0 0053 0 399 50 kHz 0 00828 04 50 kHz 0 0083 08 50 kHz 0 0163 12 50 kHz 0 0243 13 50 kHz 0 0263 34 50 kHz 0 0683 55 50 kHz 0 1103 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Frequency Table 8 22 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Frequency Nominal Value V p p Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value Hz Hz Hz Frequency 5 5 50 kHz 0 125 5 5 500 kHz 1 25 55 5 MHz 125 5 5 50 MHz 125 55 500 MHz 1250 8 45 5520A Operators Manual 8 46 8 64 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Harmonics Table 8 23 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Harmonics
90. 10 400 0 mV 10 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 20 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 50 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 100 MHz 6 10 400 0 mV 125 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 160 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 200 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 220 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 235 MHz 8 10 400 0 mV 250 MHz 8 10 1 3 V 500 kHz 19 60 1 3 V 1 MHz 19 60 1 3 V 1 MHz 19 60 1 3 V 2 MHz 19 60 1 3 V 5 MHz 19 60 1 3 V 10 MHz 19 60 1 3 V 20 MHz 19 60 1 3 V 50 MHz 19 60 1 3 V 100 MHz 19 60 1 3 V 125 MHz 26 10 1 3 V 160 MHz 26 10 1 3 V 200 MHz 26 10 1 3 V 220 MHz 26 10 1 3 V 235 MHz 26 10 5520A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Flatness cont Deviation 1 Year Spec Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p mV mV 1 3 V 250 MHz 26 10 5 5 V 500 kHz 82 5 5 5 V 1 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 1 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 2 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 5 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 10 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 20 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 50 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 100 MHz 82 5 5 5 V 125 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 160 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 200 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 220 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 235 MHz 110 00 5 5 V 250 MHz 110 00 8 121 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Freguency Nominal Value p p Freguency Freguency Deviation 1 Year Spec 1 3 V 50 kHz 0 0013 kHz 1 3 V 10 MHz 0 0003 MHz 1 3 V 250 MHz 0 0063 MHz
91. 10 9999 Q 110 25 30 0 0015 0 015 0 0001 1 mA to 125 mA 32 9999 Q 33 Q to 22 28 0 0014 0 015 0 0001 1 mA to 70 mA 109 9999 Q 110 Q to 22 28 0 002 0 02 0 0001 1 mA to 40 mA _329 9999 Q 330 Q to 22 28 0 002 0 02 0 001 1 mA to 18 mA 1 099999 1 1 to 22 28 0 02 0 2 0 001 100 uA to 5 mA 3 299999 3 3 KQ to 22 28 0 02 0 1 0 01 100 uA to 1 8 mA 10 99999 11 to 22 28 0 2 1 0 01 10 pA to 0 5 mA 32 99999 33 kQ to 22 28 0 2 1 0 1 10 pA to 0 18 mA 109 9999 110 kQ to 25 32 2 10 0 1 1 uA to 0 05 mA 329 9999 kQ 330 kQ to 25 32 2 10 1 1 pA to 0 018 mA 1 099999 1 1 MQ to 40 60 30 150 1 250 nA to 5 uA 3 299999 3 3 MQ to 110 130 50 250 10 250 nA to 1 8 uA 10 99999 MQ 11 to 200 250 2500 2500 10 25 nA to 500 nA 32 99999 MQ 33 MQ to 400 500 3000 3000 100 25 nA to 180 nA 109 9999 MQ 110 MQ to 2500 3000 100000 100000 1000 2 5 nA to 50 nA 329 9999 MQ 330 MQ to 12000 15000 500000 500000 10000 1 to 13 nA 1100 MO 1 Continuously variable from 0 Q to 1 1 G Q 2 Applies for 4 WIRE compensation only For 2 WIRE and 2 WIRE COMP add 5 uV per Amp of stimulus current to the floor specification For example in 2 WIRE mode at 1 kQ the floor specification within 12 hours of an ohms zero cal for a measurement current of 1 mA is 0 002 0 5 uV 1 mA 0 022 0 005 20 0070 3 For curr
92. 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1200 1201 1202 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR 5 1 Mohm reference fault A5 2W comp open ckt fault A5 2W comp fault 7 Shunt amp fault 2 2A 7 Shunt amp fault 3 3 mA 7 Shunt amp fault 33 mA 7 Shunt amp fault 330 mA 7 Shunt amp fault 11A A7 Leakage current fault 7 Output amp leakage fault A7 Undercurrent fault 3 3 mA A7 Overcurrent fault 3 3 mA A7 Undercurrent fault 3 3 mA A7 Overcurrent fault 3 3 mA A7 Undercurrent fault 33 mA A7 Overcurrent fault 33 mA A7 Undercurrent fault 33 mA A7 Overcurrent fault 33 mA A7 Undercurrent fault 330 mA A7 Overcurrent fault 330 mA A7 Undercurrent fault 330 mA A7 Overcurrent fault 330 mA A7 Undercurrent fault 2 2A A7 Overcurrent fault 2 2A A7 Undercurrent fault 2 2A A7 Overcurrent fault 2 2A A7 Aux amp fault 7 Monitor fault DC A7 Monitor fault DC Sequence name too long Sequence RAM table full Sequence name table full
93. 18 19 Press REF SRC softkey until external is displayed Press the REF softkey to enter an external reference value Press 0 ENTER to set the external reference to 0 C Press to go back one menu level Press oPR Allow the UUT reading to settle and then adjust the T1 offset adjustment R7 for a display reading of 25 2 C 0 1 C Change the calibrator output to 5380 7 C This places 53 807 mV on the tc terminals Allow the UUT reading to settle and adjust R21 for a display reading of 1370 0 C 0 4 C Press sr amp v jon the calibrator to remove voltage from the UUT Disconnect the UUT from the 5520A Power down the UUT by shorting the ON OFF switch grid With an elastomeric switch pad in both hands use the left one to short out the TP2 grid and use the right one to first turn on the instrument and then quickly short out the VIEW switch grid Hold this position until the display is held in self test This puts the UUT into the Reference Junction Sensor calibration mode and the VIEW maneuver turns off a filter so that the reading settled immediately Using a type K thermocouple bead supplied with the 5500A LEADS test lead kit and the 5520A Calibrator MEAS TC mode press 85 measure the reference junction transistor temperature by placing the K bead into the middle hole of the isothermal block The bead tip should be placed into the well against the body of Q1 Hint Covering
94. 1990 International Temperature Standard Responses 5 68 ITS 90 Example TEMP STD returns ITS 90 Returns ITS 90 when the temperature degree standard is the 1990 International Temperature Standard TRG X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Trigger Thermocouple Measurement command Triggers a thermocouple temperature measurement and return the value of the measurement Also changes the operating mode Remote Commands Commands 6 to thermocouple measurement if this is not already the operating mode This command is equivalent to sending TC MEAS WAI VAL Responses measurement value CEL value is in Celsius measurement value FAR value 1s 1n Fahrenheit 0 00E 00 OVER value is over or under capability 0 00E 00 OPENTC open thermocouple 0 00 00 NONE wrong mode or no measurement Example x TRG returns 2 500E 01 CEL Trigger a thermocouple measurement and return 25 00 Celsius when the thermocouple temperature measurement is 25 C TSENS TYPE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Temperature Sensor Type command Sets the temperature sensor type to thermocouple TC or Resistance Temperature Detector RTD for temperature measurements The Calibrator simulates the RTD temperature as a resistance
95. 2 480 MHz 0 0481 12 570 MHz 0 0481 12 580 MHz 0 0481 12 590 MHz 0 0481 12 600 MHz 0 0481 13 50 kHz na na 13 30 MHz 0 0196 13 70 MHz 0 0196 13 120 MHz 0 0261 13 290 MHz 0 0261 13 360 MHz 0 0521 13 390 MHz 0 0521 13 400 MHz 0 0521 5520A Operators Manual 8 52 Table 8 24 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Frequency Value V p p 13 480 MHz 0 0521 13 570 MHz 0 0521 13 580 MHz 0 0521 13 590 MHz 0 0521 600 MHz 0 0521 34 50 kHz na na 3 4 30 MHz 0 0511 34 70 MHz 0 0511 34 120 MHz 0 0681 34 290 MHz 0 0681 34 360 MHz 0 1361 34 390 MHz 0 1361 34 400 MHz 0 1361 34 480 MHz 0 1361 34 570 MHz 0 1361 34 580 MHz 0 1361 34 590 MHz 0 1361 34 600 MHz 0 1361 55 50 kHz na na 55 30 MHz 0 0826 55 70 MHz 0 0826 55 120 MHz 0 1101 55 290 MHz 0 1101 55 360 MHz 0 2201 55 390 MHz 0 2201 55 400 2 0 2201 55 480 MHz 0 2201 55 570 MHz 0 2201 55 580 MHz 0 2201 55 590 MHz 0 2201 55 600 MHz 0 2201 5520A SC600 Option 8 Verificat
96. 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Displacement Power Factor query Returns the displacement power factor cosine of the phase angle between the Calibrator front panel NORMAL and AUX terminals for sine wave outputs value LEAD value LAG Responses Example DPF returns 5 00E 01 LEAD Returns a leading power factor of 5 when the current output on the Calibrator AUX terminals leads the voltage output on the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees Cosine of 60 degrees is 0 5 The return is 0 if power factor does not apply to the output DUTY 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Duty Cycle command Sets the duty cycle of the square wave output The duty cycle is the percentage of time the waveform is in the positive part of its cycle 1 00 to 99 00 percent Duty cycle applies only to single output square waves Parameter Example value of duty cycle with optional PCT percent unit DUTY 12 34 PCT Set the square wave duty cycle to 12 34 DUTY x iEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Duty Cycle query Returns the value of the square wave output duty cycle 1 00 to 99 00 Response value of duty cycle in percent Example DUTY returns 1 234E 01 Remote Commands Commands
97. 3 3 V 3 A ranges AC330V P AC20A 2S ac power 330 V 20 A ranges DC330MV P DC3 3V S dual dc volts 330 mV 3 3 V ranges AC330V P AC3 3V S dual ac volts 330 V 3 3 V ranges Returns the symbolic name of the single or first output and return the symbolic name of the second output 0 if there is no second output RANGELCK X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Range Lock command Locks in the present range or selects auto ranging for dc voltage and dc current single outputs The range automatically unlocks if the output function changes for example from dc volts to dc current When RANGELCK is on this is equivalent to the softkey range lock showing locked When RANGELCK is off this is equivalent to the softkey range lock showing auto Parameter ON Locks the dc volts or dc current range OFF Unlocks the dc volts or dc current range for autoranging Example RANGELCK OFF Set the range lock off to allow autoranging for dc volts or dc current RANGELCK X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Range Lock query Returns whether or not the preset dc volts or dc current single output range is locked Response range is locked and autoranging is not allowed OFF range is not locked and autoranging is allowed Example RANGELCK returns OFF Returns OFF when the r
98. 6 Returns 12 34 for the value of the square wave duty cycle EARTH X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Earth Ground command Selects whether or not the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal is tied to chassis earth ground Once set the Calibrator retains the earth setting until power off or reset Parameters Example Load TI OPEN disconnect front panel LO terminal from chassis ground I EA RTH TI b D panel key annunciator is on ED connect front panel LO terminal to chassis ground ED to tie the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal to earth the front EARTH IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Barth Ground query Returns whether or not the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal is tied to chassis earth ground Responses Example Returns OPI character character T EARTH returns EN when EARTH is not tied to the NORMAL LO terminal the front panel key annunciator is off EN EN front panel LO terminal disconnected from chassis ground ED front panel LO terminal connected to chassis ground 5 232 X Sequential Overlapped
99. 9000 mA 32 9000 mA 33 0000 mA 33 0000 mA 33 0000 mA 190 0000 mA 190 0000 mA 190 0000 mA 329 0000 mA 329 0000 mA 329 0000 mA 329 0000 mA 329 0000 mA 329 0000 mA 0 33000 A 0 33000 A 0 33000 A 1 09000 A 1 09000 A 1 09000 A 1 09000 A 1 09000 A 2 99000 A 2 99000 A 2 99000 A 2 99000 A Frequency 30 kHz 10 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 1 kHz 5 kHz 30 kHz 1 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 10 Hz 45 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 10 Hz 45 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 10 Hz 45 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz Lower Limit 18 935 mA 32 849 mA 32 886 mA 32 877 mA 32 844 mA 32 791 mA 32 97 mA 32 92 mA 32 69 mA 189 91 mA 189 60 mA 189 19 mA 328 49 mA 328 86 mA 328 86 mA 328 69 mA 328 37 mA 327 75 mA 0 32978 A 0 32735 A 0 31840 A 1 08827 A 1 08951 A 1 08951 A 1 08355 A 1 06320 A 2 98542 A 2 98840 A 2 98840 A 2 97405 Upper Limit 19 065 mA 32 951 mA 32 914 mA 32 923 mA 32 956 mA 33 009 mA 33 03 mA 33 08 mA 33 31 mA 190 09 mA 190 40 mA 190 81 mA 329 51 mA 329 14 mA 329 14 mA 329 31 mA 329 63 mA 330 25 mA 0 33022 A 0 33265 A 0 34160 A 1 09174 A 1 09049 A 1 09049 A 1 09645 A 1 11680 A 2 99459 A 2 99160 A 2 99160 A 3 00595 A Maintenance Performance Tests 7 Table 7 8 Verification Tests for AC Current cont Range 2 99999 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5000 A 20 5
100. 9949 V 1000 000 V 334 000 V 333 993 V 334 007 V 1000 000 V 900 000 V 899 985 V 900 015 V 1000 000 V 1020 000 V 1019 983 V 1020 017 V 1000 000 V 334 000 V 334 007 V 333 993 V 1000 000 V 900 000 V 900 015 V 899 985 V 1000 000 V 1020 000 V 1020 017 V 1019 983 V 7 7 5520A Operators Manual 7 8 Table 7 3 Verification Tests for DC Voltage AUX Range Output Lower Limit Upper Limit 329 999 mV 0 000 mV 0 350 mV 0 350 mV 329 999 mV 329 000 mV 328 551 mV 329 449 mV 329 999 mV 329 000 mV 329 449 mV 328 551 mV 3 29999 V 0 33000 V 0 32955 V 0 33045 V 3 29999 V 3 29000 V 3 28866 V 3 29134 V 3 29999 V 3 29000 V 3 29134 V 3 28866 V 7 0000 V 7 0000 V 6 9976 V 7 0025 V 7 0000 V 7 0000 V 7 0025 V 6 9976 V Maintenance 7 Performance Tests Table 7 4 Verification Tests for DC Current AUX Range Output Lower Limit Upper Limit 329 999 pA 0 000 pA 0 020 uA 0 020 uA 329 999 pA 190 000 189 957 pA 190 043 329 999 LA 190 000 190 043 pA 189 957 uA 329 999 pA 329 000 328 941 pA 329 059 pA 329 999 pA 329 000 329 059 uA 328 941 uA 3 29999 mA 0 00000 mA 0 00005 mA 0 00005 mA 3 29999 mA 1 90000 mA 1 89980 mA 1 90020 mA 3 29999 mA 1 90000 mA 1 90020 mA 1 89980 mA 3 29999 mA 3 29000 mA 3 28969 mA 3 29031 mA 3 29999 mA 3 29000 mA 3 29031 mA 3 28969 mA 32 9999 mA
101. Amplitude Range p p Resolution Adjustment Range Sequence Other Edge Characteristics Frequency Range Edge Characteristics into 50 4 5 mV to 2 75 V 4 digits 10 around each sequence value indicated below 5 mV 10 mV 25 mV 50 mV 100 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V 1 kHz to 1 MHz 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 2 of output 200 uV 25 ppm of setting 15 mHz Rise Time lt 400 ps Leading Edge within 10 ns lt 3 of output 2 mV Aberrations 10 to 30 ns lt 1 of output 2 mV after 30 ns lt 0 5 of output 2 mV Typical Duty Cycle 45 to 55 5520A Operators Manual 8 62 8 80 Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications Leveled Sine Wave Characteristics into 50 Amplitude Characteristics Range p p Resolution Adjustment Range 1 Year Absolute Frequency Range 50 kHz Reference 50 kHz to 100 MHz 100 to 300 MHz 1 t 296 of output 5mVto5 5V 1 100 mV 3 digits 2 100 mV 4 digits continuously adjustable 3 5 of output 4 of output Uncertainty 200 uV 300 uV 300 uV tcal 5 Flatness relative to 50 kHz not applicable 1 5 of output 2 0 of output 100 nV 100 uV Short term Stability lt 1 2 Frequency Characteristics Resolution 10Hz 10 kHz 3 10 kHz 1 Year Absolute 25 ppm 25 ppm 4 25 ppm Uncertainty 15 mHz tcal 5
102. Definite Length format both IEEE 488 2 standards Indefinite Length The Indefinite Length format accepts data bytes after the 0 until the ASCII Line Feed character is received with an EOI signal for RS 232 just a line feed or carriage return will terminate the block Definite Length The Definite Length format specifies the number of data bytes The data bytes are preceded by n and an n digit number The n digit number identifies how many data bytes follow For examples see the UUT SEND and PUD command descriptions in Chapter 6 5 88 Extra Space or Tab Characters In the command descriptions in Chapter 6 parameters are shown separated by spaces One space after a command is required unless no parameters are required All other spaces are optional Spaces are inserted for clarity in the manual and may be left in or omitted as desired You can insert extra spaces or tabs between parameters as desired Extra spaces within a parameter are generally not allowed except for between a number and its associated multiplier or unit Chapter 6 contains examples for commands whose parameters or responses are not self explanatory 5 34 Remote Operation Using Commands 5 5 39 Terminators Table 5 9 summarizes the terminator characters for both the IEEE 488 and RS 232 remote interfaces Table 5 9 Terminator Characters Language Terminator ASCII Character Control Command Command Function Program Terminator Ter
103. English 688754 5520A Operators Guide French 688751 5520A Operators Guide Italian 690511 5520A Operators Guide German 688762 5520A Operators Guide Spanish 688769 5520A Operators Guide Japanese 688770 5520A Operators Guide Simplified Chinese 688777 5520A Programmers Guide English 688744 Certificate of Calibration 2 3 5520A Operators Manual 2 4 2 3 2 4 Replacing the Fuse CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the instrument verify the correct fuse is installed for the selected line voltage setting 100 V and 120 V use 5 0 A 250 V time delay slow blow 200 V and 240 V use 2 5 A 250 V time delay slow blow The line power fuse is accessible on the rear panel The fuse rating is 5 A 250 V slow blow fuse for the 100 V 120 V line voltage setting 2 5 A 250 V slow blow fuse for the 220 V 240 V line voltage setting Fuses that are not user replaceable are discussed in Chapter 7 Maintenance To check or replace the fuse refer to Figure 2 1 and proceed as follows 1 Disconnect line power 2 Open the fuse compartment by inserting a screwdriver blade in the tab located at the left side of the compartment and gently pry until it can be removed with the fingers 3 Remove the fuse from the compartment for replacement or verification Be sure the correct fuse is installed 4 Reinstall the fuse compartment by pushing it back into place until the tab locks Selec
104. Event Status Register ESR and clears the register See Event Status Register ESR in Chapter 5 Response value decimal equivalent of the ESR byte 0 to 255 Example ESR returns 189 Returns decimal 189 binary 10111101 when bits 7 PON 5 CME 4 EXE 3 DDE 2 QYE and 0 OPC are enabled EXPLAIN 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Explain Error query Explains an error code This command returns a string that explains the error code furnished as the parameter The error code same as the parameter is originally obtained by sending the FAULT query See the ERR command which returns both the error code and the explanation string See Appendix E for a list of error codes and error messages Parameter lt value gt if the error code an integer Response lt string gt that explains the error code with the parameter if there is one shown as a percent sign followed by d integer parameter f floating point parameter or s string parameter 5520A Operators Manual 6 18 Example EXPLAIN 539 returns Can t change compensation now Returns the explanation of error 539 Can t change compensation now EXTGUARD xX IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled External guardcommand Connects or disconnects the internal guar
105. Following the error code is an explanation of the error code similar to but sometimes containing more specific information than the EXPLAIN command The explanation sent in response to this query can contain variables specific to a particular error event See Appendix E for a list of error codes and error messages A zero value is returned when the error queue is empty To read the entire contents of the error queue repeat ERR until the response 0 No Error is returned For terminal users the error queue Returns for ERR is always 0 No Error because error messages are returned instead of queued Response value error code value string text string explaining the error Example ERR returns 0 No Error Returns 0 No Error when the error queue is empty ERR UNIT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled UUT Error Unit Thresh Hold command Chooses how UUT error is shown this iS nonvolatile Parameter GT1000 UUT error is displayed in above 1000 ppm ppm below GT100 UUT error is displayed in above 100 ppm ppm below GT10 UUT error is displayed in above 10 ppm ppm below PPM UUT error is displayed in ppm always PCT UUT error is displayed in always Remote Commands 6 Commands ERR UNIT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled UUT Error Unit Thresh Hold query Returns
106. Go To Local message nn325f eps 5 22 Remote Operation RS 232 Interface Overview 5 Table 5 1 summarizes the possible Remote Local state transitions For more information on IEEE 488 GPIB messages see IEEE 488 Overview Table 5 1 Operating State Transitions GPIB Serial From To Front Panel Message Command Local Remote MLA REN True REMOTE Local With Lockout LLO LOCKOUT Remote Local Go to Local softkey GTL or REN False LOCAL Remote with Lockout LLO LOCKOUT Local with Local REN False LOCAL Lockout Remote with Lockout MLA REN True REMOTE Remote Local REN False LOCAL with Local with Lockout GTL Lockout 5 21 RS 232 Interface Overview The two Calibrator RS 232 ports are designed in accordance with EIA Electronic Industries Association standard RS 232 C RS 232 is a serial binary data interchange operating from 300 to 9600 baud selectable and distances up to 50 feet The Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port is configured as DTE Data Terminal Equipment while the SERIAL 2 TO UUT is configured as DCE Data Communications Equipment See Appendix C for RS 232 cable and connector information For detailed information see the EIA standard RS 232 C A summary of RS 232 terms interface lines and mnemonics are shown in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 RS 232 Interface Wiring Mnemonic Description CTS Clear to Send DB 9 Type DB conn
107. IEEE interface card lt ibdev 0 4 0 10 1 0 The second number in this line is the primary address of the calibrator If the address has been changed from the factory default change this line accordingly 8 The prompt reads uao From this prompt type ibwrt uut sendb 82 69 77 83 11 13 gt 9 Press the ENTER or RETURN key This command will send REMS lt CR gt lt LF gt to the UUT serial port After the command is entered the Win32 Interactive Control shows the status of the command If an error is encountered check the typing or consult the National Instruments manual regarding Win32 Interactive control The count message is the amount of characters sent over the bus Type help dev 4 10 1 8 rt uut sendb 82 L cmpl b 10 Verify that the UUT is in remote 11 From the ud0 prompt type q then press the ENTER or RETURN key 5 21 5520A Operators Manual 5 16 Changing between Remote and Local Operation In addition to local mode front panel operation and remote the Calibrator can be placed in a local lockout condition at any time by command of the controller Combined the local remote and lockout conditions yield four possible operating states described as follows 5 17 Local State The Calibrator responds to local and remote commands This is normal front panel operation All remote commands are allowed to execute 5 18 Local with Lockout State Local with lockout is ident
108. NORMAL output to the V and COM connectors on the Tester Connect the calibrator AUX output to the Current Probe connector on the Tester Set the calibrator output to 7 0 V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 700 mV at 60 Hz on the AUX output Press the WAVE MENUS then the amp REF MENUS softkey and ensure the phase angle is 10 0 degrees Press the HARMONIC MENU softkey and ensure the HARMONIC selection is set to 1 and the FUNDMTL selection is set to aux Press opR Move the Tester cursor to the corresponding harmonic number 4 69 5520A Operators Manual 4 70 Verify that the harmonic amplitude and phase angle readings displayed by the Tester are within the minimum and maximum limits listed in Table 4 4 Note The Tester will read a positive phase when the 5520A output is a negative phase because on the 5520A the polarity of the phase is always relative to the NORMAL channel output 10 Repeat the previous three steps using the settings and limits in Table 4 4 Table 4 4 Harmonics Performance for Volts Harmonics Scree 5520A Fluke Normal Output Tester Performance Limits Harmonic Amplitude Harmonic Phase cursor Amplitude Phase V No deg No MIN MAX MIN MAX 7 00 1 10 1 6 7 7 8 8 12 7 00 3 20 3 6 7 73 14 26 7 00 30 6 7 7 3 21 39 7 00 13 40 13 6 7 7 3 29 51 7 00 21 50 21 6 5 7 5 35 65 7 00 31 60 31 6 2 7 8 40 80 11 Press to remove the volta
109. Poll String and the status byte Refer to the STB command and for RS 232 interface operation the SPLSTR and SPLSTR commands in Chapter 6 for more information 5 5520A Operators Manual Instrument Status Change Enable Registers Write using 1100 transition 0 to 1 transition ISCE 1to0 AND 0 to 1 Read using e ISCEO transition transition OR 0 to 1 Instrument Status Change Registers Write using ISCEO ransition ISCE1 CD ISCE 1 Heater aS 45441131211110 9 817 6151413121110 Read using ISR Event Status Register Available Read using ESR Logical OR Write using ESE Event Status Error Enable Register Available Read using ESE Error Queue Read using ERR Read by Serial Po Service Request RoS Generation 6 Status Byte Register a Read using STB on RS 232 bus IEEE bus Logical OR Service Request ZL 5 4 3 2 1 0 Enable Register Read using SRE Write using SRE nn317f eps Figure 5 8 Status Register Overview 5 38 Remote Operation 5 Checking 5520A Status 5 44 5 45 Requesting service The RQS bit is set to 1 whenever bits ESB MAV EAV or ISCB change from 0 to 1 and are enabled 1 in the SRE When RQS is 1 the 5520A asserts the SRQ c
110. Q termination Make sure the oscilloscope is dc coupled Apply a time marker value according to the recommended calibration settings in your oscilloscope manual For example to enter 200 ns press 221010 us then press ENTER Note You may enter the equivalent frequency instead of the time marker value For example instead of entering 200 ns you may enter 5 MHz Set your oscilloscope s time base to show 10 time markers The time markers should align with the oscilloscope divisions as shown in the example below For an accurate reading align the signal s peaks with the horizontal center axis Peaks are aligned with center axis gl011i eps Repeat this procedure for all time marker values recommended for your oscilloscope Repeat for digital and analog mode as required Some oscilloscopes may need the magnification changed while calibrating in analog mode Remove the signal by pressing srev 5520A Operators Manual 8 109 Testing the Trigger The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on different waveforms can be tested using the wave generator When the wave generator is used a square sine or triangle wave is transmitted and the wave s output impedance offset and voltage can be varied in order to test the triggering capability at different levels Note The wave generator should not be used for checking the accuracy of your oscilloscope The question
111. REF SETUP 4 Press the REF CLK softkey to select ext 5 Press the key To use an external 10 MHz reference on a temporary volatile basis proceed as follows 1 Connect a 10 MHz square wave signal of 1 to 5 V p p to the rear panel 10 MHz IN BNC connector 2 Press the key Set the calibrator output to an ac voltage or current function Press the following sequence of softkeys INSTMT SETUP OUTPUT SETUP b amp REF SETUP Press the REF CLK softkey to select ext Press the key 4 54 Sourcing AC Current with Parallel Connected 5520As You can connect two or more 5520As to source current in parallel This technique allows you to source current greater than 20 A If you are sourcing ac current you must synchronize the calibrators in order to have their output currents in phase Proceed as follows to accomplish this 1 With both 5520As in standby mode make the connections as shown in Figure 4 16 4 58 Front Panel Operation 4 Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN OUT On 5520A 2 the slave make the following settings e Press the key Press the following sequence of softkeys INSTMT SETUP OUTPUT SETUP amp REF SETUP e Press the REF CLK softkey to select ext e Press the key On both 5520As make the following settings e Remaining in standby mode set the outputs to the desired ac current level and frequency e Set REF in the amp REF SETUP menus to 0 00 O
112. RTD e Temperature Thermocouple e Resistance Setting DC Voltage Output Complete the following procedure to set a dc voltage output at the 5520A front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entry error press CE to clear the display then reenter the value Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the interconnecting wiring 1 Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 3 Setthe UUT to measure dc voltage on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output maximum seven numeric keys For example 123 4567 Note At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above nominal you may notice a slight high pitched sound This is normal Press to select the polarity of the voltage default is Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 123 4567 mV below 9o dy 4 19 5520A Operators Manual 10 123 4567 mV 2 L Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical nn072f eps Press to activate the calibrator output A softkey label for range appears on the Control Display in the dc v
113. Returns OFF VOLT EDGE LEVSINE MARKER or WAVEGEN TRIG IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Programs the oscilloscope s trigger output BNC Parameters OFF Turns the trigger output off DIV Turns the trigger output on Freguency is the same as the signal at SCOPE output DIV10 Turns the trigger output on Frequency is 1 10 of the signal at SCOPE output DIV100 Turns the trigger output on Frequency is 1 100 of the signal at SCOPE output TRIG X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the output setting of the oscilloscope s trigger Parameters None Response character Returns OFF DIV1 DIV10 or DIV100 OUT IMP X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance Parameters 250 Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance to 500 Z1M Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance to 1 MQ OUT IMP 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the impedance setting of the oscilloscope s output Parameters None Response lt character gt Returns 250 or Z1M 8 85 5520A Operators Manual 8 111 Verification Tables
114. See Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections earlier in this chapter for more information 4 39 5520A Operators Manual 4 32 4 40 Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple Note Thermocouples have no electrical isolation Make sure the thermocouple wire and plug are not affected by extraneous temperature sources For example do not place your fingers on the thermocouple plug or wire when simulating a temperature Thermocouples generate a small dc voltage at specific temperatures The simulated output therefore is a small dc voltage based on the selected temperature and type of thermocouple being simulated To toggle the temperature reference between the 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard ipts 68 and the 1990 International Temperature Standard its 90 see Using the Instrument Setup Menu Complete the following procedure to set a simulated thermocouple temperature output at the 5520A front panel TC connector If you make an entry error press CE to clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Note You must use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of thermocouple For example if simulating a temperature output for a type K thermocouple use type K thermocouple wire and type K miniconnectors Set the UUT to measure tempera
115. Sets the power up and reset default impedance used for dBm outputs ac volts Returns the power up and reset default impedance used for dBm outputs ac volts Use with extreme care Restores the contents of the nonvolatile memory device to factory defaults Sets the maximum permissible output magnitudes negative and positive Returns the programmed output magnitude limits for voltage and current Prints the Stored Active or CAL Constant CAL Report through either the HOST or UUT Serial Port Sets the power up and reset default pressure display units Returns the power up and reset default pressure display units Sets the power up and reset default for the reference clock source internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector Returns the power up and reset default for the reference clock source internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN OUT sets the power up and reset default phase difference between the NORMAL terminals on the slave Calibrator and the NORMAL terminals of the master Calibrator If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN OUT returns the power up and reset default phase difference between the NORMAL terminals on the slave Calibrator and the NORMAL terminals of the master Calibrator Set the default Resistance Temperature Detector RTD sensor type Returns the default Resistance Temperature Detector RTD sensor type Sets the HOST serial
116. Short Term Amplitude lt 1 1 Stability Frequency Characteristics Resolution 10 kHz 1 Year Absolute 2 5 ppm Uncertainty tcal 5 C Distortion Characteristics 2nd Harmonic lt 33 dBc 3rd and Higher lt 38 dBc Harmonics 1 Within one hour after reference amplitude setting provided temperature varies no more than 5 8 8 5520A SC600 Option SC600 Option Specifications 8 8 6 Time Marker Specifications Table 8 4 Time Marker Specifications Time Marker into 20 ms to 50 ns to 500 20 5 1 Year Absolute 25 2 5 ppm t 2 5 ppm t 2 5 ppm t 2 5 ppm Uncertainty at 1000 ppm 1 Cardinal Points tcal 5 Wave Shape spike or spike square spike or square or sine square or 20 pulse square sine Typical Output gt 1 V p p 2 gt 1 V p p 2 gt 1 V p p 2 gt 1 V p p 2 gt 1 V p p Level Typical Jitter rms lt 10 ppm lt 1 ppm lt 1 ppm lt 1 ppm lt 1 ppm Seguence 5 2 1 from 5 sto 2 ns e g 500 ms 200 ms 100 ms Adjustment At least 10 around each sequence value indicated above Range 3 Amplitude 4 digits Resolution 1 tis the time in seconds 2 Typical rise time of square wave and 20 pulse 20 duty cycle pulse is 1 5 ns 3 Time marker uncertainty is 50 ppm away from the cardinal points 8 7 Wave Generator Specifications Table 8 5 Wave Gener
117. Syntax Checking 5520A Status Serial Poll Status Byte STB sse Service Request SRQ Line Service Request Enable Register SRE Programming the STB and SRE eese Event Status Register Event Status Enable Bit Assignments for ESE Register ioo etienne the ESR and 22 Programming the ESR and ESE eee Instrument Status Register ISR sese Instrument Status Change Registers see Instrument Status Change Enable Registers Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCR and ISCE Programming the ISR ISCR and Output Queue Error Queue Remote Program Examples eee Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator Writing an SRQ and Error Handler ees Verifying a Meter on the IEEE 488 21 Verifying a Meter on the RS 232 UUT Serial Using OPC OPC and aA eseiicorssisse c ercsisiiissicdeveissseiis Taking a Thermocouple Measurement eene Taking a Pressure Measurement sese Using the RS 232 UUT Port to Control an Instr
118. THE PROPER POWER CORD Use only the power cord and connector appropriate for the voltage and plug configuration in your country Use only a power cord that is in good condition Refer power cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES To avoid explosion do not operate the Calibrator in an atmosphere of explosive gas CHECK INSULATION RATINGS Verify that the voltage applied to the unit under test does not exceed the insulation rating of the UUT and the interconnecting cables DO NOT REMOVE COVER DURING OPERATION To avoid personal injury or death do not remove the Calibrator cover without first removing the power source connected to the rear panel Do not operate the Calibrator without the cover properly installed Normal calibration is accomplished with the cover closed Access procedures and the warnings for such procedures are contained in the Service Manual Service procedures are for qualified service personnel only DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE IF PROTECTION MAY BE IMPAIRED If the Calibrator appears damaged or operates abnormally protection may be impaired Do not attempt to operate the Calibrator under these conditions Refer all questions of proper Calibrator operation to qualified service personnel Table of Contents Chapter Contents 1 Introduction and 5 1 1 ii ulncoJe koji 0
119. Table 8 7 Trigger Signal Specifications Pulse Function Division Ratio 1 Period Amplitude into 50 O p p Time Marker Typical Rise Time 20 ms to 150 ns off 1 10 100 21V lt 2 ns 8 10 Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker Function Table 8 8 Trigger Signal Specifications Time Marker Function Amplitude into 50 Q Pulse Period Division Ratio 1 p p Typical Rise Time 5s to 750 ns off 1 21V lt 2 ns 34 9 ms to off 10 21V 2 ns 7 5 ns 34 9 ms to 2 ns off 100 21V lt 2 ns 8 11 Trigger Signal Specifications Edge Function Table 8 9 Trigger Signal Specifications Edge Function Edge Signal Division Typical Amplitude Typical Rise Frequency Ratio into 50 Time Typical Lead Time 1 kHz to 10 MHz off 1 21V lt 2 ns 40 ns 8 12 Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function Table 8 10 Trigger Signal Specifications Square Wave Voltage Function Edge Signal Division Typical Amplitude Typical Rise Frequency Ratio into 50 p p Time Typical Lead Time 10 Hz to 10 kHz off 1 21V lt 2 ns 1us 8 13 Trigger Signal Specifications Table 8 11 TV Trigger Signal Specifications Trigger Signal Type Parameters Field Formats Selectable NTSC SECAM PAL PAL M Selectable inverted or uninverted video Amplitude into 50 Q p p Adjustable 0 to 1 5 V p p into 50 ohm load 7 accuracy L
120. US 260 GOTO 200 5 66 5 67 Remote Operation 5 Remote Program Examples Using the RS 232 UUT Port to Control an Instrument The SERIAL 2 TO UUT 5 232 port is used to pass commands on to another instrument For example a meter that is being calibrated can have its RS 232 port connected the Calibrator SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port Commands sent from a controller can be routed through the Calibrator s UUT port and received by the meter or UUT There are seven special UUT commands incorporated into the Calibrator for passing commands on to an instrument connected to the UUT port Refer to Chapter 6 Input Buffer Operation As the Calibrator receives each data byte from the controller it places the bytes in a portion of memory called the input buffer The input buffer holds up to 350 data bytes and operates in a first in first out fashion IEEE 488 The Calibrator treats the EOI IEEE 488 control line as a separate data byte and inserts it into the input buffer if it is encountered as part of a message terminator Input buffer operation is transparent to the program running on the controller If the controller sends commands faster than the Calibrator can process them the input buffer fills to capacity When the input buffer is full the Calibrator holds off the IEEE 488 bus with the NRFD Not Ready For Data handshake line When the Calibrator has processed a data byte from the full input buffer it then completes the handshake a
121. UUT port 10 REM THIS PROGRAM VERIFIES THE ACCURACY OF A FLUKE 45 AT 10V DC 20 INIT PORT O INITIALIZE THE INTERFACE 30 CLEAR PORT O 1 40 PRINT 04 UUT SEND VDC RATE S AUTO TRIGGER 2 n SET FLUKE 45 50 PRINT 04 UUT RECV SEND THE FLUKE 45 PROMPT 60 PRINT 4 P GE HE FLUKE 45 PROMPT 70 PRINT 04 OUT 10 V OPER SE HE 5520A TO 10 V DC 80 PRINT 84 WAI OUT WAIT FOR SETTLE GET VALUF 90 PRINT 04 V U F V2 U2 GE HE DATA FROM 5520A 100 PRINT 84 SEND TRG VAL Wn TRIGGER FLUKE 45 READING 110 PRINT 84 RECV SEND 45 READING TO 5520A 120 INPUT 04 VM P GET 45 READING AND PROMPT 130 ER ABS V VM V 1E6 COMPUTE ERROR 140 PRINT 5520 OUTPUT V U PRINT THE RESULTS 150 PRINT FLUKE 45 MEASURED ER PPM PRINT THE RESULTS 160 END Using OPC and WAI The OPC OPC and WAI commands let you maintain control of the order of execution of commands that could otherwise be passed up by subsequent commands If you had sent an OUT command you can check if the output has settled be sending the query OPC As soon as the OUT command has completed output settled a 1 appears in the output buffer You should always follow an OPC command with a read command The read command causes program execution to pause until the addressed instrument responds The following sample program shows how you can use OPC 10 PRINT 84 OUT 100V 1KHZ OPER OPC 552
122. V For example if the fundamental output is 5 kHz the maximum selection is the 6th harmonic 30 kHz All harmonic freguencies 2nd to 50th are available for fundamental outputs between 10 Hz and 600 Hz 200 Hz for 3 V to 5 V Note 1 Phase uncertainty for harmonic outputs is 1 degree or the phase uncertainty shown in Phase Specifications for the particular output whichever is greater For example the phase uncertainty of a 400 Hz fundamental output and 10 kHz harmonic output is 10 from Phase Specifications Another example the phase uncertainty of a 60 Hz fundamental output and a 400 Hz harmonic output is 1 degree Example of determining Amplitude Uncertainty in a Dual Output Harmonic Mode What are the amplitude uncertainties for the following dual outputs NORMAL Fundamental Output 100 V 100 Hz From AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications the single output specification for 100 V 100 Hz is 0 015 2 mV For the dual output in this example the specification is 0 015 4 mV as the 0 015 is the same and the floor is twice the value 2 x 2 mV AUX 50th Harmonic Output 100 mV 5 kHz From AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications the auxiliary output specification for 100 mV 5 kHz is 0 15 450 mV For the dual output in this example the specification is 0 15 900 mV as the 0 15 is the same and the floor is twice the value 2 x 450 mV 1 27 5520A Operators Manual 1 30 AC Voltage Sine Wave
123. Volt Eunctioti eee e Ress 8 95 Th V DIV M l ctr rtr ttt n ettet e ode 8 96 Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude 8 07 Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 98 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 99 Whe Edge BUNCH ON aset eden 8 100 Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 101 The Leveled Sine Wave 8 102 Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage 8 103 The MORE OPTIONS Menu 8 104 Sweeping through a Frequency Range 8 105 Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 106 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 8 107 The Time Marker Function eese 8 108 Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 109 Testing he TT SSP uoc erret tta oreet peace etri 8 110 Summary of Commands and Queries see 8 111 Verification Tables aie eerie tee e eee ete 8 112 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 1 Load 8 113 Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 50 Load 8 114 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 50 Load 8 115 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 1 Load 8 116 Edge Funct
124. X Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Harmonic command Makes the frequency of one output a multiple of another output for the ac voltage or ac power functions sine waves only For example in dual ac voltage have the frequency of the voltage output on the Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals at 60 Hz and the frequency of the voltage output on the AUX terminals at the 7th harmonic 420 Hz The range for the harmonics is 1 to 50 Parameters Example lt value gt lt value gt HARMON PRI SEC LG fundamental at 5520A NORMAL terminals fundamental at 5520A AUX terminals PRI Load the fundamental frequency at the primary PRI output NORMAL terminals and the 5th harmonic frequency is at the secondary output AUX terminals For example if the fundamental frequency output is 60 Hz the harmonic frequency output is 300 Hz Remote Commands Commands 6 HARMONIC IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Harmonic query Returns the present instrument harmonic characteristic and location of the fundamental output PRI primary the NORMAL terminals or SEC secondary the AUX terminals Response value PRI harmonic value fundamental at primary output value SEC harmonic value fundamental at secondary output Example HARMONIC returns 5 SEC Retu
125. a clear area of the Form screen to open the Code window for Form Enter the code shown below If using COM2 on the PC change the command to Comm1 CommPort 2 Ifnotusing the factory default settings for the RS 232 ports then change the command Comm1 Settings as required Sub Form Load Commi CommPort 1 if using COM2 enter 2 Comml Settings 9600 N 8 1 baud parity data stop Comml PortOpen True End Sub 6 While still in the Code window select Command1 from the Object list Enter the code shown below The Chr 10 means ascii character 10 line feed Sub Commandl Click Comml Output REMOTE Chr 10 End Sub 7 Select Command2 from the Object list Enter the code shown below Sub Command2_Click Comml Output LOCAL Chr 10 End Sub 8 Select Command3 from the Object list Enter the code shown below where lt uut command gt is the command you selected for the UUT response Sub Command3_Click Comml Output UUT SEND uut command gt Chr 10 End Sub For example UUT SEND REMS n Note the use of Xn which indicates Carriage Return CR as the end of line character Other characters include r Line Feed t Tab b Backspace and Form Feed Also note the double quotes around uut command to show embedded quotes D 2 Appendices D Creating a Visual Basic Test Program 9 Onthe Visual Basic Toolbar click th
126. a list OUTPUT Temperature Output Device Selects the temperature device thermocouple tc or resistance temperature detector rtd Select rtd COMP Compensation Applies 4 wire compensation 2 wire compensation or turns compensation off Compensation refers to methods of connecting the 5520A to the UUT to cancel out test lead resistance See Four Wire versus Two wire Connections earlier in this chapter for more information For the 3 lead connection Figure 4 9 select COMP off Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 4 34 Measuring Thermocouple Temperatures Complete the following procedure to measure the output of a thermocouple connected to the TC input If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter 1 Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the thermocouple to the front panel TC connector Note Use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of thermocouple For example type K wire and type K miniconnectors 3 Press to display the TC menus below OFFSET TE mU O O 300 ta H zg C T L Jdin U Tdin iau c imv lt kEH iris E J zi e REF SEC REF an intrnl zS S2 K an intrnl 250 to H GE E E extrnl z316 C E T L Jdin U Tdin ETT EIN iris E G E J nn106f eps 4 45 5520A Operators Manual The measured temperature
127. accessible through the ground conductor in an ac power receptacle ground loops Undesirable currents induced when there is more than one chassis ground potential in a system of instruments Ground loops can be minimized by connecting all instruments in a system to ground to one point guard See voltage guard and current guard harmonics A waveform that is an integral multiple of the fundamental frequency For example a waveform that is twice the frequency of a fundamental is called the second harmonic IPTS 68 Refers to the International Provisional Temperature Standard 1968 replaced by the International Temperature Standard 1990 This specifies the definition of the C temperature standard ITS 90 Refers to the International Temperature Standard 1990 which replaced the International Provisional Temperature Standard 1968 This specifies the definition of the C temperature standard International Systems of Units Same as SI System of Units the accepted system of units See also units base units and derived units legal units The highest echelon in a system of units for example the U S National Bureau of Standards volt A 3 5520A Operators Manual life cycle cost The consideration of all elements contributing to the cost of an instrument throughout its useful life This includes initial purchase cost service and maintenance cost and the cost of support equipment lineari
128. actions that cause the calibrator to exit the error mode and return to the original reference output or to output a new reference as selected Table 4 2 Keys That Exit Error Mode Keys Action ENTER Returns to the previous reference value Establishes a new reference A new keypad entry Establishes a new reference ENTER X Sets the calibrator to ten times the reference value and establishes a new reference DIV Sets the calibrator to one tenth the reference value and establishes a new reference Establishes the present output as a new reference RESET Returns to the power up state 4 46 Editing the Output Setting When you initially source an output from the Calibrator you enter a specific value For example 10 00000 V dc To edit the output value to suit your application turn the front panel Edit Field knob clockwise to increase the value or counter clockwise to decrease the value The Edit Field controls will not operate if you are in any setup function Press the key one or more times to exit a setup function 4 53 5520A Operators Manual To select a higher order digit use an Edit Field cursor key 4 K The output digit in edit is always underlined see below 10 0000 nn115f eps The momentary display of the letter u in the Output Display when editing during OPR Operate indicates unsettled that is the Calibrator output is settling with a
129. an error message is returned Parameter lt value gt signed offset amplitude Example DC_OFFSET 123 45 MV Load a dc offset of 123 45 mV to the ac output signal DC_OFFSET X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled DC Voltage Offset query Returns the value of the dc offset voltage Response lt gt signed offset amplitude 6 13 5520A Operators Manual Example Returns 1 44 mV as the value of the applied dc offset If 0 00000 00 is returned the dc offset is zero DC OFFSET returns tl 44E 03 DPF X 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Displacement Power Factor command Sets the displacement power factor phase angle between the Calibrator front panel terminals NORMAL and AUX for sine waves output only The NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference The phase offset is expressed as the cosine of the phase offset 0 000 to 1 000 and a LEAD default or LAG term which determines whether the AUX output leads or lags the NORMAL output Parameters value LEAD value LAG Example DPF 123 LEAD Set the current output on the Calibrator AUX terminals to lead the voltage output on the NORMAL terminals by 82 93 degrees Cosine of 82 93 degrees is 0 123 nominal DPF 488 RS
130. and Local Operation Local STALE Local with Lockout State eese Remote State m Remote with Lockout State RS 232 Interface 2 TEEE 488 Interface Overview Usini Command S et unter cta rh qutm Types of Commands esee ren rennen Device Dependent Commands eene Common Commands priscus nennen Query Command s ette prre die Interface Messages IEEE 488 seen Compound Commands ener Coupled Commands Overlapped 5 Sequential Commands that Require the Calibration Switch Commands for RS 232 Only Commands for IEEE 488 Only 5 1 5 2 5520A Operators Manual 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 42 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 49 5 50 5 51 5 52 5 53 5 54 5 55 5 56 5 57 5 58 5 59 5 60 5 61 5 62 5 63 5 64 5 65 5 66 5 67 Command Syntax Parameter Syntax Rules teet retenti rien Extra Space or Tab Characters esee Terminators Incoming Character Response Message
131. appears in the Output Display below is typical The lower case m blinks on when a measurement is being taken peu h H L CI Heazijred Value nn107f eps Meas TC terminal Measurement at the front panel TC terminals Displays the actual dc voltage at the front panel TC terminals This is a display only not a softkey function TC MENUS Thermocouple Menus Opens the submenus supporting thermocouple outputs e Open TCD Open Thermocouple Detect Selects on or off for the Open TCD feature When Open TCD is on a small electrical pulse checks for thermocouple continuity that in most cases will have no effect on the measurement If you are measuring the thermocouple with the 5520A Calibrator in parallel with another temperature measuring device select off for Open TCD When an open thermocouple is detected Open TC is displayed in the TC menu providing positive identification of the fault e UNITS Temperature Units Selects C or F as the temperature unit e REF SRC Reference Source Selects intrnl Internal or extrnl External temperature reference source The reference source indicates the ambient temperature contribution to the thermocouple output which is taken into account when simulating an accurate temperature output Select intrnl when the selected thermocouple has alloy wires and you are using the isothermal block internal to the 5520A Calibrator Select extrnl when using an external iso
132. at 23 could be provided for 60 17 23 20 minutes each hour 3 For compliance voltages greater than 1 V add 1 mA V to the floor specification from 1 kHz to 5 kHz 4 For compliance voltages greater than 1 V add 5 mA V to the floor specification from 5 kHz to 10 kHz 5520A Operators Manual AC Current Sine Wave Specifications cont LCOMP on Absolute Uncertainty teal 5 Distortion Max Range Frequency C amp Noise 10 Hz Inductiv 96 of output uA to 100 kHz BW e Load output 90 days 1 year H y y WA u 400 4 29 00 uA to 10 Hz to 100 Hz 0 2 0 2 0 25 0 2 0 1 4 1 0 329 99 uA 100 Hz to 1 kHz 0 5 0 5 0 6 0 5 0 05 1 0 3 3 mA to 10 Hz to 100 Hz 0 07 4 0 08 4 32 999 mA 100 Hz 1 kHz 0 18 10 0 2 10 0 33 A to 10 Hz to 100 Hz 0 1 200 0 12 200 0 2 500 2 99999 A 100 to 440 Hz 0 25 1000 0 3 1000 0 25 500 1 Duty Cycle Currents 11 A may be provided continuously For currents gt 11 A see Figure 1 4 The 2 For currents gt 11 A Floor specification is 4000 uA within 30 seconds of selecting operate For 0 15 1 5 0 06 1 5 0 1 2000 2 0 12 2000 0 1 0 current may be provided 60 T I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in C room operating times gt 30 seconds the floor specification is 2000 uA 0 33 mA to 10 Hz 100 Hz 0 2 0 3 0 25 0 3 3 2999 mA 100 Hz to 1 kHz 0 5 0 8 0 6 0 8 0
133. bar Pascal grams per centimeter squared HG H20 H20 H2060F Inches of water 60 degrees Farhenheit Remote Commands Commands 6 PUD IEEE 488 RS 232 Protected User Data command Stores a string of 64 characters maximum which is saved in the 5520A non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the 5520A does not respond to remote commands This command works only when the CALIBRATION switch on the rear panel of the Calibrator is in the ENABLE position Include a line feed RS 232 character to terminate the block data or End or Identify EOI command IEEE 488 X X X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Parameter 2 lt gt lt characters string definite length O character string indefinite length lt character string character string character string gt character string Example PUD 0CAL LAB NUMBER 1 Store the string CAL LAB NUMB indefinite length format ER 1in the protected user data area using the PUD 216CAL LAB NUMBER 1 Example Store the string CAL LAB NUMBER 1 in the protected user data area using the definite length format where 2 means two digits follow which represent the number of text characters in CAL LAB NUMBER 1 including 16 PUD CAL
134. cabling Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation e Controls indicators and displays Chapter 3 Features e Front panel operation Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation e Cabling to a UUT Unit Under Test Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation e Remote operation IEEE 488 or serial Chapter 5 Remote Operation Calibrating an Oscilloscope Chapter 8 Oscilloscope Calibration Options e Accessories to the 5520A Calibrator Chapter 9 Accessories e Performance Specifications Chapter 1 Introduction and Specifications 1 6 Introduction and Specifications Instruction Manuals 1 7 Instruction Manuals The 5520A Manual Set provides complete information for operators and service or maintenance technicians The set includes e 5520A Operators Manual PN 688739 e 5520A Operators Guide e English PN 688754 e French PN 688751 e German PN 688762 e Italian PN 690511 e Spanish PN 688769 e Japanese PN 688770 e Simplified Chinese PN 688777 e 5520A Programmers Guide PN 688744 5520A Service Manual PN 688747 One of each manual listed above is shipped with the instrument except for the 5520A Service Manual which is optional The two reference guides are packaged inside this 5520A Operators Manual Order additional copies of the manuals or reference guides separately using the part number provided For ordering instructions refer to the Fluke Catalog or ask a Fluke sales representative see
135. calibrator will adjust the range limit to 10 mV and will output 1 mV from within the 10 mV range If you set the 40 mV range to locked and then enter 1 mV the calibrator will output 1 mV from within the 40 mV range The default range setting is auto which should always be used unless you are troubleshooting discontinuities in your oscilloscope s vertical gain The range setting will always return to auto after you leave Levsine mode 5520A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 104 Sweeping through a Frequency Range When you change frequencies using the sweep method the output sine wave sweeps through a specified range of frequencies letting you identify the frequency at which the oscilloscope s signal exhibits certain behavior e g changes amplitude Before you start this procedure make sure you are in the MORE OPTIONS menu and the sine wave is displayed on the oscilloscope Perform the following procedure to sweep through frequencies 1 Make sure the output signal shows the starting frequency If not key in the starting frequency then press ENTER 2 Toggle FREQ CHANGE to sweep Toggle the RATE to slow if you want to Observe a very slow sweep over a small range 3 Key in the end frequency then press ENTER After you press ENTER the signal sweeps through frequencies between the two values you entered and the Sweep menu appears on th
136. commands WAVE TRI OUT 10V 1 2 g 3 The WAVE TRI causes error At 100 V only sine waves allowed Both WAV OUT are coupled commands So the compound command WAVE TRI OUT 10V 1KHZ executes successfully The WAVE and OUT are programmed together and at 10 V triangle waves are allowed 5 81 Overlapped Commands Commands that begin execution but require slightly more time to complete are called overlapped commands because they can be overlapped by the next command before they have completed execution In Chapter 6 the command graphic X Overlapped shows a check for overlapped commands The overlapped commands excluding scope commands are CUR_POST MULT STBY DBM OLDREF SYNCOUT DC_OFFSET OPER TC_OFFSET DPF OUT TC_OTCD DUTY PHASE TC_REF EARTH PRES_UNIT TC_TYPE EXTGUARD RANGELCK ISENS TYPE HARMONIC REFCLOCK WAVE INCR REFPHASE ZCOMP LCOMP RST LOWS RTD TYPE You can use the command WAT to wait until the overlapped command has completed execution before executing the next command For example OUT 1 V 1 60 HZ WAI You can also use the status commands OPC and OPC to detect completion of overlapped commands See Checking 5520A Status 5 32 Sequential Commands Commands that execute immediately are called sequential commands In Chapter 6 the command g
137. eese 6 7 Output Commands i erairniecei setae eire err pede 6 8 Pressure Measurement 6 9 RS 232 Host Port Commandis eere 6 10 RS 232 UUT Port Commands eee 6 11 Setup and Utility Commandis eene 6 12 Status ieaie klana 6 13 Thermocouple TC Measurement Commands 6 9 6 14 Commands Malntenarioa sessi arri ec nuin dk enn en no ncc c niin 7 1 Ies RO 7 2 Replacing the Line 7 3 Cleaning the Aur Filter coe 7 4 General Cleaning otto t Cette reto 7 5 Pertormance Vests x nior ei eI e erem eee Oscilloscope Calibration 5520A SC600 Option m m 8 1 ocior i Richtee er iin 8 2 SC600 Option Specifications esses en 18 5 8 3 Volt SpecifICatiODs uii ee e rentrer IR ee te eee ka 8 4 Edge Specifications ete tienes 8 5 Leveled Sine Wave 8 6 Time Marker 8 7 Wave Generator 8 8 Pulse Generator
138. execution of subsequent commands until the reset operation is complete This command is the same as pressing the front panel key A reset action evokes the following commands and values Command Value Command Value CUR POST REFCLOCK SREFGEOCK p value DBMZ DBMZ D value REFPHASE lt REFPHASE D value DC OFFSET OV RTD TYPE RTD TYPE D value DUTY 50PCT SCOPE OFF EARTH OPEN STBY No output EXTGUARD OFF C_OFFSET 0 CEL HARMONIC 1 PRI TC_OTCD ON LCOMP OFF C_REF INT LOWS TIED C_TYPE lt TC_TYPE_D value gt OUT OV OHZ TRIG OFF OUT_IMP 23 SENS TYPE TC PHASE ODEG WAVE NONE NONE PRES_UNIT lt PRES_UNIT_D value gt ZCOMP OFF RANGELCK OFF ZERO_MEAS OFF Changes made to the setup menus that are not saved in memory are discarded on reset Response None Remote Commands 6 Commands Example RST Place the Calibrator in a reset condition evoking the commands and values shown above TYPE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Resistance Temperature Detector Type command Sets the Resistance Temperature Detector RTD sensor type Before using RTD TYPE select using the TSENS TYPE command After using
139. is expressed in dBm voltage offset is not available You can enter an offset for a square wave output only when the duty cycle is 50 00 see DUTY above e amp REF MENUS Phase Difference and 10 MHz reference source Selects the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs selects internal or external 10 MHz reference and sets the phase difference between an external master 5520A using 10 MHz IN OUT and the NORMAL output See Adjusting the Phase and Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN OUT later in this chapter e WAVE Waveform allows you to select one of four different types of waveforms sine wave triangle wave square wave and truncated sine wave See Waveform Types later in this chapter for more information Whenever a non sinusoidal waveform is selected the Output Display shows Pp p p Only sine wave is allowed for output in dBm Setting DC Current Output Complete the following procedure to set a dc current output between AUX HI and LO or AUX 20A and LO depending on the current level selected Current greater than 3 A is sourced between the AUX 20A and LO terminals If you make an entry error press CE clear the display then reenter the value Note See Figure 1 4 in Chapter 1 for a chart that shows duration or duty cycle limitations for current greater than 11 A If the duration or duty cycle is exceeded the 5520A will shut down abruptly After a cool off period the 5520A will w
140. kHz This option is useful for reverting to the reference to check the output after you make adjustments at another frequency e MODE Indicates you are in LEVSINE mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other calibration modes 8 35 Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage The following three options are available for controlling the sine wave settings e SET TO LAST F toggles between the last frequency used and the reference frequency of 50 kHz letting you check the output at the reference after you make adjustments at a different frequency e MORE OPTIONS lets you use an automatic frequency sweep and lock the voltage range if necessary The following section provides details on this menu e The and keys step frequencies up or down in amounts that let you quickly access a new set of frequencies For example if the value is 250 kHz changes it to 300 kHz and changes it to 200 kHz For voltage values and step through cardinal point values in a 1 2 3 6 sequence 8 22 5520A SC600 Option Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 8 36 The MORE OPTIONS Menu When you select MORE OPTIONS you open options that give you more control over the frequency and voltage To access the MORE OPTIONS menu press the softkey under MORE OPTIONS in the LEVSINE menu FREQ CHG RATE Range MODE jump 1 MHz auto levsine jump 1 MHz v
141. lt value gt V lt value gt DBM lt value gt V lt value gt Hz lt value gt DBM lt value gt Hz lt value gt A lt value gt A lt value gt Hz lt value gt OHM lt value gt F lt value gt CEL lt value gt FAR lt value gt HZ lt value gt V lt value gt A lt value gt V lt value gt A lt value gt HZ lt value gt V lt value gt V value V value V value HZ value Volts dc or update volts ac Volts ac dBm update Volts ac or volts dc with 0 Hz Volts ac in dBm Current dc or update current ac Current ac Resistance Capacitance Temperature Celsius Temperature Fahrenheit Update frequency Power dc or update power ac Power ac Dual volts dc or update dual ac Dual volts ac in volts For single output changes amplitude keeping unit and frequency the same 6 29 5520A Operators Manual Examples OUT 15 2 V volts 15 2 V 9 same frequency OUT 20 DBM volts 20 dBm same frequency OUT 10 V 60 Hz volts ac 10 V 60 Hz OUT 10 DBM 50 HZ volts ac 10 dBm 50 Hz OUT 1 2 MA current 1 2 mA same frequency OUT 1 A 400 HZ current ac 1 A 400 Hz OUT 1 KOHM ohms 1 OUT 1 UF capacitance 1uF OUT 100 CEL temperature 100 C OUT 32 FAR temperature 32 F OUT 60 HZ frequency update 60 Hz OUT 10V 1A power 10 watts same frequency OUT 1V 1A 60 HZ power ac 1 watts 60 Hz OUT 1 V 2 V dual volts
142. m resistance outputs have a floor adder of 0 508 Performance not specified above 3 V m This instrument may be susceptible to electro static discharge ESD from direct contact to the binding posts Good static aware practices should be followed when handling this and other pieces of electronic equipment Line Power 2 e Line Voltage selectable 100 V 120 V 220 V 240 V Line Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz Line Voltage Variation 10 about line voltage setting Power Consumption 5500A Calibrator 300 VA 5725A Amplifier 750 VA Dimensions 5500A Calibrator Height 17 8 cm 7 inches standard rack increment plus 1 5 cm 0 6 inch for feet on bottom of unit Width 43 2 cm 17 inches standard rack width Depth 47 3 cm 18 6 inches overall 5725A Amplifier Height 13 3 cm 5 25 inches standard rack increment plus 1 5 cm 0 6 inch for feet on bottom of unit Width 43 2 cm 17 inches standard rack width Depth 63 0 cm 24 8 inches overall Weight without options 5500A Calibrator 22 kg 49 Ib 5725A Amplifier 32 kg 70 pounds Absolute Uncertainty Definition The 5500A specifications include stability temperature coefficient linearity line and load regulation and the traceability of the external standards used for calibration You do not need to add anything to determine the total specification of the 5520A for the temperature range indicated Specification Confiden
143. make sure the indicator is off 5520A Operators Manual 4 60 Testing the Meter You can use the error mode feature of the calibrator to test the meter To verify that all ranges of all functions are within specifications proceed as follows 1 Turn on the calibrator and allow it to warm up ANWarning Ensure that the calibrator is in standby mode before making any connection between the calibrator and tester Dangerous voltages may be present on the leads and connectors 2 Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in Figure 4 18 FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR A ORMAL AUX SCOPE Mak SS div x to 71712 GUARD 20A nnO46f eps Figure 4 18 Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series General Functions 3 Test the dc voltage function as follows Turn on the DMM and set its function switch to V b Set the warmed up calibrator to 3 5 V dc Press c Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator output for a reading of 43 5000 on the DMM display d Verify that the error shown on the control display is less than the specification for the DMM in its Users Manual e Check the DMM error at 35 0 V 35 0 V 350 0 V Hint use the Verify the errors are within specification When causes the output to go over 33 V the calibrator goes into standby When this happens press to operate f Check the DMM er
144. mark is RANGE returning the Calibrator primary and secondary outputs Interface Messages IEEE 488 Interface messages manage traffic on the IEEE 488 interface bus Device addressing and clearing data handshaking and commands to place status bytes on the bus are all directed by interface messages Some of the interface messages occur as state transitions of dedicated control lines The rest of the interface messages are sent over the data lines with the ATN signal true All device dependent and common commands are sent over the data lines with the ATN signal false An important thing to note about interface messages is that unlike device dependent and common commands interface messages are not sent literally in a direct way For example when you send a device dependent query to the Calibrator the controller automatically sends the interface message MTA My Talk Address IEEE 488 standards define interface messages Table 5 4 lists the interface messages that the Calibrator accepts Table 5 4 also shows the BASIC statement to generate the interface message Table 5 5 lists the interface messages that the Calibrator sends The mnemonics listed in the tables are not sent in BASIC PRINT statements as commands are in this way they are different from device dependent and common commands Interface messages are handled automatically in most cases For example handshake messages DAV DAC and RFD automatically occur under the directio
145. measurement features only Displayed when the amplitude is specified as typical only and or reduced resolution This occurs when operating the 5520A in the extended bandwidth mode C Displayed when unstored calibration constants are in use 2 Control Display The Control Display is a multipurpose backlit LCD used for displaying data entries UUT error adjustments softkey labels phase angles watts power factors and other prompts and messages When there isn t enough room on the Output Display output frequency is displayed on the Control Display Softkey labels identify the function of the softkey directly below them Several softkey labels together are called a menu The changing menus provide access to many different functions through the five softkeys plus the PREV MENU key See Figure 3 3 Softkey Menu Tree Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 The STBY Standby key places the 5520A in standby mode Standby mode is indicated by STBY in the lower left corner of the Output Display In standby mode the NORMAL AUX and 20A output terminals are internally disconnected from the 5520A The 5520A starts up in standby mode The 5520A automatically switches to standby if one of the following occurs The RESET key is pressed A voltage 2 33 V is selected when the previous output voltage was less than 33 V Output function is changed except when going between ac or dc voltage 33 V A current output above 3 A is
146. mode the MULT key changes the output to the next higher range MEAS TC The MEAS TC Measure Thermocouple key enables the TC Thermocouple input connection and causes the 5520A to compute a temperature based on the voltage present at the input Output Units Keys The output units keys determine the function of the 5520A Some keys have a second unit if the SHIFT key is pressed just before the units key The output units are as follows y Voltage or Decibels relative to 1 mW into 600 ohms impedance changeable A Watts or Current Resistance Frequency or Seconds Seconds is applicable to the SCOPE functions only Capacitance Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius When a frequency Hz value is entered the 5520A automatically switches to ac When a new signed 4 or output value is entered without specifying Hz the 5520A automatically switches back to dc or enter 0 Hz to move back to volts dc Multiplier Keys Select output value multipliers Some keys have a second function if the SHIFT key is pressed just before the multiplier key For example if you enter 33 then SHIFT then Fm J then F4 then ENTER the 5520A output value is 33 pF The multiplier keys are as follows milli 10 or 0 001 or micro 10 or 0 000001 lk kilo 10 or 1 000 or nano 10 or 0 000000001 mega 10 or 1 000 000 or pico 1077 or 0 000000000001 3 7 5520A Operators Manual 3 8
147. of the calibrator To clean the air filter refer to Figure 7 2 and proceed as follows 1 2 Turn off the power let the fan come to rest and unplug the ac line cord Remove the filter element Grasp the top and bottom of the air filter frame b Squeeze the edges of the frame towards each other to disengage the filter tabs from the slots in the calibrator c Pull the filter frame straight out from the calibrator Clean the filter element a Wash the filter element in soapy water b Rinse the filter element thoroughly c Shake out the excess water then allow the filter element to dry thoroughly before reinstalling it Reinstall the filter element by performing the filter removal steps in reverse order 7 5 5520A Operators Manual DU EY DIY 7 KBA TCI VITE NK Z UVR 676747 PRR FRPR MT UB RAI oqo62f eps Figure 7 2 Accessing the Air Filter 7 4 General Cleaning and lens using a soft cloth slightly For general cleaning wipe the case front panel keys dampened with water or a non abrasive mild cleaning solution that does not harm plastics CAUTION hydrocarbons or chlorinated solvents for the Ic Do not use aromat cleaning They can damage the plastic materials used in calibrator 7 6 Maintenance Performance Tests 7 7 5 Performance Tests To verify that the 5520A meets its
148. option 8 39 OLDREF remote command ONTIME remote command OPER remote command 6 28 OPER remote command OPR 3 5 options and accessories Chapter 8 19 3 oscilloscope calibration SC300 connections 8 65 SC300 specifications SC600 connections 8 13 oscilloscope calibration with the SC300 oscilloscope calibration with the SC600 8 5 oscilloscope commands 6 5 OUT remote command 6 29 OUT remote command 6 30 OUT ERR remote command 6 31 OUT IMP remote command for SC300 8 85 OUT_IMP remote command SC600 option OUT_IMP remote command for SC300 8 85 OUT_IMP remote command SC600 option output queue 5 44 overlapped commands 5 30 overload protection testing SC600 8 33 parallel connected 5520As current output parameter syntax rules 5 33 phase specifications 1 24 PHASE remote command 6 31 PHASE remote command 6 31 plus minus key 3 8 power and dual output limit specifications 1 23 power cords 2 7 power uncertainty calculatin gj 1 25 POWER remote command 6 32 PR_PRT X IEEE X RS 232 remote command 6 32 PRES remote command 6 32 PRES_MEAS remote command 6 33 PRES_UNIT remote command PRES_UNIT remote command PRES_UNIT_D remote command 6 34 PRES_UNIT_D remote command pressure measurement remote example pressure measuring 4 56 5520A Operators Manual PREV MENU key 3 5 null modem cables 9 4
149. port The pin assignments of the rear panel serial connectors are in conformance to EIA TIA 574 standard and are shown in Figures C 1 Host and C 2 UUT Serial connection cables are available from Fluke are shown in Table C 2 See Chapter 9 Accessories for ordering information Table C 2 Serial Port Connection Cables Connection Cable Fluke Part Number 5520A SERIAL 1 FROM PC COM port DB 9 PM8914 001 HOST 5520A SERIAL 1 FROM PC COM port DB 25 RS40 HOST 5520A SERIAL 2 TO UUT UUT serial port DB 9 943738 5520A SERIAL 2 TO UUT UUT serial port DB TRANSMIT DATA Tx DTE READY DTR RECEIVED DATA Rx GROUND REQUEST TO SEND RTS CLEAR TO SEND CTS FE 02 EPS Figure C 2 SERIAL 1 FROM HOST Port Connector Pinout TRANSMIT DATA Tx RECEIVED DATA Rx GROUND RECEIVED LINE SIGNAL E 4 DETECTOR RLSD 5 1 Sle O QUO LO id CLEAR TO SEND CTS DCE READY DSR REQUEST TO SEND RTS FE 03 EPS Figure C 3 SERIAL 2 TO UUT Port Connector Pinout connection side C 2 Appendices C RS 232 IEEE 488 Cables and Connectors NULL MODEM CABLE SERIAL 1 FROM HOST SERIAL 2 MODEM CABLE TO UUT RLSD 01 Rx Tx FE 04 EPS Figure C 4 Serial Port Connections DB 9 DB 9 5520A Operators Manual SERIAL 1 NULL MODEM CABLE FROM HOST JO Qm E GM MODEM CABLE
150. provided by Fluke the protection provided by the Calibrator may be impaired The 5520A Calibrator is a fully programmable precision source of the following DC voltage from 0 V to 1000 V AC voltage from 1 mV to 1000 V with output from 10 Hz to 500 kHz AC current from 100 uA to 20 5 A with variable frequency limits DC current from 0 to 20 5 A Resistance values from a short circuit to 1100 MO Capacitance values from 190 pF to 110 mF Simulated output for eight types of Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs Simulated output for eleven types of thermocouples E Stu E Ss nnO3O0f eps Figure 1 1 5520A Multi Product Calibrator 5520A Operators Manual Features of the 5520A Calibrator include the following e Automatic meter error calculation MS and keys that change the output value to pre determined cardinal values for various functions e Programmable entry limits that prevent invalid amounts from being entered e Simultaneous output of voltage and current up to an equivalent of 20 9 kW e Pressure measurement when used with Fluke 700 Series pressure modules e 10 MHz reference input and output Use this to input a high accuracy 10 MHz reference to transfer the frequency accuracy to the 5520A or to synchronize one or more additional 5520As to a master 5520A e Simultaneous output of two voltages e Extended b
151. pulse width and the period The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on different waveforms is checked using the Wave Generator WAVEGEN function The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on and capture complex TV Trigger signals is checked using the VIDEO function The oscilloscope s input characteristics can be measured using the Input Resistance and Capacitance MEAS Z function The oscilloscope s input protection circuit can be tested using the Overload OVERLD function The menus that implement these functions also include parameters for altering the way the output signal responds to voltage frequency and time settings giving you control of the signal during calibration and providing more methods for observing the signal s characteristics SC600 Option Specifications These specifications apply only to the SC600 Option General specifications that apply to the 5520A hereafter termed the Calibrator can be found in Chapter 1 The specifications are valid under the following conditions The Calibrator is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1 The Calibrator has completed a warm up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off up to a maximum of 30 minutes The SC600 Option has been active longer than 5 minutes 8 5 5520A Operators Manual 8 6 6 3 Volt Specifications Table 8 1 Volt Specifications Volt Function dc Signal Square Wa
152. reference after you make adjustments at a different frequency MORE OPTIONS lets you use an automatic frequency sweep and lock the voltage range if necessary The following section provides details on this menu 5520A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope e and 0 keys step frequencies up or down in amounts that let T quickly access a new set of frequencies For example if the value is 250 kHz changes it to 300 kHz and PIV changes it to 200 kHz For voltage values and PIV step through cardinal point values in a 1 2 3 6 sequence 8 103 The MORE OPTIONS Menu When you select MORE OPTIONS you open options that give you more control over the frequency and voltage To access the MORE OPTIONS menu press the softkey under MORE OPTIONS in the Levsine menu Output a e MORE SET HODE terminal tn OPTIONS LAST levs ine 5 2 4 set to last F zet to 50 kHz ine marker Wavegen volt edae FREQ RATE Range 8 MODE Jump Fast aut levzine E CZ Romi 5 _ _ ici ny Jump Fazt po MN uc auta 40 z dow ioe eed 100 zat 1 3 J 5 5 glo30i eps Each option in the MORE OPTIONS menu is described below FREQ CHANGE Toggles between two settings that control the way the output signal adjusts to a new frequency This is the default setting Jump
153. remote command 6 54 T_SET remote command 6 54 UT_SET remote command V DIV menu SC300 option 8 70 VAL remote command 6 55 VIDEOFMT remote command SC600 option VIDEOFMT remote command SC600 option 8 39 VIDEOMARK remote command SC600 option 8 39 VIDEOMARK remote command SC600 option 8 39 Visual Basic using to test the Host RS 232 interface 5 15 Visual Basic using to test the UUT RS 232 interface 5 19 VVAL remote command 6 55 WAVE remote command 6 56 WAVE remote command 6 56 ZCOMP remote command 6 57 U U U U U U U U 5520A Operators Manual ZCOMP remote command 6 57 ZERO MEAS remote command SC600 ZERO MEAS remote command option 8 40 ZERO MEAS remote command
154. specifications you can use Tables 7 2 through 7 14 The tables are for qualified metrology personnel who have access to a standards laboratory that is properly equipped to test calibration equipment of this level of accuracy The tables show the recommended test points and the acceptable upper and lower limits for each point The limits were computed simply by adding or subtracting the 90 day specification from the output value There is no built in factor for measurement uncertainty If you need more detailed verification and calibration adjustment instructions order the 5520A Service Manual PN 802303 Table 7 2 Verfication Tests for DC Voltage Normal Range Output Lower Limit Upper Limit 329 9999 mV 0 0000 mV 0 0010 mV 0 0010 mV 329 9999 mV 329 0000 mV 328 9941 mV 329 0059 mV 329 9999 mV 329 0000 mV 329 0059 mV 328 9941 mV 3 299999 V 0 000000 V 0 000002 V 0 000002 V 3 299999 V 1 000000 V 0 999989 V 1 000011 V 3 299999 V 1 000000 V 1 000011 V 0 999989 V 3 299999 V 3 290000 V 3 289968 V 3 290032 V 3 299999 V 3 290000 V 3 290032 V 3 289968 V 32 99999 V 0 00000 V 0 00002 V 0 00002 V 32 99999 V 10 00000 V 9 99988 V 10 00012 V 32 99999 V 10 00000 V 10 00012 V 9 99989 V 32 99999 V 32 90000 V 32 89965 V 32 90035 V 32 99999 V 32 90000 V 32 90035 V 32 89965 V 329 9999 V 50 0000 V 49 9991 V 50 0009 V 329 9999 V 329 0000 V 328 9949 V 329 0051 V 329 9999 V 50 0000 V 50 0009 V 49 9991 V 329 9999 V 329 0000 V 329 0051 V 328
155. standard IEEE 488 2 Under the remote control of an instrument controller the 5520A Calibrator operates exclusively as a talker listener You can write your own programs using the IEEE 488 command set or run the optional Windows based MET CAL software See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the commands available for IEEE 488 operation 5520A Operators Manual SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port COM port T 0000070707 SEM Ez a PODO ooo aoo GE 000 005 00 o 520A PC or Terminal RS 232 Remote Operation using the SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port SERIAL 2 SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port TO UUT port zc Unit Under Test RS 232 Remote Operation using the SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT ports nn031f eps Figure 1 2 RS 232 Remote Connections 1 6 Where to Go from Here To locate specific information concerning the installation and operation of the 5520A calibrator refer to the following list e Unpacking and setup Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation e Installation and rack mounting Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation and the rack mount kit instruction sheet AC line power and interface
156. terminals used for current output AUX or 20A Responses AUX AUX terminals are selected A20 20A terminals are selected Example CUR_POST returns AUX Returns AUX when the AUX terminals are selected for output current DAMPEN IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Dampen Mode for Pressure Measurement command Activates or deactivates dampening averaging of pressure readings 5520A Operators Manual Parameter ON dampen on OFF dampen off Example DAMPEN ON DAMPEN X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Dampen Mode for Pressure Measurement query Returns whether dampening averaging of pressure readings is active Response character ON dampen on character OFF dampen off Example DAMPEN returns ON DBMZ X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped X Coupled dBm Impedance command Sets the impedance used for dBm outputs ac volts Parameters 750 50 ohms 775 75 ohms 790 90 ohms 7100 100 ohms 7135 135 ohms 2150 150 ohms 2300 300 ohms 7600 600 ohms 7900 900 ohms 21000 1000 ohms dBv 21200 1200 ohms Example DBMZ 2600 DBMZ X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled
157. the UUT and verify the annunciator is off Generally is on only for ac and dc volts where the UUT is isolated from earth ground There must however be a safety ground for the 5520A See Connecting to Line Power in Chapter 2 When enabled by the sourced output a softkey LOs appears which allows you to tie or open an internal connection between the NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal When tied and is on then both LO terminals are tied to chassis ground 4 16 External Guard The guard is an electrical shield isolated from the chassis that protects the analog circuitry The guard provides a low impedance path for common mode noise and ground loop currents There is normally an internal connection between the guard and the NORMAL LO terminal By pressing the key you break this internal connection which allows you to connect a lead from the GUARD terminal to earth ground on another instrument in an interconnected system Use this external guard connection Front Panel Operation 4 Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 4 17 whenever you are testing a UUT that has a grounded LO terminal Remember to always maintain only one earth ground tie point in a system Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections Four wire and two wire connections refer to methods of connecting the 5520A to the UUT to cancel out test lead resistance to assure the highest precision of the calibration output Figures 4 2 through 4 4 illustrate the connection configura
158. the softkey under DOWN to decrease the volts per division o DIV Specifies the number of divisions that establish the peak to peak value of the waveform The value can be adjusted from one to eight divisions The amount denoted by each division is displayed in the V div field Press the softkey under UP to increase the signal s height and press the softkey under DOWN to decrease it Shortcuts for Setting the Voltage Amplitude The and keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an oscilloscope in a 1 2 5 step sequence For example if the voltage is 40 mV pressing increases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 50 mV Pressing decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 20 mV 5520A Operators Manual 8 29 Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration Procedure The following example describes how to use the VOLT menu to calibrate the oscilloscope s amplitude gain During calibration you will need to set different voltages and verify that the gain matches the graticule lines on the oscilloscope according to the specifications for your particular oscilloscope See your oscilloscope manual for the recommended calibration settings and appropriate gain values Before you start this procedure verify that you are running the SC600 Option in VOLT mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output SCOPE TRIG 1 MQ DC lt AC off Perform the following sample procedure
159. to line power 2 Using the adapter supplied by the 700PCK connect the serial data cable from the 700PCK to the SERIAL 2 TO UUT connector on the 5520A rear panel Press the key on the 5520A This activates pressure mode 4 The Output Display shows the pressure value measured by the 700 Series Pressure Module The Control Display contains three softkeys DAMPEN on off SET OFFSET zeros the pressure module and UNITS pressure units 5 If you are using any 700 Series Pressure Module except an absolute pressure type Model Number starts with 700PA vent the pressure module to atmosphere and press OFFSET to zero the pressure module 6 If you are using an absolute pressure type module Model Number starts with 700PA zero the pressure module as follows 7 Vent the module to atmosphere 8 Press SET OFFSET 9 Enterthe ambient atmospheric pressure in the units currently displayed Note Do not rely on airport pressure reports Use a barometric pressure standard in the same area as the calibrator 4 56 Front Panel Operation 4 Measuring Pressure Pressure Pressure Module Interface Unit Null Modem and Gender Changer Adapters Serial 2 Port Line Power 5520A R
160. under remote control Set to 1 when data from the UUT port has filled up the UUT buffer Set to 1 when there ia data available from the UUT port Set to 1 when the 5520A is programmed to a voltage above 33 Volts Set to 1 when the output magnitude has changed as a result of another change e g RTD TYPE This bit is always 0 in the ISR It changes to 1 only in the ISCRO and ISCR1 registers Set to 1 when the 5520A is using temporary non stored calibration data Set to 1 when the 5520A is in operate 0 when it is in standby nn320f eps Figure 5 11 Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCEs and ISCRs 5 43 5520A Operators Manual 5 44 8 58 5 56 Programming the ISR ISCR and ISCE To read the contents of the ISR send the remote command ISR To read the contents of the ISCRO or 1 send the remote command I SCRO or ISCR1 To read the contents of the ISCEO or 1 send the remote command 5 0 or ISCE1 The Calibrator responds by sending a decimal number that represents bits 0 through 15 Every time you read the ISCRO or 1 its contents are zeroed The following sample program reads all five registers 10 THIS PROGRAM READS THE ISR ISCR AND ISCE REGISTERS 20 NOTE THAT THE ICSR
161. units are derived from base units The only base unit in electricity is the ampere A 1 5520A Operators Manual buffer 1 An area of digital memory for temporary storage of data 2 An amplifier stage before the final amplifier burden voltage The maximum sustainable voltage across the terminals of a load compliance voltage The maximum voltage a constant current source can supply control chart A chart devised to monitor one or more processes to detect the excessive deviation from a desired value of a component or process crest factor The ratio of the peak voltage to the rms voltage of a waveform with the dc component removed dac digital to analog converter A device or circuit that converts a digital waveform to an analog voltage dBm A reference power level of 1 mW expressed in decibels derived units Units in the SI system that are derived from base units Volts ohms and watts are derived from amperes and other base and derived units displacement power factor Refers to the displacement component of power factor the ratio of the active power of the fundamental wave in watts to the apparent power of the fundamental wave in volt amperes distortion Undesired changes in the waveform of a signal Harmonic distortion disturbs the original relationship between a frequency and other frequencies naturally related to it Intermodulation distortion imd introduces new frequencies by the mixing of two or
162. would be used by service personnel after replacing the EEPROM for example It is not required in normal use e CAL replaces all calibration constants with factory defaults but leaves all the setup parameters unchanged This is also not required in normal use e SETUP replaces the setup parameters with factory defaults Table 3 3 but leaves the state of calibration unchanged You do not have to break the calibration sticker for this operation Remote commands can also change the setup parameters See these commands in Chapter 6 SROSTR SPLSTR PUD SP SET UUT SET TEMP STD DATEFMT UNIT D RTD TYPE D TC TYPE D LIMIT Resetting the Calibrator At any time during front panel operation not remote operation you can return the 5520A Calibrator to the power up state by pressing R except after an error message which is cleared by pressing a blue softkey Pressing the R key does the following e Returns the calibrator to the power up state 0 V dc standby 330 mV range and all OUTPUT SETUP menus set to their most recent default values e Clears the stored values for limits and error mode reference 4 10 Zeroing the Calibrator Zeroing recalibrates internal circuitry most notably dc offsets in all ranges of operation To meet the specifications in Chapter 1 zeroing is required every seven days or when the 5520A Calibrator ambient temperature changes by more than 5 C The tightest ohms specifications are maintained with a
163. you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value This procedure assumes you have already sourced a single ac voltage output not exceeding 33 V sine waves 65 V p p square waves or 93 V p p triangle waves and truncated sine waves thus displaying the softkey OFFSET below OFFSET WAVE 0 00000 Y zine 4 2 1 Press the softkey WAVE to select the desired waveform sine waves sine triangle waves tri square waves square or truncated sine wave truncs 2 Press the softkey OFFSET opening the offset entry display Enter the desired offset using the numeric keys and decimal point key For example 0 123 V below FFzet 0 00000 wv Heu offset 0 123 V 2 L 3 Press the key to enter the offset and then nn114f eps Front Panel Operation 4 Editing and Error Output Settings 4 45 Editing and Error Output Settings All 5520A Calibrator outputs can be edited using the front panel Edit Field knob and associated 4 K and keys In addition multiply 9 land divide keys edit the output by decades The difference between the original output reference and edited output is displayed as an error between the two settings This allows you to edit a value to achieve a correct reading at the UUT and thereby calculate an error in or ppm parts per million if it is less than 1000 ppm Table 4 2 lists the
164. zero cal every 12 hours within 1 C of use The Calibrator displays a message when it is time to zero the calibrator Zeroing is particularly important when your calibration workload has 1 mQ and 1 mV resolution and when there has been a significant temperature change in the 5520A Calibrator work Front Panel Operation 4 Zeroing the Calibrator environment There are two zeroing functions total instrument zero ZERO and ohms only zero OHMS ZERO Complete the following procedure to zero the calibrator Note The 5520A Calibrator rear panel CALIBRATION switch does not have to be enabled for this procedure 1 Turn on the Calibrator and allow a warm up period of at least 30 minutes 2 Press the key 3 Press the key opening the setup menu below CAL SHOW IMSTMT UTILITY SPEC SETUP IFUMCTHS a L 5 Press the CAL softkey opening the calibration information menu below nnO68f eps STORE CAL CAL REPORT PRIHT COMSTS DATES SETUP REPORTS nn069f eps 6 Press the CAL softkey opening the calibration activity menu below SCOPE CAL appears as an option if it is installed SCOPE s5204 OHMS ERR ACT CAL CAL ZERO backup 2 L 7 Press the ZERO softkey to totally zero the 5520 Calibrator press the OHMS ZERO softkey to zero only the ohms function After the zeroing routine is complete several minutes press the key to reset the calibrator
165. 0 O 10 OSA Other Secondary Address 5 OSA SCG MSA NOT OTA Other Talk Address AD OTA TAG and MTA NOT PCG Primary Command Group PCG ACG or UCG or LAG or TAG PPC Parallel Poll Configure M AC 0 0 0 JO j1 10 1 1 PPE Parallel Poll Enable SE 1 1 0 B4 B3 B2 Bi 1 PPD Parallel Poll Disable M SE 1 1 1 B4 B3 B2 Bi 1 1 Parallel Poll Response 1 U ST 1 1 1 PPR2 Parallel Poll Response 2 U ST 1 ded PPR3 Parallel Poll Response 3 U ST 1 ta PPR4 Parallel Poll Response 4 U ST 1 1 1 PPR5 Parallel Poll Response 5 U ST 1 PPR6 Parallel Poll Response 6 U ST 1 1 i PPR7 Parallel Poll Response 7 U ST 1 1 1 PPR8 Parallel Poll Response 8 U IST 1 1 i PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure M UC 0 0 j1 JO j1 10 1 1 REN Remote Enable U UC 1 RFD Ready For Data U HS 0 RQS Request For Service U ST 1 0 SCG Secondary Command Group SE 1 1 1 SDC Selected Device Clear AC 0 1 O JO 1 SPD Serial Poll Disable M UC 0 O 1 1 JO O 1 1 SPE Serial Poll Enable M UC O iO j1 1 0 O 0 1 SRQ Service Request U ST 1 STB Status Byte M ST B8 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 0 TCT Take Control M AC 10 0 1 JO JO 1 1 TAG Talk Address Group M AD 1 0 1 UCG Universal Command Group M UC 01 0 11 1 UNL Unlisten AD 011111111111 1 UNT Untalk AD 110 1 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 5 7 IEEE 488 Remote Message Codi
166. 0 interface TERM terminal COMP computer flow control XON xon xoff NOSTALL none RTS rts cts number data bits DBIT7 7 bits or DBITS 8 bits number stop bits SBIT1 1 bit or SBIT2 2 bits parity PNONE none PODD odd PEVEN even end of line char gt CR carriage return LF line feed CRLF carriage return line feed Remote Commands 6 Commands Example SP SET 9600 TERM XON DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE CRLFE Set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port to the factory default values SP SET X IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Host Serial Port Set query Returns the RS 232 C settings for the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port To return the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port see UUT SET command The factory default values are shown below in bold type To return to the factory defaults see the FORMAT SETUP command Responses baud rate value 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 interface TERM terminal COMP computer flow control XON xon xoff NOSTALL none RTS rts cts number data bits DBIT7 7 bits or DBITS 8 bits number stop bits SBIT1 1 bit or SBIT2 2 bits parity PNONE none PODD odd PEVEN even end of line char gt CR carriage return LF line feed CRLF carr
167. 0 0000 mA 0 00025 mA 0 00025 mA 32 9999 mA 19 0000 mA 18 9982 mA 19 0018 mA 32 9999 mA 19 0000 mA 19 0018 mA 18 9982 mA 32 9999 mA 32 9000 mA 32 8971 mA 32 9029 mA 32 9999 mA 32 9000 mA 32 9029 mA 32 8971 mA 329 999 mA 0 000 mA 0 0025 mA 0 0025 mA 329 999 mA 190 000 mA 189 982 mA 190 018 mA 329 999 mA 190 000 mA 190 018 mA 189 982 mA 329 999 mA 329 000 mA 328 971 mA 329 029 mA 329 999 mA 329 000 mA 329 029 mA 328 971 mA 2 99999 A 0 00000 A 0 00004 A 0 00004 A 2 99999 A 1 09000 A 1 08979 A 1 09021 A 2 99999 A 1 09000 A 1 09021 A 1 08979 A 2 99999 A 2 99000 A 2 98906 A 2 99094 A 2 99999 A 2 99000 A 2 99094 A 2 98906 A 20 5000 A 0 0000 A 0 0005 A 0 0005 A 20 5000 A 10 9000 A 10 8954 A 10 9046 A 20 5000 A 10 9000 A 10 9046 A 10 8954 A 20 5000 A 20 0000 A 19 9833 A 20 0168 A 20 5000 A 20 0000 A 20 0168 A 19 9833 A 7 9 5520A Operators Manual 7 10 Table 7 5 Verification Tests for Resistance Range Output Lower Limit Upper Limit 10 9999 Q 0 0000 Q 0 0010 Q 0 0010 Q 10 9999 Q 2 0000 Q 1 9989 0 2 0011 Q 10 9999 Q 10 9000 Q 10 8986 Q 10 9014 Q 32 9999 11 9000 Q 11 8982 Q 11 9018 Q 32 9999 Q 19 0000 Q 18 9980 Q 19 0020 Q 32 9999 Q 30 0000 Q 29 9978 Q 30 0023 Q 109 9999 Q 33 0000 Q 32 9979 Q 33 0021 Q 109 9999 Q 109 0000 Q 108 9962 Q 109 0038 Q 329 9999 Q 119 0000 Q 118 9954 Q 119 0046 Q 329 9999 Q 190 00
168. 0 00178 0 002797 0 0028 0 00475 0 00667 0 0067 0 0169 0 02707 0 0271 0 1126 0 1978 0 1981 0 9241 1 6501 1 6501 1 6501 1 6501 0 000154 0 000757 0 002797 0 00667 0 02707 0 1978 1 6501 0 000154 0 000757 0 002797 0 00667 0 02707 0 1978 1 6501 8 43 5520A Operators Manual 8 44 8 61 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 50 2 Output Impedance Table 8 20 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 50 output impedance Wave Shape square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square square sine sine sine sine sine sine sine triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle triangle Nominal Value V p p 0 0018 0 0064 0 0109 0 011 0 028 0 0449 0 045 0 078 0 109 0 11 0 28 0 449 0 45 0 78 1 09 0 0018 0 0109 0 0449 0 109 0 449 1 09 0 0018 0 0109 0 0449 0 109 0 449 1 09 N N a a or on oo Frequency Hz 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 10 100 1000 10000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Measured Value V p p Deviation V p p 1 Year Spec V p p 0 000154 0 000292 0 000427 0 00043 0 00094 0 001447 0 00145 0 00244 0 00337 0 0034 0 0085 0 01357 0 0136 0 0235 0 0328 0 0331 0
169. 0 00H 00 I 6 30 Remote Commands 6 Commands The respective values for the above examples are 15 2 188 3 mA 442 Hz 1 23 V 2 34 V 60 Hz 1 924 MQ 15 2 V 188 3 mA 442 Hz 25 86 dBm 442 Hz 25 86 dBm 15 2 V at 600 Q 104 3 C 219 74 F same value as 104 3 C in Fahrenheit 4 274 mV same value as 104 3 C for a K type thermocouple in volts 140 135 same value as 104 3 for a pt385 RTD in ohms The primary and secondary units are V DBM A OHM F CEL FAR The units for the lt frequency value gt is always assumed to be Hz OUT ERR X IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Output Error query Returns the UUT error and units computed by the Calibrator after shifting the output with the INCR command The return units are PPM parts per million PCT percent DB decibels or 0 if there is no error The UUT error is not computed when editing frequency Response lt value of error units Example OUT ERR returns 1 00000E 01 PCT Returns 10 when the UUT is reading low by 10 PHASE X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Phase Difference command Sets a phase difference between the Calibrator front panel NORMAL and AUX or 20A terminals for ac po
170. 0 1099 0 00009495 0 1099 0 00009495 0 11 0 000095 0 11 0 000095 0 305 0 0001925 0 305 0 0001925 0 499 0 0002895 0 499 0 0002895 0 5 0 00029 0 5 0 00029 1 35 0 000715 1 35 0 000715 219 0 001135 2 19 0 001135 22 0 00114 22 0 00114 6 6 0 00334 6 6 0 00334 8 41 5520A Operators Manual Table 8 16 DC Voltage Verification cont Nominal Measured Deviation Value V dc Value V dc V dc 1 Year Spec V dc 10 99 0 005535 10 99 0 005535 11 0 00554 11 0 00554 70 5 0 03529 70 5 0 03529 130 0 06504 130 0 06504 6 599 50 0 0 0165375 8 58 AC Voltage Amplitude Verification Table 8 17 AC Voltage Amplitude Verification 1 MQ output impedance unless noted Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 year Spec Value V p p Hz Value V p p V p p V p p 0 001 1000 0 000041 0 001 1000 0 000041 0 01 1000 0 00005 0 01 1000 0 00005 0 025 1000 0 000065 0 025 1000 0 000065 0 11 1000 0 00015 0 11 1000 0 00015 0 5 1000 0 00054 0 5 1000 0 00054 2 2 1000 0 00224 2 2 1000 0 00224 11 1000 0 01104 11 1000 0 01104 130 1000 0 13004 130 1000 0 13004 6 599 500 1000 0 0165375
171. 0 5 00 10 00 10 00 60 59 90 60 10 59 75 60 25 59 50 60 50 57 50 62 50 55 00 65 00 50 00 70 00 90 89 90 90 10 89 75 90 25 89 50 90 50 87 50 92 50 85 00 95 00 80 00 100 00 89 90 90 10 89 90 90 10 Maintenance Performance Tests 7 Table 7 13 Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy V and Range Normal Output Freq Output Normal uency 329 999 mV 30 000mV 65Hz 329 99 mA 300 00 mA 0 0 10 329 999 mV 30 000 mV 1 kHz 329 99 mA 300 00 mA 0 0 50 329 999 mV 30 000 mV 30 kHz 329 99 mA 300 00 mA 0 10 00 329 999 mV 200 000 mv 65 Hz 2 99999 A 2 00000 A 0 0 10 329 999 mV 50 000 mV 65 Hz 20 5000 A 5 0000 A 0 0 10 329 999 mV 50 000 mV 400 Hz 20 5000 A 5 0000 A 0 0 25 329 999 mV 30 000 mV 65 Hz 329 99 mA 300 00 mA 60 59 90 329 999 mV 200 000 mv 65 Hz 2 99999 A 2 00000 A 60 59 90 329 999 mV 200 000 mv 65 Hz 20 5000 A 20 0000 A 60 59 90 329 999 mV 200 000 mv 400 Hz 20 5000 A 20 0000 A 60 59 75 32 9999 V 3 3000 V 65 Hz 329 99 mA 300 00 mA 0 0 10 32 9999 V 3 3000 V 65 Hz 2 99999 A 2 00000 A 0 0 10 32 9999 V 3 3000 V 65 Hz 20 5000 A 5 0000 A 0 0 10 32 9999 V 3 3000 V 400 Hz 20 5000 A 5 0000 A 0 0 25 32 9999 V 3 3000 V 65 Hz 329 99 mA 300 00 mA 90 89
172. 0 kHz 45 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 18 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 45 Hz 10 kHz 45 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 8 kHz 1 kHz 8 kHz Note Typical specification is 24 dB at 2 MHz Lower Limit 2 99340 V 0 07500 V Note 3 2990 V 3 2990 V 28 3350 V 29 9919 V 29 9957 V 29 9957 V 29 9957 V 29 9928 V 29 9904 V 29 9759 V 32 993 V 32 989 V 299 953 V 299 953 V 299 946 V 299 928 V 299 922 V 199 630 V 329 91 V 329 91 V 999 74 V 999 79 V 999 79 V 999 74 V 1019 79 V 1019 74 V Upper Limit 3 00660 V 3 3010 V 3 3010 V 31 6650 V 30 0082 V 30 0044 V 30 0044 V 30 0044 V 30 0072 V 30 0096 V 30 0241 V 33 007 V 33 011 V 300 047 V 300 047 V 300 054 V 300 072 V 300 078 V 200 370 V 330 09 V 330 09 V 1000 26 V 1000 21 V 1000 21 V 1000 26 V 1020 21 V 1020 27 V 7 13 5520A Operators Manual 7 14 Table 7 7 Verification Tests for AC Voltage AUX Output AUX Range Note Frequency Lower Limit Upper Limit 329 999 mV 10 000 mV 45 Hz 9 622 mV 10 378 mV 329 999 mV 10 000 mV 1 kHz 9 622 mV 10 378 mV 329 999 mV 10 000 mV 5 kHz 9 535 mV 10 465 mV 329 999 mV 10 000 mV 10 kHz 9 520 mV 10 480 mV 329 999 mV 10 000 mV 30 kHz 8 700 mV 11 300 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 9 5 Hz 283 350 mV 316 650 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 10 Hz 299 180 mV 300 820 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 45 Hz 299 390 mV 300 610 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 1 kHz 299 390 mV 300 610 m
173. 00 000 mV 50 kHz 299 902 mV 300 098 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 100 kHz 299 788 mV 300 212 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 500 kHz 299 450 mV 300 550 mV 3 29999 V 0 33000 V 45 Hz 0 32989 V 0 33011 V 3 29999 V 0 33000 V 10 kHz 0 32989 V 0 33011 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 9 5 Hz 2 83350 V 3 16650 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 10 Hz 2 99920 V 3 00080 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 45 Hz 2 99952 V 3 00048 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 1 kHz 2 99952 V 3 00048 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 10 kHz 2 99952 V 3 00048 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 20 kHz 2 99946 V 3 00054 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 50 kHz 2 99920 V 3 00080 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 100 kHz 2 99823 V 3 00178 V Maintenance Performance Tests 7 Table 7 6 Verification Tests for AC Voltage Normal cont Range 3 29999 V 3 29999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 32 9999 V 329 999 V 329 999 V 329 999 V 329 999 V 329 999 V 329 999 V 329 999 V 329 999 V 1020 00 V 1020 00 V 1020 00 V 1020 00 V 1020 00 V 1020 00 V 1020 00 V 1020 00 V Output 3 00000 V 3 29000 V 3 3000 V 3 3000 V 30 0000 V 30 0000 V 30 0000 V 30 0000 V 30 0000 V 30 0000 V 30 0000 V 30 0000 V 33 000 V 33 000 V 300 000 V 300 000 V 300 000 V 300 000 V 300 000 V 200 000 V 330 00 V 330 00 V 1000 00 V 1000 00 V 1000 00 V 1000 00 V 1020 00 V 1020 00 V Frequency 450 kHz 2 MHz 45 Hz 10 kHz 9 5 Hz 10Hz 45 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 90 kHz 45 Hz 1
174. 00 870 nF 1 09999 uF 0 70000 uF 100 Hz 0 69767 0 70233 1 09999 uF 1 09000 uF 100 Hz 1 08693 uF 1 09307 uF 3 29999 uF 2 00000 uF 100 Hz 1 99320 uF 2 00680 uF 3 29999 uF 3 00000 uF 100 Hz 2 99130 3 00870 10 9999 uF 7 0000 100 Hz 6 9767 uF 7 0233 10 9999 uF 10 9000 uF 100 Hz 10 8693 uF 10 9307 uF 32 9999 uF 20 0000 uF 100 Hz 19 9100 uF 20 0900 32 9999 uF 30 0000 uF 100 Hz 29 8800 uF 30 1200 109 999 uF 70 000 uF 50 Hz 69 662 70 338 109 999 uF 109 000 uF 50 Hz 108 529 uF 109 471 uF 329 999 uF 200 000 54 uA dc 199 020 uF 200 980 329 999 uF 300 000 uF 80 uA dc 298 680 uF 301 320 uF 1 09999 mF 0 33000 mF 90 uA dc 0 32788 mF 0 33212 mF 1 09999 mF 0 70000 mF 180 uA dc 0 69662 mF 0 70338 mF 1 09999 mF 1 09000 mF 270 dc 1 08529 mF 1 09471 mF 3 2999 mF 1 1000 mF 270 dc 1 0933 mF 1 1067 mF 3 2999 mF 2 0000 mF 540 uA dc 1 9902 mF 2 0098 mF 3 2999 mF 3 0000 mF 800 pA dc 2 9868 mF 3 0132 mF Maintenance Performance Tests 7 Table 7 9 Verification Tests for Capacitance cont Test Frequency Range Output or Current Lower Limit Upper Limit 10 9999 mF 3 3000 mF 900 pA dc 3 2788 mF 3 3212 mF 10 9999 mF 10 9000 mF 2 7 mA dc 10 8529 mF 10 9471 mF 32 9999 mF 20 0000 mF 5 4 mA dc 19 8300 mF 20 1700 mF 32 9999 mF 30 0000 mF 8 0 mA dc 29 7600 mF 30 2400 mF 110 000 mF 33 000 mF 9 0 mA dc 32 570 mF 33 430 mF 110 000
175. 00 Q 189 9938 Q 190 0062 Q 329 9999 Q 300 0000 Q 299 9914 Q 300 0086 Q 1 099999 kQ 0 330000 kQ 0 329991 kQ 0 330009 kQ 1 099999 kQ 1 090000 kQ 1 089974 1 090026 3 299999 kQ 1 190000 kQ 1 189954 KQ 1 190046 3 299999 kQ 1 900000 kQ 1 899938 1 900062 kQ 3 299999 3 000000 kQ 2 999914 3 000086 kQ 10 99999 kQ 3 30000 kQ 3 29991 kQ 3 30009 kQ 10 99999 kQ 10 90000 kQ 10 89974 10 90026 32 99999 kQ 11 90000 11 89954 KQ 11 90046 32 99999 19 00000 kQ 18 99938 kQ 19 00062 32 99999 kQ 30 00000 kQ 29 99914 kQ 30 00086 kQ 109 9999 kQ 33 0000 kQ 32 9991 kQ 33 0009 kQ 109 9999 kQ 109 0000 kQ 108 9974 109 0026 kQ 329 9999 kQ 119 0000 kQ 118 9950 kQ 119 0050 kQ 329 9999 kQ 190 0000 kQ 189 9933 190 0068 kQ 329 9999 kQ 300 0000 kQ 299 9905 300 0095 1 099999 MQ 0 330000 MQ 0 329990 MQ 0 330010 MQ 1 099999 MQ 1 090000 MQ 1 089971 MQ 1 090029 MQ 3 299999 MQ 1 190000 MQ 1 189922 MQ 1 190078 MQ 3 299999 MQ 1 900000 MQ 1 899894 MQ 1 900106 MO 3 299999 MQ 3 000000 MQ 2 999850 MQ 3 000150 MQ Maintenance 7 Performance Tests Table 7 5 Verification Tests for Resistance cont Range Output Lower Limit Upper Limit 10 99999 MQ 3 30000 MO 3 29959 MO 3 30041 MO 10 99999 MQ 10 90000 MQ 10 89875 MQ 10 90125 MQ 32 99999 MQ 11 90000 MQ 11 89512 MQ 11 90488 MQ 32 99999 MQ 19 00000 MQ 18 99370 MQ 19 00630 MQ 32 99999 MQ 30 00000 MQ 29 99150 MQ 30 00850 MQ 109 9999 MQ 33 0000 MQ
176. 00 mV 600 mV 1V 2 5V Frequency Range 1 kHz to 10 MHz 1 2 5 ppm of setting Typical Jitter edge to trigger 5 ps p p Leading Edge Aberrations 2 within 2 ns from 5096 of rising edge lt 396 of output 2 mV 2105 ns lt 2 of output 2 mV 5 to 15 ns lt 1 of output 2 mV after 15 ns 0 5926 of output 2 mV Typical Duty Cycle 45 to 55 Tunnel Diode Pulse Drive Square wave at 100 Hz to 100 kHz with variable amplitude of 60 V to 100 V p p 1 Above 2 MHz the rise time specification is lt 350 ps 2 All edge aberration measurements are made with a Tektronix 11801 mainframe with an SD26 input module 8 7 5520A Operators Manual 8 5 Leveled Sine Wave Specifications Table 8 3 Leveled Sine Wave Specifications Leveled Sine Wave Frequency Range Characteristics 50 kHz 50 kHz to 100 MHz to 300 MHz to 100 MHz 300 MHz 600 MHz into 50 Q reference Amplitude Characteristics for measuring oscilloscope bandwidth Range p p 5 mV to 5 5 V Resolution lt 100 mV 3 digits gt 100 mV 4 digits Adjustment Range continuously adjustable 1 Year Absolute t 2 of 3 5 of 4 of output 6 of output Uncertainty output output 300 uV 300 uV tcal 5 300 uV 300 uV Flatness relative to not applicable 1 5 of 2 of output 4 of output 50 kHz output 100 uV 100 uV 100 uV
177. 000 A Output 2 99000 A 3 3000 A 3 3000 A 3 3000 A 10 9000 A 10 9000 A 10 9000 A 10 9000 A 10 9000 A 20 0000 A 20 0000 A 20 0000 A 20 0000 A 20 0000 A Frequency 10 kHz 500 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 45 Hz 65 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 45 Hz 65 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz Lower Limit 2 92520 A 3 2954 A 3 2954 A 3 2155 10 8926 A 10 8926 A 10 8893 A 10 8893 A 10 6255 A 19 9750 A 19 9750 A 19 9690 A 19 9690 A 19 4950 A Upper Limit 3 05480 A 3 3046 A 3 3046 A 3 3845 A 10 9075 A 10 9075 A 10 9107A 10 9107A 11 1745A 20 0250 A 20 0250 A 20 0310 20 0310 20 5050 A 5520A Operators Manual 7 18 Table 7 9 Verification Tests for Capacitance Test Frequency Range Output or Current Lower Limit Upper Limit 0 3999 nF 0 1900 nF 5 kHz 0 1793 nF 0 2007 nF 0 3999 nF 0 3500 nF 1 kHz 0 3387 nF 0 3613 nF 1 0999 nF 0 4800 nF 1 kHz 0 4682 nF 0 4918 nF 1 0999 nF 0 6000 nF 1 kHz 0 5877 nF 0 6123 nF 1 0999 nF 1 0000 nF 1 kHz 0 9862 nF 1 0138 nF 3 2999 nF 2 0000 nF 1 kHz 1 9824 nF 2 0176 nF 10 9999 nF 7 0000 nF 1 kHz 6 9767 nF 7 0233 nF 10 9999 nF 10 9000 nF 1 kHz 10 8693 nF 10 9307 nF 32 9999 nF 20 0000 nF 1 kHz 19 8620 nF 20 1380 nF 109 999 nF 70 000 nF 1 kHz 69 767 nF 70 233 nF 109 999 nF 109 000 nF 1 kHz 108 693 nF 109 307 nF 329 999 nF 200 000 nF 1 kHz 199 320 nF 200 680 nF 329 999 nF 300 000 nF 1 kHz 299 130 nF 3
178. 010630 0 10 a 200to 190 0 25 0 25 19010 80 0 04 0 04 80 to 0 0 05 0 05 Pt 3916 0 to 100 0 06 0 06 1000 10010260 0 06 0 07 26010300 0 07 120 30010400 0 08 0 09 Cu 427 40010600 0 08 llug os 60010630 021 0 23 200 10 80 0 03 04 80100 0 03 oo 0 to 100 0 04 oo Pt385 10010260 0 04 oos 200 26010300 2 30010400 0 12 40010600 0 12 o14 60010630 0 14 o6 600 to 630 80 to 0 0 to 100 100 to 260 100 to 260 0 3 0 3 1 21 5520A Operators Manual 1 22 DC Power Specification Summary 90 days 1 year Voltage Range 33 mV to 1020 V 33 mV to 1020 V Current Range 0 33 mA to 329 99 mA 0 33 A to 2 9999 A 3 Ato 20 5A Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C of watts output 1 0 021 0 019 2 0 06 2 0 023 0 022 2 0 07 2 1 To determine dc power uncertainty with more precision see the individual AC Voltage Specifications AC Current Specifications and Calculating Power Uncertainty 2 Add 0 02 unless a settling time of 30 seconds is allowed for output currents gt 10 A or for currents on the highest two current ranges within 30 seconds of an output current 10 A 1 23 AC Power 45 Hz to 65 Hz Specification Summary PF 1 Voltage Range 33 to 329 999 mV Current Range 9 mA to 33 mA to 32 999 mA 89 99 mA Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5
179. 08 0 399 360 MHz 0 01606 0 399 390 MHz 0 01606 0 399 400 MHz 0 01606 0 399 480 MHz 0 01606 0 399 570 MHz 0 01606 0 399 580 MHz 0 01606 0 399 590 MHz 0 01606 0 399 600 MHz 0 01606 04 50 kHz na na 04 30 MHz 0 0061 04 70 MHz 0 0061 04 120 MHz 0 0081 04 290 MHz 0 0081 04 360 MHz 0 0161 5520A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 Table 8 24 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Frequency Value V p p 04 390 MHz 0 0161 04 400 MHz 0 0161 04 480 MHz 0 0161 04 570 MHz 0 0161 04 580 MHz 0 0161 04 590 MHz 0 0161 04 600 MHz 0 0161 08 50 kHz na na 08 30 MHz 0 0121 08 70 MHz 0 0121 08 120 MHz 0 0161 08 290 MHz 0 0161 0 8 360 MHz 0 0321 0 8 390 MHz 0 0321 08 400 MHz 0 0321 08 480 MHz 0 0321 08 570 MHz 0 0321 08 580 MHz 0 0321 0 8 590 MHz 0 0321 0 8 600 MHz 0 0321 50 kHz na na 1 2 30 MHz 0 0181 12 70 MHz 0 0181 me 120 MHz 0 0241 12 290 MHz 0 0241 12 360 MHz 0 0481 1 2 390 MHz 0 0481 42 400 2 0 0481 1
180. 0A ADDRESS IS 4 20 INPUT 84 A READ THE 1 FROM THE 30 PROGRAM HALTS HERE UNTIL A 1 IS PUT INTO THE OUTPUT BUFFER 40 PRINT OUTPUT SETTLED 5520A 5 47 5520A Operators Manual 5 48 The OPC command is similar in operation to the OPC query except that it sets bit O OPC for Operation Complete in the Event Status Register to 1 rather than sending a to the output buffer One simple use for OPC is to include it in the program in order for it to generate an SRQ Service Request Then an SRQ handler written into the program can detect the operation complete condition and respond appropriately You can use OPC similarly to OPC except your program must read the ESR to detect the completion of all operations The following sample program shows how you can use OPC 10 REMOTE 20 PRINT 84 OUT 100V 1KHZ OPER OPC 30 PRINT 04 ESR 40 INPUT 84 50 IF A AND 1 0 GOTO 30 60 PRI OUTPUT SETTLED 70 END 5520A ADDRESS IS 4 PUT THE ESR BYTE IN BUFFER READ THE ESR BYTE TRY AGAIN IF NO OPC The WAI command causes the Calibrator to wait until any prior commands have been completed before continuing on to the next command and takes no other action Using XWAT is a convenient way to halt operation until the command or commands preceding it have completed The following
181. 0A Service Manual 5500 SC300 Oscilloscope Calibration Option 5500 SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option 5500A CASE Transit Case 5500A HNDL Side Handle 5500A LEADS Comprehensive Lead Set A109215 Replacement fuse 5 A 250 V Time Delay 100 V or 120 V line voltage A851931 Replacement fuse 2 5 A 250 V Time Delay 200 V or 240 V line voltage 664828 MET CAL IEEE NT Option IEEE Interface 666339 MET CAL IEEE PCI Option IEEE Interface PCI 943738 RS 232 Modem Cable 2 44 m 8 ft SERIAL 2 TO UUT to UUT DB 9 MET CAL 5 Version 5 0 Plus Automated Calibration Software Single user floating license Requires MET BASE 5 for operation 5500 CAL 5 Version 5 0 Plus Automated Calibration Software Single user floating license RS 232 control only Requires MET BASE 5 for operation MET TRACK 5 Verion 5 0 Plus T amp M Asset management Software Single user floating license Requires MET BASE 5 for operation MET BASE 5 System engine Requires licenses for one or more client applications MET CAL 5 5500 CAL 5 and or MET TRACK 5 MET CAL IEEE NT IEEE Interface Kit PM2295 05 IEEE 488 Cable 0 5 m 1 64 ft PM2295 10 IEEE 488 Cable 1 m 3 28 ft PM2295 20 IEEE 488 Cable 2 m 6 56 ft PM8914 001 RS 232 Null Modem Cable 1 5 m 5 ft SERIAL 1 FROM HOST to PC COM DB 9 RS40 RS 232 Null Modem Cable 1 83 m 6 ft SERIAL 1 FROM HOST to PC COM DB 25 TC100 Test Instrument Cart Y5537 24 in
182. 1 TC simulation has an output impedance of 10 1 2 Two channels of dc voltage output are provided 3 TC simulating and measuring are not specified for operation in electromagnetic fields above 0 4 V m Noise Bandwidth 0 1 Hz to 10 Hz p p t ppm output floor Bandwidth 10 Hz to 10 kHz rms 0 to 329 9999 mV 0 1 UV 6uV 0 to 32 99999 V 600 uV 30 to 329 9999 V 20 mV 100 to 1000 000 V 20 mV Auxiliary Output dual output mode only 1 0 to 329 999 mV 0 LB UV 20 uV 0 33 V to 3 29 999 V 0 20 uV 200 uV 3 3 V to 7 V 0 100 uV 1000 uV 1 Two channels of dc voltage output are provided Range 5520A Operators Manual 1 15 DC Current Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 ppm of output uA Max a Max Compliance Inductive Voltage Load 90 days 1 year Resolution ish 0 to 329 999 mA 120 0 02 150 0 02 4 10 0 to 3 29999 mA 80 0 05 100 0 05 0 01 mA 10 0 to 32 9999 mA 80 0 25 100 0 25 0 1 mA 7 0 to 329 999 mA 802 5 100 25 7 400 0 to 1 09999 A 160 40 200 40 10 6 1 1 to 2 99999 A 300 40 40 10mA 6 0 to 10 9999 20 A Range 380 500 500 500 100 mA 4 11to205A 1 800 750 2 1000 4 750 2 100 4 1 Duty Cycle Currents lt 11 A may be provided continuously For currents gt 11 A
183. 1 V 2 V same freq OUT 10 MV 20 MV 60 HZ dual volts 01 02 V 60 Hz Each example shows a value and unit e g 15 2 V If a value is entered without a unit the value of the existing output is changed when logically allowed OUT IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Output query Returns the output amplitudes and frequency of the Calibrator Multipliers e g K or M are not used in the response Parameters V optional for ac voltage and TC modes DBM optional for ac voltage modes CEL optional for RTD and TC modes Celsius FAR optional for RTD and TC modes Fahrenheit OHM optional for RTD modes ohms Response primary amplitude value gt lt primary units secondary amplitude value gt lt secondary units fundamental frequency value LH OUT returns 1 5200001 OUT returns 1 88300 01 0 00 0 4 420 02 OUT returns 1 23000E 00 V 2 34000E 00 V 6 000E 01 OUT returns 1 92400E 06 OHM 0E 00 0 0 00E 00 OUT returns 1 52000E 01 V 1 88300E 01 A 4 420E 02 O O O O O Examples 401 V 0E400 0 0 00E400 UT DBM returns 2 586E1401 DBM 0E 00 A 4 420E 02 UT returns 1 0430E 02 CEL 0 00 0 0 00 00 UT FAR returns 2 19740000H 02 FAR 0E 00 0 0 00EH 00 UT V returns 4 2740E 03 V 0E 00 0 0 00E 00 UT OHM returns 1 40135 02 OHM 0E 00 0
184. 10 output output ERLD 5520A SC600 Option 8 Hemote Commands and Queries TRIG IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the output setting of the oscilloscope s trigger Parameters None Response character Returns OFF DIV1 DIV10 or DIV100 OUT IMP IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance Parameters 2750 Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance to 500 21 Programs the oscilloscope s output impedance to 1 MQ Example OUT IMP 250 OUT IMP IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the impedance setting of the oscilloscope s output Parameters None RANGE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Programs the instrument range in PULSE MEAS Z OVERLD modes Parameters Pulse TPODB TP8DB TP2ODB TP28DB TP4ODB TP48DB Range 25 1 0 V 250 mV 100 mV 25 10 Impedance T2500HM TZ1MOHM TZCAP Measure Range res 500 res IMQ cap Overload TOLDC TOLAC Range DC AC Example RANGE TP20DB 8 37 5520A Operators Manual 8 51 Edge Function Commands TDPULSE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Turns tunnel diode pulse drive on off in EDGE mode Parameters ON or non zero or OFF or zero Example TDPULSE ON Returns the tunnel diode pulse drive setting in EDGE mode Parameters None Response 1 i
185. 10 kHz EE 0 25 mV Sine 10 kHz ERE 0 70 mV Sine 10 kHz mE 2 77 mV Sine 10 kHz mE 6 67 mV Sine 10 kHz 26 80 mV Sine 10 kHz mE 195 10 mV Sine m Triangle 10 kHz EE 0 25 mV Triangle 10 kHz 0 70 mV Triangle 10 kHz 2 77 mV Triangle 10 kHz mE 6 67 mV Triangle 10 kHz 26 80 Triangle 10 kHz mE 195 10 mV Triangle 10 kHz HE 1 65 V 5520A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 8 118 Wave Generator Function Verification 50 0 Load Nominal Measured Value Deviation 1 Year Waveform Value p p Frequency p p mV Spec mV Square 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 25 mV Square 10 9 mV 10 kHz EB 0 43 mV Square 44 9 mV 10 kHz L 1 45 mV Square 109 0 mV 10 kHz E 3 37 mV Square 449 0 mV 10 kHz MEE 13 57 mV Square 1 1V 10 kHz 32 50 mV 2 2 V 10 kHz 23353 66 10 mV Sine 5 0 mV 10 kHz povoj 0 25 mV Sine 10 9 mV 10 kHz m 0 43 mV Sine 44 9 mV 10 kHz 1 45 Sine 109 0 mV 10 kHz 3 37 mV Sine 449 0 mV 10 kHz Po 13 57 mV Sine 1 1 V 10 kHz IEEE 32 50 mV Sine 2 2V 10 kHz pov 66 10 mV Triangle 5 0 mV 10 kHz ii 0 25 mV Triangle 10 9 mV 10 kHz 71 0 43 Triangle 44 9 mV 10 kHz 1 45 mV Triangle 109 0 mV 10 kHz ine 3 37 mV Triangle 449 0 mV 10 kHz 1 13 57 Triangle 1 1V 10 kHz ERN 32 50 mV Triangle 2 2V 10 kHz 1 66 10 mV 8 119 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Amplitude Measured Value Deviation 1 Year Spec Nominal Value p p Frequency p p
186. 12 0 16 0 to 250 0 47 0 47 650 to 1000 0 16 0 21 S 250to 1000 0 30 0 36 210t0 100 020 o27 1000 to 1400 0 28 0 37 10000 30 012 ose 1400 to 1767 0 34 0 46 30 to 150 0 10 0 14 250 to 150 0 48 0 63 150 to 760 0 13 0 17 T 150t00 0 18 0 24 760101200 odg 023 oto 120 0 12 0 16 200to 100 025 0 33 120 to 400 0 10 0 14 100 to 25 0 14 0 18 u 200100 0 56 0 56 25 to 120 0 12 0 16 0 to 600 0 27 0 27 120 to 1000 0 19 o26 100000 1372 030 oso Introduction and Specifications Specifications 1 1 21 Temperature Calibration RTD Specifications 1 2 3 Absolute Uncertainty Range 5 C t C 2 1 200 to 80 80 to 0 0 to 100 100 to 260 260 to 300 300 to 400 400 to 600 600 to 630 200 to 80 80 to 0 0 to 100 100 to 260 260 to 300 300 to 400 400 to 600 Resolution is 0 003 C Applies for COMP OFF to the 5520A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals and 2 wire and 4 wire compensation Based on MINCO Application Aid No 18 Absolute Uncertainty Range 5 C C 2 RTD Type 1 90 days Type 200 0 80 004 80 to 0 0 05 Pisos 010100 0 07 10010300 0 08 R 30010400 0 09 40010630 0 10 63010800 021 200 to 80 0 04 80 to 0 0 05 07 TIR TENE 1000 30010400 0 09 Pt 385 40
187. 13 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 Appendices E Error Messages DDE FR D Encoder unexpectedly reset DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE FR DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE NO a ae a ee zz IZ IX IX IX IX ee ae ee Internal state error Invalid keyword or choice Harmonic must be 1 50 Frequency must be gt 0 AC magnitude must be gt 0 Impedance must be gt 0 Function not available Value not available Cannot enter watts by itself Output exceeds user limits Duty cycle must be 1 0 99 0 Power factor must be 0 0 1 0 Cant select that field now Edit digit out of range Cant switch edit field now Not editing output now dBm only for single sine ACV Freq too high for non sine Value outside locked range Must specify an output unit Can do two freqs at once source 3 values at once Temp must be degrees C or F Cant do that now Limit too small or large No changes except RESET now Offset out of range Cannot edit to or from 0 Hz Bad state image n
188. 15 5 400 0 05 4 5 33 mA to 10 Hz to 100 Hz 0 07 40 0 08 40 0 15 50 329 99 mA 100 Hz to 1 kHz 0 18 100 0 2 100 0 05 50 3 A to 20 5 A 10 Hz to 100 Hz 1 100 Hz to 1 kHz 0 8 5000 3 1 0 5000 3 0 5 0 temperature is about 23 C and l is the output current in amperes For example 17 A at 23 C could be provided for 60 17 23 20 minutes each hour 3 For currents gt 11 A Floor specification is 1000 within 30 seconds of selecting operate For operating times gt 30 seconds the floor specification is 5000 LA 4 Subject to compliance voltages limits Resolution Max Compliance Voltage Range V rms 0 029 mA to 0 32999 mA 0 01 7 0 33 mA to 3 29999 mA 0 01 7 3 3 mA to 32 9999 mA 0 1 5 33 mA to 329 999 mA 1 5 0 33 A to 2 99999 A 10 4 3 A to 20 5 A 100 3 1 Subject to specification adder for compliance voltages greater than 1 V rms Introduction and Specifications Specifications 1 1 19 Capacitance Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C Allowed Frequency or t 96 of output floor Charge Discharge Rate Typical Min and Max Typical Max Max for Res to Meet for 196 Range 90 days 1 year olution Specification 0 596 Error Error 0 19 nF to 0 38 0 01 nF 0 5 0 01 nF 0 1 pF 10 Hz to 10 kHz 20 kHz 40 kHz 0 3999 nF 0 4 nF to 0 38 0 01 nF 0 5 0 01 nF 0 1 pF 10 Hz to 10
189. 21 50 21__ 197 213 35 65 20 0 9 30 9 191 209 21 39 20 0 31 60 31 181 219 40 80 Calibrating a Fluke 51 Thermometer The Fluke 51 Thermometer measures temperature using a type J or K thermocouple The calibrator simulates both thermocouples simplifying testing and calibration The following demonstrates how the calibrator is used to calibrate this thermometer Note These procedures are included here as an example The Model 51 Service Manual contains the authoritative testing and calibration procedures 4 71 5520A Operators Manual 4 67 Testing the Thermometer The following test should be conducted only after the thermometer has had time to stabilize to an ambient temperature of 23 C 5 73 F 9 F 1 Connect the Fluke 51 Thermometer to the calibrator using the appropriate connection cable Figure 4 22 The connection cable and miniconnector material must match the thermocouple type For example if testing a K thermocouple the cable and miniconnector are for a type K thermocouple FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX SCOPE 0 5 AUX V OUT V A EN N DM vera as LO RMS 1 MAX MAX Connection wiring must match thermocouple type e g K J etc nn049f eps Figure 4 22 Cable Connections for Testing a 50 Series Thermometer 2 Verify that the EARTH indicator i
190. 28 57 uA 329 43 uA 329 99 pA 329 00 5 kHz 328 03 uA 329 97 uA 329 99 uA 329 00 uA 10 kHz 326 83 LA 331 17 uA 329 99 329 00 30 kHz 324 65 333 35 pA 3 2999 mA 0 3300 mA 1 kHz 0 3296 mA 0 3304 mA 3 2999 mA 0 3300 mA 5 kHz 0 3293 mA 0 3307 mA 3 2999 mA 0 3300 mA 30 kHz 0 3268 mA 0 3332 mA 3 2999 mA 1 9000 mA 1 kHz 1 8983 mA 1 9017 mA 3 2999 mA 1 9000 mA 10 kHz 1 8921 mA 1 9079 mA 3 2999 mA 1 9000 mA 30 kHz 1 8842 mA 1 9158 mA 3 2999 mA 3 2900 mA 10 Hz 3 2846 mA 3 2954 mA 3 2999 mA 3 2900 mA 45 Hz 3 2872 mA 3 2928 mA 3 2999 mA 3 2900 mA 1 kHz 3 2872 mA 3 2928 mA 3 2999 mA 3 2900 mA 5 kHz 3 2845 mA 3 2955 mA 3 2999 mA 3 2900 mA 10 kHz 3 2765 mA 3 3035 mA 3 2999 mA 3 2900 mA 30 kHz 3 2631 mA 3 3169 mA 32 999 mA 3 3000 mA 1 kHz 3 297 mA 3 303 mA 32 999 mA 3 3000 mA 5 kHz 3 296 mA 3 304 mA 32 999 mA 3 3000 mA 30 kHz 3 285 mA 3 315 mA 32 999 mA 19 0000 mA 1 kHz 18 991 mA 19 009 mA 32 999 mA 19 0000 mA 10 kHz 18 967 mA 19 033 mA 7 15 5520A Operators Manual 7 16 Table 7 8 Verification Tests for AC Current cont Range 32 999 mA 32 999 mA 32 999 mA 32 999 mA 32 999 mA 32 999 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 329 99 mA 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A 2 99999 A Output 19 0000 mA 32 9000 mA 32 9000 mA 32 9000 mA 32
191. 3 STB remote command 6 45 air filter cleanin g 7 5 TEMP STD remote command arrow kose TRG remote command 6 50 AUX terminals TRG remote command SC600 option cable connection instructions 4 12 3 10 5 31 TST remote command 6 52 CALIBRATION switch W AI command using 5 47 capacitance WAI remote command 6 55 compensation off connections 4 15 key 3 8 two wire compensation connections 10 MHz IN BNC connector setting the output 10 MHz IN BNC connector using 4 58 specifications 10 MHz OUT BNC connector 3 10 10 MHz OUT BNC connector using 20A terminal 3 9 Caution 4 73 7 6 CAUTION 2 478 4 29 4 32 4 34 7 5 6 4 6 4 19 4 2044 26 3 phase power calibration CE Key 80 Series DMM calibrating CFREQ remote command 6 10 ac current character processing incoming non sine wave specifications 1 32 CHASSIS GROUND terminal sine wave extended bandwidth cleaning general 7 6 specifications CLOCK remote command 6 10 connections 4 16 clock external 10 MHz 4 58 setting the output CLOCK remote command 6 11 square wave characteristics typical 1 34 commands remote 5520A Operators Manual setup and utility 6 8 status 6 9 thermocouple TC 6 9 commands remote pressure measurement 6 7 common common compound groupe
192. 3 3 V to 1000 V 33 mA to 20 5 A 100 mV to 5 V Oto 1 500 Hz to 1 kHz 330 mV to 1000 V 33 mA to 20 5A 100 mV to 5 V 1 1 kHz to 5 kHz 3 3 V to 1000 V 1 33 mA to 2 99999 A 100 mV to 5 V 1 5 kHz to 10 kHz 3 3 V to 1000 V 2 33 mA to 329 99 mA 1 Vto 5 V 2 1 Notes 1 In dual voltage output mode voltage is limited to 3 3 V to 500 V in the NORMAL output 2 dual voltage output mode voltage is limited to 3 3 V to 250 V in the NORMAL output e range of voltages and currents shown in DC Voltage Specifications AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications and AC Current Sine Wave Specifications are available in the power and dual output modes except minimum current for ac power is 0 33 mA However only those limits shown in this table are specified See Calculating Power Uncertainty to determine the uncertainty at these points e The phase adjustment range for dual ac outputs is 0 to 179 99 The phase resolution for dual ac outputs is 0 01 DC Current Specifications 1 23 5520A Operators Manual 1 25 Phase Specifications 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C A 9 10 Hz to 65 Hz to 500 Hz to 1 kHz to 5 kHz to 10 kHz to 65 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 0 10 0 25 0 59 2 59 5 10 Phase Phase Power Uncertainty Adder due to Phase Error 10 Hz to 65 Hzto 500Hzto 1kHzto 5kHzto 10 kHz to Watts V
193. 32 9838 MQ 33 0162 MQ 109 9999 MQ 109 0000 MQ 108 9534 MQ 109 0466 MQ 329 9999 MQ 119 0000 MQ 118 6025 MQ 119 3975 MQ 329 9999 MQ 290 0000 MQ 289 1750 MQ 290 8250 MQ 1100 000 MQ 400 000 MQ 394 700 MQ 405 300 MQ 1100 000 MQ 640 000 MQ 631 820 MQ 648 180 MQ 1100 000 MQ 1090 000 MQ 1076 420 MQ 1103 580 MQ 5520A Operators Manual 7 12 Table 7 6 Verification Tests for AC Voltage Normal Range Output Frequency Lower Limit Upper Limit 32 999 mV 3 000 mV 45 Hz 2 994 mV 3 006 mV 32 999 mV 3 000 mV 10 kHz 2 994 mV 3 006 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 9 5 Hz 28 335 mV 31 665 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 10Hz 29 976 mV 30 024 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 45 Hz 29 990 mV 30 010 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 1 kHz 29 990 mV 30 010 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 10 kHz 29 990 mV 30 010 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 20 kHz 29 989 mV 30 011 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 50 kHz 29 970 mV 30 030 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 100 kHz 29 898 mV 30 102 mV 32 999 mV 30 000 mV 450 kHz 29 770 mV 30 230 mV 329 999 mV 33 000 mV 45 Hz 32 987 mV 33 013 mV 329 999 mV 33 000 mV 10 kHz 32 987 mV 33 013 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 9 5 Hz 283 350 mV 316 650 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 10 Hz 299 917 mV 300 083 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 45 Hz 299 950 mV 300 050 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 1 kHz 299 950 mV 300 050 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 10 kHz 299 950 mV 300 050 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 20 kHz 299 947 mV 300 053 mV 329 999 mV 3
194. 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Format command Use with extreme care Restores the contents of the nonvolatile memory device to factory defaults The memory holds calibration constants and setup parameters You lose all calibration data permanently The CALIBRATION switch on the rear panel of the Calibrator must be set in the ENABLE position or an execution error occurs except for FORMAT 51 Parameter Example ALL CAL FORMAT SETUP ETUP replaces the whole contents with factory defaults replaces all cal constants with factory defaults ETUP replaces setup parameters with factory defaults Replace the setup parameters with the default setup values below The FORMAT ALL command is the same as FORMAT CAL and then FORMAT SETUP The FORMAT SETUP command also clears the PUD string see the PUD command and SRQSTR is set to SRQ 02x 9602x 04x 9604x see the SROSTR command and SPLSTR is set to SPL 02x 9602x 04x 04x see the SPLSTR command Temperature Standard Host Connection its 90 Display Contrast level 7 7 gpib IEEE 488 Display Brightness level 1 0 Features GPIB Port Address 4 RTD Power Up pt385 Default Type Serial Ports 8 bits 1 stop bit xon xoff parity Thermocouple Power K none 9600 baud Up Default Type EOL end of line CRLF Current Limits 20 5A EOF end of file 012 000 Vol
195. 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Pressure Measurement mode command Changes the operating mode to pressure measurement Parameter Optional Pressure units Example PRES MEAS PSI Displays the previously selected units if no parameter is supplied PRES UNIT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Seguential X Overlapped Coupled Pressure Units command Sets the pressure display units Parameters PSI pound force per sguare inch MHG meters of mercury INHG inches of mercury INH2O inches of water FTH2O feet of water H20 meters of water BAR bar PAL Pascal G CM2 grams per centimeter squared INH2060F Inches of water 60 degrees Farhenheit Once set the Calibrator retains the pressure units until power off or reset Example PRES_UNIT PRES_UNI T BAR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Pressure Units query Returns the pressure display units Responses Example character PSI character MHG character I NHG character INH2O character 20 character 20 character BAR character PAL character G CM2 character INH2060F PRI ES UNIT returns pound force per square inch meters of mercury inches of mercury inches of water feet of water meters of water bar Pascal grams per centimeter squared Inch
196. 5 50 uA 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 035 20 0 04 20 0 05 0 02 50 uA 1kHzto5kHz 0 08 50 0 10450 1 5 0 03 50 uA 5 kHz to 10 kHz 0 16 100 0 2 100 1 5 0 1 50 uA je kHz to 30 0 32 200 0 4 200 10 0 6 50 pA 2 0 33 10 Hzto 45 Hz 0 15 100 0 18 100 0 2 500 pA 2 5 1 09999 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 036 100 10 05 100 0 07 500 pA 1kHzto5kHz 0 5 1000 0 6 1000 3 1 4500uA 5 kHzto 10 kHz 2 0 5000 2 5 5000 4 2 4500 uA 11Ato 10 Hzto 45 Hz 015 100 018 100 0 2 500 pA 2 5 2 99999 A 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 05 100 10 06 100 0 07 500 pA 1kHzto5kHz 0 5 1000 0 6 1000 3 1 4500uA 5 kHz to 10 kHz 2 0 5000 2 5 5000 4 2 4500 uA 45 Hz to 100 Hz 0 05 2000 0 06 2000 0 2 3 mA 1 10 9999 A kHz to 1 0 08 2000 0 10 2000 0 1 3 mA 2 1 kHz to 5 kHz 2 542000 13 0 2000 0 8 3 mA 11A to 45 Hz to 100 Hz 0 1 45000 0 12 5000 02 3mA 1 20 5 A 100 Hz to 1 kHz 0 13 5000 0 15 5000 0 1 3 mA 2 1kHzto5kHz 2 5 45000 3 0 5000 0 8 3 mA 1 Max Distortion for 100 kHz to 200 kHz For 200 kHz to 500 kHz the maximum distortion is 0 996 of output floor as shown 2 Duty Cycle Currents 11 A may be provided continuously For currents gt 11 A see Figure 1 4 The current may be provided 60 T I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in C room is about 23 1 is the output current in Amps For example 17 A
197. 50 0 mV 0 72 250 0 mV 0 72 550 0 mV 1 47 550 0 mV 1 47 700 0 mV 1 85 700 0 mV 1 85 2 2V 5 60 2 2V 5 60 8 88 5520A SC300 Option Verification Tables 8 8 115 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 1 Load Nominal Value dc 0 0 mV 5 0 mV 5 0 mV 22 0 mV 22 0 mV 25 0 mV 25 0 mV 45 0 mV 45 0 mV 50 0 mV 50 0 mV 220 0 mV 220 0 mV 250 0 mV 250 0 mV 450 0 mV 450 0 mV 500 0 mV 500 0 mV 3 3V 3 3 4 0 V 4 0 V 33 0 V 33 0 V Measured Value dc Deviation mV 1 Year Spec mV 0 10 0 11 0 11 0 15 0 15 0 16 0 16 0 21 0 21 0 23 0 23 0 65 0 65 0 72 0 72 1 22 1 22 1 35 1 35 8 35 8 35 10 10 10 10 82 60 82 60 8 89 5520A Operators Manual 8 90 8 116 Edge Function Verification uve Pulse Response Time 1 Year Spec Nominal Value p p Frequency ns ps 25 0 mV 1 MHz 400 250 0 mV 1MHz 400 250 0 mV 10 kHz 400 250 0 mV 100 kHz 400 250 0 mV 1MHz 400 2 5V 1 MHz 400 8 117 Wave Generator Function Verification 1 MQ Load Nominal Measured Value Deviation 1 Year Waveform Value p p Frequency p p mV Spec mV Square 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 25 mV Square 10 kHz mE 0 70 mV Square 10 kHz mE 2 77 mV Square 10 kHz EE 6 67 mV Square 10 kHz 26 80 Square 10 kHz mE 195 10 mV Square 10 kHz mE 1 65 V Sine
198. 5520A via the LO s softkey selection tied For optimum phase performance tie the LO terminals at the UUT At current levels gt 2 2 A tie the terminals at the UUT using heavy gauge wire 10 mQ resistance The calibrator produces an ac power output by sourcing an ac voltage on the NORMAL outputs and an ac current on the AUX outputs Front Panel Operation Setting the Output 4 See Setting AC Voltage Output above for information on selecting an ac voltage output in dBm this procedure assumes an ac voltage output in volts Complete the following procedure to set an ac power output If you make an entry error press one or more times to clear the display then reenter the value 10 11 12 A Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the interconnecting wiring Press to clear any output from the 5520A Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Adapt the voltage and current connections to suit your application Set the UUT to measure ac power on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output maximum six numeric keys For example 123 456 Note At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above nominal you may notice a slight high pitched sound This is normal Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y
199. 61 cm Rack Mount Kit for 5520A Y8021 Shielded IEEE 488 Cable 0 5 m 1 64 ft Y8022 Shielded IEEE 488 Cable 2 m 6 56 ft Y8023 Shielded IEEE 488 Cable 4 m 13 ft 9 3 5520A Operators Manual 9 4 9 2 Rack Mount Kit The Y5537 rack mount kit provides all the hardware necessary to mount the 5520A on slides in a 24 inch 61 cm equipment rack Instructions are provided in the kit To rack mount the 5725A Amplifier order kit Y5735 IEEE 488 Interface Cables Shielded IEEE 488 cables are available in three lengths See Table 9 1 The cables attach to the 5520A to any other IEEE 488 device Each cable has double 24 pin connectors at both ends to allow stacking Metric threaded mounting screws are provided with each connector Appendix D shows the pinout for the IEEE 488 connector RS 232 Null Modem Cables The PM8914 001 and RS40 null modem cables connect the 5520A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port to a printer video display terminal computer or other serial device configured as DTE Data Terminal Equipment Appendix D shows the pinouts for the serial connectors RS 232 Modem Cables The modem cable PN 943738 connects the 5520A SERIAL 2 TO UUT port to a unit under test serial port with DB 9 male connector Appendix D shows the pinouts for the serial connectors 5500A LEADS The optional test lead kit 5500A LEADS is a kit of test leads for voltage and current thermocouple extension wires thermocouple miniconnectors
200. 8 mV to 55 V p p 1 8 mV to 2 2 V p p 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 10 Hz to 10 kHz 3 of p p output 100 uV Sequence Typical dc Offset Range 1 2 5 e g 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV 0 to 24096 of p p amplitude 1 Frequency Range 10 Hz to 100 kHz Resolution 4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 1 The DC offset plus the wave signal must not 25 ppm 15 mHz exceed 30 V rms 8 63 5520A Operators Manual 8 64 6 83 Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function Time Marker Period Division Ratio 1 50 p p Typical Rise Time 510 1s off 1 21V lt 2ns 0 5 to 0 1s off 1 10 21V lt 2 ns 50 ms to 100 ns ofi 1 10 100 21V lt 2 ns 50 to 10 ns ofi 10 100 21V lt 2 ns 5to 2 ns off 100 21V lt 2ns 0 2 Hz 5s period or higher than 10 MHz 1 Divider is internally limited to prevent trigger output from frequencies that are either lower than Edge Signal Frequency Division Ratio 1 kHz to 1 MHz off 1 8 84 Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function Amplitude into 50 Q gt 1 Typical Rise Time lt 2ns 5520A SC300 Option 8 Oscilloscope Connections 8 85 Oscilloscope Connections Using the cable supplied with the Oscilloscope Calibration Option attach the SCOPE connector on the 5520A to one of the channel connect
201. 88 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Options command Returns a list of the installed hardware and software options Responses lt option string gt lt option string gt options list separated by commas 0 no options are installed Example OPT returns SC600 Returns SC600 when the Oscilloscope Calibration Option is installed Remote Commands Commands 6 OUT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped X Coupled Output command Sets the output of the Calibrator and establishes a new reference point for the error mode If only one amplitude is supplied the Calibrator sources a single output If two amplitudes are supplied the Calibrator sources two outputs The second amplitude will be sourced at the AUX terminals for dual voltage outputs If the frequency is not supplied the Calibrator will use the frequency that is presently in use To source or measure a temperature select the desired sensor and sensor parameters first See the TSENS TYPE RTD_ and TC_ commands To source a signal using the Calibrator scope options refer to the SCOPE command in Chapter 8 If you change the frequency of an ac function and the harmonic output is not explicitly set at the same time with the HARMON C command the harmonic will be set to 1 Use multipliers e g k M with the OUT command as desired Parameters
202. 9 120 MHz 0 00208 0 099 290 MHz 0 00208 0 099 360 MHz 0 00406 0 099 390 MHz 0 00406 0 099 400 MHz 0 00406 0 099 480 MHz 0 00406 0 099 570 MHz 0 00406 0 099 580 MHz 0 00406 0 099 590 MHz 0 00406 0 099 600 MHz 0 00406 0 1 50 kHz na na 0 1 30 MHz 0 0016 0 1 70 MHz 0 0016 94 120 MHz 0 0021 8 49 5520A Operators Manual 8 50 Table 8 24 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Frequency Value V p p 01 290 MHz 0 0021 0 1 360 MHz 0 0041 0 1 390 MHz 0 0041 0 1 400 MHz 0 0041 01 480 MHz 0 0041 01 570 MHz 0 0041 0 1 580 MHz 0 0041 0 1 590 MHz 0 0041 0 1 600 MHz 0 0041 0 25 50 kHz na na 0 25 30 MHz 0 00385 0 25 70 MHz 0 00385 0 25 120 MHz 0 0051 0 25 290 MHz 0 0051 0 25 360 MHz 0 0101 0 25 390 MHz 0 0101 0 25 400 MHz 0 0101 0 25 480 MHz 0 0101 0 25 570 MHz 0 0101 0 25 580 MHz 0 0101 0 25 590 MHz 0 0101 0 25 600 MHz 0 0101 0 399 50 kHz na na 0 399 30 MHz 0 006085 0 399 70 MHz 0 006085 0 399 120 MHz 0 00808 0 399 290 MHz 0 008
203. 90 32 9999 V 3 3000 V 65 Hz 2 99999 A 2 00000 A 90 89 90 32 9999 V 3 3000 V 65 Hz 20 5000 A 20 0000 A 90 89 90 32 9999 V 3 3000 V 400 Hz 20 5000 A 20 0000 A 90 89 75 329 999 V 33 000 V 65 Hz 329 99 mA 300 00 mA 0 0 10 329 999 V 33 000 V 65 Hz 2 99999 A 2 00000 A 0 0 10 329 999 V 33 000 V 65 Hz 20 5000 A 5 0000 A 0 0 10 329 999 V 33 000 V 400 Hz 20 5000 A 5 0000 A 0 0 25 329 999 V 33 000 V 65 Hz 329 99 mA 300 00 mA 90 89 90 329 999 V 33 000 V 65 Hz 2 99999 A 2 00000 A 90 89 90 329 999 V 33 000 V 65 Hz 20 5000 A 20 0000 A 90 89 90 329 999 V 33 000 V 400 Hz 20 5000 A 20 0000 A 90 89 75 7 21 5520A Operators Manual 7 22 Table 7 14 Verification Tests for Frequency Range Normal Output Lower Limit Upper Limit Output V Normal V Frequency Note Note 3 29999 3 00000 119 00 Hz 118 99970 Hz 119 00030Hz 120 0 Hz 119 99970 Hz 120 00031 Hz 1000 0 Hz 999 9975 Hz 1000 0025 Hz 100 00 kHz 99 999 75 Hz 100 000 25 Hz Note Frequency accuracy is specified for 1 year Chapter 8 Oscilloscope Calibration Options e Option SC600 see page 8 3 e Option SC300 see page 8 57 8 1 5520A Operators Manual 8 2 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 8 21
204. A Operators Manual FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR FLUKE 87 ees skus dol GROUNDED MAJA COM VO OOB Axa PEUX 4 7 TG aov PK max 5520 nn042f eps Figure 4 4 UUT Connection Resistance Compensation Off 4 14 Front Panel Operation 4 Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR m Gum amp GD GB 2o 02 VO AN 2v PAX peun AN nn044f eps Figure 4 5 UUT Connection Capacitance Two Wire Compensation FLOKE 55204 CALIBRATOR FLUKE 87 MULTIMETER gt Be MAL SCOPE ua o N AN 20v PK MAX TG 20vPK Max AN nnO45f eps Figure 4 6 UUT Connection Capacitance Compensation Off 5520A Operators Manual FLUKE 87 TUE RMS MULTIMETER FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR av PK MAX TG aw PK wax FLUKE 87 c Figure 4 7 UUT Connection DC Voltage AC Voltage Figure 4 8 UUT Connection DC Current AC Current A FLUKE 55204 CALIBRATOR nn046f eps ZA zov PK TC 20 PkMAX N nn047f eps Front Panel Operation 4 RMS Versus p p Amplitude FLOKE 55204 CALIBRATOR CHART RECORDER INPUT LOKE sszacaUuEmaTOR nn048f eps FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR
205. A Operators Manual AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications cont AUX Auxiliary Output dual output mode only 1 Absolute Uncertainty Max Distortion tcal t 5 C and Noise t of output uV 10 Hz to 100 kHz Bandwidth Res Max output Range Frequency olution Burden floor 10 Hz to 20 Hz 0 15 370 0 2 370 20 Hz to 45 Hz 0 08 370 0 1 370 329 999 mV 45 Hz to 1 kHz 1 kHz to 5 kHz 0 15 450 0 2 450 5 kHz to 10 kHz 0 3 450 0 4 450 10 kHz to 30 kHz 4 0 900 5 0 900 10 Hz to 20 Hz 0 454450 0 2 4450 0 33 V to 20 Hz to 45 Hz 0 084450 0 1 450 3 29999 V 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 07 450 0 09 450 10 5 mA 1 kHz to 5 kHz 0 15 1400 0 2 1400 5 kHz to 10 kHz 0 3 1400 0 4 1400 10 kHz to 30 kHz 4 0 2800 5 0 2800 10 Hz to 20 Hz 0 15450 0 2 450 20 Hz to 45 Hz 0 08 450 0 1 450 3 3Vto5V 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 07 450 0 09 450 100 W SmA 1 kHz to 5 kHz 0 15 1400 0 2 1400 5 kHz to 10 kHz 0 3 1400 0 4 1400 1 There are two channels of voltage output The maximum frequency of the dual output is 30 kHz Note e Remote sensing is not provided Output resistance is lt 5 for outputs 20 33 V The AUX output resistance is 1Q The maximum load capacitance is 500 pF subject to the maximum burden current limits Introduction and Specifications Specifications 1 18 AC Current Sine Wave Specifications
206. A Calibrator off after warm up and then on again allow a warm up period of at least twice the length of time it was turned off maximum of 30 minutes For example if the calibrator is turned off for 10 minutes and then on again allow a warm up period of at least 20 minutes Using the Softkeys The five keys just to the right of the Previous Menu key are called softkeys Softkey key functions are based on the label that appears directly above the key in the Control Display Pressing a softkey either changes a value or causes a submenu with new selections to appear on the Control Display Softkey menus are arranged in varying levels as described in Softkey Menu Tree in Chapter 3 You can move backwards to previous menu selections by repeatedly pressing Although pressing R will also return you to the top level menu it will also reset all volatile settings and return the 5520A Calibrator to 0 V dc in the standby mode Use the key as your main navigating tool for moving around the menu levels Using the Setup Menu Press the front panel key for access to various operations and changeable parameters Most parameters are nonvolatile meaning they will be saved during reset or when power is turned off Chapter 3 shows a map of the menu tree lists the parameters and has a table of factory default settings When you press from the power up state the display changes as follows CAL SHOW IHSTMT UTILITY SPEC SETUP FUNCTHS
207. AC Voltage into a 50 2 Load 1 Year Spec Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p mV mV 5 0 mV 10 Hz 0 11 5 0 mV 100 Hz 0 11 5 0 mV 1 kHz 0 11 5 0 mV 5 kHz 0 11 5 0 mV 10 kHz 0 11 10 0 mV 100 Hz 0 12 10 0 mV 1 kHz 0 12 10 0 mV 10 kHz 0 12 20 0 mV 10 kHz 0 15 44 9 mV 10 Hz 0 21 44 9 mV 10 kHz 0 21 50 0 mV 10 kHz 0 23 100 0 mV 100 Hz 0 35 100 0 mV 1 kHz 0 35 100 0 mV 10 kHz 0 35 200 0 mV 10 kHz 0 60 449 0 mV 10 Hz 1 22 449 0 mV 10 kHz 1 22 500 0 mV 10 kHz 1 35 1 0V 100 Hz 2 60 1 0V 1 kHz 2 60 1 0V 10 kHz 2 60 2 0 V 10 Hz 5 10 5520A Operators Manual Voltage Function Verification AC Voltage into a 50 2 Load cont Deviation 1 Year Spec Nominal Value p p Frequency Measured Value p p mV mV 20 100 2 5 10 20 1 2 5 10 20 5 2 5 10 20 10 2 5 10 8 114 Voltage Function Verification DC Voltage into a 50 0 Load Nominal Value 1 Year Spec dc Measured Value dc Deviation mV mV 0 0 mV 0 10 5 0 mV 0 11 5 0 mV 0 11 10 0 mV 0 12 10 0 mV 0 12 22 0 mV 0 15 22 0 mV 0 15 25 0 mV 0 16 25 0 mV 0 16 55 0 mV 0 24 55 0 mV 0 24 100 0 mV 0 35 100 0 mV 0 35 220 0 mV 0 65 220 0 mV 0 65 2
208. AL SCOPE 10s DC 4 a A A DC volt AC edge levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld MODE overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the OVERLD menu is described below OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the output signal UUTTRIP Indicates test results NO appears if the overload protection did not trip within the selected time limit A value in seconds appears e g 4 1s if the overload protection has tripped within the time limit T LIMIT indicates the selected time limit for application of the output value Press this softkey to key in or edit a different time limit 1s to 60s allowed OUT VAL Indicates the output voltage type You can select DC or AC and a value ranging from 5 V to 9 V shown in Output Display Key in or edit this value MODE Indicates you are in OVERLD Overload mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes 8 33 5520A Operators Manual Default overload settings are 5 000 V and DC At any time you can also set the overload time limit with the following command sequence INSTMT OTHER SETUP SETUP TLIMDEF SETUP vy Choose 1s to 60s Perform the following procedure to test the overload protection of an oscilloscope 1 Connect the c
209. ARs PF 65 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 0 90 1 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 10 0 38 1 52 10 80 0 985 0 03 0 08 0 16 0 86 1 92 4 58 20 70 0 940 0 06 0 16 0 32 1 68 3 55 7 84 30 60 0 866 0 10 0 25 0 51 2 61 5 41 11 54 40 50 0 766 0 15 0 37 0 74 3 76 7 69 16 09 50 40 0 643 0 21 0 52 1 04 5 29 10 77 22 21 60 30 0 500 0 30 0 76 1 52 7 65 15 48 31 60 70 20 0 342 0 48 1 20 2 40 12 08 24 33 49 23 80 10 0 174 0 9996 2 4896 4 95 24 83 49 81 100 0096 90 0 0000 Note 1 To calculate exact ac watts power adders due to phase uncertainty for values not Cos Cos for a PF of 9205 23 and a phase uncertainty of 0 15 the ac watts power Cos 23 15 adder is Adder 100 1 011 Cos 23 shown use the following formula Adder 100 1 For example 1 24 Introduction and Specifications 1 Specifications 1 26 Calculating Power Uncertainty Overall uncertainty for power output in watts or VARs is based on the root sum square rss of the individual uncertainties in percent for the selected voltage current and power factor parameters Watts uncertainty U power AUD U unt U pradder VARs uncertainty Uvars AU sage m U varsadder Because there are an infinite number of combinations
210. Bad syntax Unknown command Bad parameter count Bad keyword Bad parameter type Bad parameter unit Bad parameter value 488 2 I O deadlock 488 2 interrupted query 488 2 unterminated command 488 2 query after indefinite response Invalid from GPIB interface Invalid from serial interface Service only 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1600 1601 1602 EXE R CME R EXE R CME R EXE R EXE R CME CME CME CME CME CME CME CME CME CME DDE R CME FR DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FRS DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DRA DRA DWH 65535 DDE FR Appendices E Error Messages Parameter too long Invalid device trigger Device trigger recursion Serial buffer full Bad number Service command failed Bad binary number Bad binary block Bad character Bad decimal number Exponent magnitude too large Bad hexadecimal block Bad hexadecimal number Bad octal number Too many characters Bad string OPER not allowed while error pending Can t change UUT settings now Compliance voltage exceeded Shunt amp over or underload Curre
211. C outputs and measurements If the first parameter is EXT the second parameter must be the temperature value to use as the reference for the thermocouple reference junction temperature Once set the Calibrator retains reference setting until power off or reset Parameters INT EXT lt value of external reference gt CEL or FAR Example IC REF EXT 25 6 CEL Set the thermocouple reference to external with a value of 25 6 C TC_REF Thermocouple Reference query Returns the source and value of the temperature being used as a reference for thermocouple simulation and measurement in Celsius CEL or Fahrenheit FAR depending on active units The choices are Internal reference INT or External reference EXT IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled If INT is returned the reference temperature return is 0 unless you are a thermocouple mode of operation and the Calibrator is in Operate Responses INT value of reference temperature CEL or FAR EXT value of reference temperature CEL or FAR Example TC REF returns INT 2 988E401 CEL 6 47 5520A Operators Manual 6 48 Returns Internal 29 88 Celsius when the thermocouple reference is internal and at 29 88 C If the temperature return for the internal reference is 0 0 00 00 the Calibrator is not in Operate and or the Calibrator is not in a thermocouple mode
212. COMMANDS CLEAR THE ISCR CONTENTS 30 PRINT 6 ISR ASK ISR CONTENTS 40 INPUT 6 A RETRIEVE REGISTER CO NTS FROM 5520A 50 PRINT 6 ISCRO ASK FOR AND CLEAR ISCRO CONTENTS 60 INPUT 6 B RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5520A 70 PRINT 6 ISCEO ASK FOR ISCEO CONTENTS 80 INPUT 6 C RETRIEVE REGISTER CO NTS FROM 5520A 50 PRINT 6 ISCR1 ASK FOR AND CLEAR ISCR1 CONTENTS 60 INPUT 086 D RETRIEVE REGISTER CO NTS FROM 5520A 70 PRINT 86 ISCE1 ASK FOR ISCE1 CONTENTS 80 INPUT 86 E RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5520A 90 PRINT ISR A DISPLAY ISR 100 PRINT ISCRO B DISPLAY ISCRO 110 PRI ISCEO C DISPLAY ISCEO 100 PRINT ISCR1 D DISPLAY ISCR1 110 PRI 5 1 E DISPLAY 1 120 END Convert the returned variables into binary and you can read the status of the instrument For example if a register contains 128 its binary equivalent is 00000000 10000000 Therefore bit 7 HIVOLT is set 1 and the rest of the bits are reset 0 By setting the bits in an ISCE register you can mask disable the associated bits in the ISCR For example to cause an SRQ interrupt when the output has settled bit 12 SETTLED in the ISCEI register must be 1 The ISCB bit must also be enabled in the SRE The following sample program loads a decimal 1024 into the ISCE which sets bit 12 and resets the other bits
213. Calibrator unless the key is pressed so that its indicator is lit The NORMAL Normal Output terminals are used for ac and dc voltage ohms and capacitance sourcing and Resistance Temperature Detector RTD simulation 3 9 5520A Operators Manual ojo _ SL E e E ZA WARNING TER o 9 ET RETE HORE D WARNING TO A ROUNDING a nn012f eps Figure 3 2 Rear Panel View Table 3 2 Rear Panel Features 1 The Fan Filter covers the air intake to keep dust and debris out of the chassis air baffles The 5520A fan provides a constant cooling air flow throughout the chassis Instructions for fan filter maintenance are in Chapter 7 Maintenance 2 The CALIBRATION NORMAL ENABLE slide switch is used to write enable and disable the nonvolatile memory that stores calibration constants Switching to ENABLE allows changes to be written into memory and switching to NORMAL protects data in memory from being overwritten The switch is recessed to allow it to be covered with a calibration sticker to guarantee calibration integrity 3 The SERIAL 2 TO UUT connector is used for transmitting and receiving RS 232 serial data between the 5520A and a Unit Under Test UUT or a Fluke 700 Series pressure module Chapter 6 Remote
214. Characteristics Range 0 V to 0 V to 1 8 mV to 1 8 mV to 2 2V 33 V 2 2 V p p 105 V p p 1 Resolution 100 V 4 digits or 10 uV whichever is greater 2100 V 5 digits Adjustment Range Continuous 1 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 0 25 of output 100 uV 2 3 Sequence 1 2 5 e g 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV Square Wave Frequency Characteristics Range 10 Hz to 10 kHz 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 25 ppm of setting 15 mHz Typical Aberration within 20 us from leading edge lt 2 of output 100 uV 1 square wave signal into 1 MO is a positive square wave from 1 8 mV to 55 V p p From 95 V to 105 V its output is a square wave like signal that alternates between the negative peak and the positive peak with the centerline at 10 V Signals between 55 V and 95 V p p are not available 2 uncertainty for 50 Q loads does not include the input impedance uncertainty of the oscilloscope Square wave signals below 4 5 mV p p have an uncertainty of 0 25 of output 200 uV 3 Signals from 95 to 105 V p p have an uncertainty of 0 596 of output in the frequency range 100 Hz to 1 kHz Typical uncertainty is 1 596 of output for 95 V to 105 V p p signals in the frequency range 10 Hz to 100 Hz and 0 5 of output in the frequency range 1 kHz to 10 kHz Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications 5520A SC300 Option 8 8 79 Edge Function Specifications
215. Commands describes how to use the RS 232 serial interface for UUT communications Chapter 4 described how to measure pressure 4 The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST connector is used for remote control of the 5520A and for transmitting internal constant RS 232 serial data to a printer monitor or host computer Chapter 5 Remote Operation describes how to use the RS 232 serial interface for remote control 5 The 10 MHz IN BNC connector is for applying an optional external clock signal to the 5520 This replaces the normal internal 10 MHz clock signal in the 5520A Frequency accuracy of the 5520A is governed by the frequency accuracy of the clock signal internal or external The 10 MHz OUT BNC connector passes the internal or external 10 MHz clock signal to another 5520A to synchronize one or more slave 5520As to a master 5520A 6 The IEEE 488 connector is a standard parallel interface for operating the 5520A in remote control as a Talker Listener on the IEEE 488 bus Refer to Chapter 5 Remote Operation for bus connection and remote programming instructions 3 10 Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 Warning To avoid shock hazard connect the factory supplied three conductor line power cord to a properly grounded power outlet Do not use a two conductor adapter or extension cord this will break the protective ground connection Use the rear panel CHASSIS GROUND terminal for a protective grounding wire if there is any
216. Commands and General Commands serons cinereis irii rennen Edge Function Commands eene Marker Function Commands esee Video Function Commands eene Overload Function Commands eere Impedance Capacitance Function Commands Verification Fables usi tette tree tinte ete atenta DC Voltage Verification essere AC Voltage Amplitude Verification eene AC Voltage Frequency Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 MQ Output Impedance eese Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 50 Output Impedance Leveled Sine Wave Verification Amplitude Leveled Sine Wave Verification Frequency Leveled Sine Wave Verification Harmonics Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness Edge Verification Edge Verification Edge Verification Duty Cycle Edge Verification Rise Time Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification sss sss sese sees eee Marker Generator Pulse Generator Verification Period Pulse Generator Verification
217. Control Display directly above each key The functions change during operation so that many different functions are accessible through these keys A group of softkey labels is called a menu A group of interconnected menus is called a menu tree 3 5 5520A Operators Manual 3 6 5520A CALIBRATOR nnO10f eps Figure 3 1 Front Panel View cont Table 3 1 Front Panel Features cont 8 o e NEW REF The NEW REF New Reference key is active during error mode operation and establishes the present output value as a new reference for meter error computation SETUP The SETUP Setup Menu key puts the 5520A in the setup mode displaying the setup menu in the Control Display Setup options can be selected using the softkeys under the Control Display RESET The RESET Reset Calibrator key aborts the current operating state of the 5520A and returns it to the power up default state except when operating under remote control The CE Clear Entry key clears a partially completed keypad entry from the Control Display If there is a partially completed entry when CE is pressed the output is unaffected 4 EEG gt The EDIT FIELD Edit Output Display Field key and associated left right arrow keys provide step adjustment of the output signals If any of these keys are pressed or the knob is rotated a digit on the Output Display becomes highligh
218. D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Reference Clock Default query Returns the power up and reset default for the reference clock source internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector Responses character INT Reference clock is internal character EXT Reference clock is external Example REFCLOCK_D returns INT 6 37 5520A Operators Manual 6 38 REFOUT X IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Reference Output query Returns the present value of the reference when editing the output error mode If not editing the output using the INCR command the return is 0 0E 00 The reference value is set with the OUT NEWREF MULT commands To determine which quantity is being edited use the EDIT and OUT commands Response reference value Example REFOUT returns 0E 00 Returns 0 when the output is not being edited Example REFOUT returns 2 500000E 01 Returns 250 when the output is being edited and the reference is for example 250 mV REFPHASE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Reference Phase command If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN OUT sets the phase difference between the primary
219. FLUKE 5520A Multi Product Calibrator Operators Manual PN 688739 August 1998 Rev 6 1 03 1998 2003 Fluke Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A All product names are trademarks of their respective companies LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment Parts product repairs and services are warranted for 90 days This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller and does not apply to fuses disposable batteries or to any product which in Fluke s opinion has been misused altered neglected contaminated or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non defective media Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end user customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke Warranty support is available only if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price Fluke reser
220. FR DDE DDE QYE F DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR D DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR wae YH mH Inguard not responding recv Lost sync with inguard Invalid guard xing command Hardware relay trip occurred Inguard got impatient A D fell asleep Inguard watchdog timeout Inguard is obsolete Inguard parity error Inguard overrun error Inguard framing error Inguard fault error Inguard fault input error Inguard fault detect error Inguard read write error Invalid procedure number No such step in procedure Cant change that while busy begin resume cal there Wrong unit for reference Entered value out of bounds Not waiting for a reference Continue command ignored Cal constant outside limits Cal try to null failed Sequence failed during cal A D measurement failed Invalid cal step parameter Cal switch must be ENABLED Divide by zero encountered Must be in OPER at this step Open thermocouple for RJ cal Bad reference Z or entry Cal takes DAC over top limit Zero cal needed every 7 days Ohms zero needed every 12 hours Unusual cal fault d Fault during 96s Encoder not responding VERS Encoder not responding COMM Encoder not responding STAT Encoder self test failed Message over display R side Unmappable character d Encoder did not reset Encoder got invalid command 409 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 212 5
221. Factor line of the Control Display Press one or more times to return to previous menus 5520A Operators Manual 4 44 Entering a DC Offset 4 52 When the calibrator single output is an ac voltage of sine waves triangle waves square waves or truncated sine waves you can apply a offset When applying an offset to square wave outputs the duty cycle must be 50 0096 default The offset selection is entered using the softkey OFFSET which appears when the ac voltage output is less than 33 V sine waves 66 V p p square waves or 93 V p p triangle waves and truncated sine waves The softkey OFFSET will not appear and offsets may not be entered when the output is a voltage sine wave measured in dBm The maximum offset value allowed depends on the maximum offset and maximum peak signal for each range For example a square wave output of 10 V p p is within the range 6 6 to 65 9999 V p p a range that allows a maximum peak signal of 55 V For this example the square wave peak value is 5 V thus allowing a maximum offset of 50 V for a maximum peak signal of 55 V Check the specifications in Chapter 1 for offset limits If you are using an offset voltage and you cause the output to move into a range where offset is not allowed for example above 33 V for a sine wave output the calibrator will go into the standby mode and the offset function will be disabled Complete the following procedure to enter a dc voltage offset If
222. Features eene no soo ala oka ing EEE E EEEE EN EEE 3 2 Rear Panel Features sursei cecer ernes rre riar ras eere RT EEE EEEE EP sagen 3 3 Factory Default Settings for the SETUP 4 UUT conn ctofis rein oett ir o eee tend ten 4 2 Keys That Exit Error MOGe aute niente ette pna Veg reo Loi ionn E Ra ennt 4 3 Watts Performance Text Screen 4 4 Harmonics Performance for Volts Harmonics Screen 4 5 Harmonics Performance for AMPS Harmonics screen 4 6 Thermocouple Performance 5 1 Operating State 9 2 RS 232 Interface Jos iuste eee trt b rete e nated e beer pua obs 5 3 RS 232 Emulation of IEEE 488 Messages sese 5 4 IEEE 488 Interface Messages 5 5 488 Interface Messages 5 6 Commands for RS 232 Only nena 5 7 Commands for IEEE 488 eene rennen 5 8 Units Accepted in Parameters and Used in Responses 5 9 Terminator HE daje 9 10 Response Data Types uei tette tree en Ere rr E 5 11 Status Register Su
223. Host Port Setup Procedure procedure for the correct RS 232 settings and then repeat this procedure starting at Step 5 If no characters appeared on the screen then refer to step 3 of the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure procedure to verify serial was selected for the Host port Check that you used the correct RS 232 cable It must be in a null modem configuration where the RX and TX lines are reversed see Appendix C Also verify you have connected to the correct COM port on the PC 8 Type the command LOCAL and press Enter Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes back to the reset condition below S30 mV auta Lo If you want to experiment with other commands in the command set see Chapter 6 Remote Commands When finished select the Exit command from the File menu to close the Terminal accessory nn323f eps Hint To save the communication parameters in Terminal for future operations first select Save from the File menu and then assign a name for example host t rm Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 Host operation using the Windows based programming language Visual Basic This procedure assumes you have completed Appendix D Creating a Visual Basic Test Program to create the group RS 232 Test Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 operation using Visual Basic 1 Complete the RS 232 H
224. Hz 0 000685 0 039 120 MHz 0 00088 0 039 290 MHz 0 00088 0 039 360 MHz 0 00166 0 039 390 MHz 0 00166 0 039 400 MHz 0 00166 0 039 480 MHz 0 00166 0 039 570 MHz 0 00166 0 039 580 MHz 0 00166 0 039 590 MHz 0 00166 0 039 600 MHz 0 00166 0 04 50 kHz na na 0 04 30 MHz 0 0007 5520A SC600 Option Verification Tables 8 Table 8 24 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness cont Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Frequency Value V p p 0 04 70 MHz 0 0007 0 04 120 MHz 0 0009 0 04 290 MHz 0 0009 0 04 360 MHz 0 0017 0 04 390 MHz 0 0017 0 04 400 MHz 0 0017 0 04 480 MHz 0 0017 0 04 570 MHz 0 0017 0 04 580 MHz 0 0017 0 04 590 MHz 0 0017 0 04 600 MHz 0 0017 0 07 50 kHz na na 0 07 30 MHz 0 00115 0 07 70 MHz 0 00115 0 07 120 MHz 0 0015 0 07 290 MHz 0 0015 0 07 360 MHz 0 0029 0 07 390 MHz 0 0029 0 07 400 MHz 0 0029 0 07 480 MHz 0 0029 0 07 570 MHz 0 0029 0 07 580 MHz 0 0029 0 07 590 MHz 0 0029 0 07 600 MHz 0 0029 0 099 50 kHz na na 0 099 30 MHz 0 001585 0 099 70 MHz 0 001585 0 09
225. Hz 1 0 1 0 1 Frequency limited to 1 kHz with LCOMP on 2 Frequency limited to 440 Hz with LCOMP on 1 33 5520A Operators Manual 1 37 AC Current Square Wave Characteristics typical Range LCOMP Risetime Settling Time Overshoot 1 6 A Q 400 Hz off 25 us 40 us to 1 of final value lt 10 for lt 1 V Compliance 3A amp 20ARanges 100us 200usto 1 of final value lt 10 lt 1 V Compliance 1 38 AC Current Triangle Wave Characteristics typical Linearity to 400 Hz Aberrations 0 3 of p p value from 10 to 90 point 1 of p p value with amplitude gt 50 of range 1 34 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation Contents Introduction Unpacking and Inspecti Replacing the Fuse Selecting Line Voltage ODD Connecting to Line inei Selecting Line Frequency nennen Service Information Placement and Rack Mounting Cooling Considerations 2 1 5520A Operators Manual 2 2 Preparing for Operation 2 Introduction 2 1 2 2 Warning The 5520A Calibrator can supply lethal voltages To avoid shock hazard read this section before operating the calibrator Introduction This chapter provides instructions for unpacking and installing the 5520A selecting the line vo
226. K XI IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Real Time Clock query Returns the date and time the real time clock Response character 1 date in the format Y Y YY MM DD character 2 time in the format HH MM SS Example CLOCK returns 1998 12 04 13 03 50 The clock is set to December 4 1998 13 03 50 CLS IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Clear Status command Clears the ESR ISCRO ISCRI the error queue and the ROS bit in the status byte This command terminates pending operation complete commands OPC or OPC Parameter Example None CLS Clear the ESR ISCRO ISCR1 the error queue and the RQS bit in the status byte CUR_POST IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped X Coupled Current Post command Selects the binding posts for current output This also applies to power outputs The current post setting is retained until the power is turned off or the button is pressed Parameters AUX selects the AUX terminals A20 selects the 20A terminals Example CUR_POST AUX Selects the Calibrator front panel AUX terminals for the output current CUR POST Xx IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Current Post query Returns the active front panel binding post
227. LAB 1 NUMB ER Example Store the sting CAL LAB NUMBI character string format ER 1 in the protected user data area using the PUD IEEE 488 RS 232 Protected User Data query Returns the contents of the PUD Protected User Data memory in definite length format X X X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Response 42nn lt nn characters PUD returns 216CAL LAB NUMBER 1 Example Returns 2 then 16 then 16 characters of text including spaces stored in the nonvolatile memory RANGE IEEE 488 RS 232 Range query Returns the present output ranges Both the primary output and secondary outputs are returned If there is no secondary output 0 is returned Dual outputs are noted with P for primary output front panel NORMAL terminals and S for secondary output front panel AUX terminals X X X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Response primary output secondary output 6 35 5520A Operators Manual 6 36 Examples DC330MV 0 dc volts 330 mV range DC33MA A 0 dc current 33 mA range AC3 3V 0 ac volts 3 3 V range AC330MA A 0 ac current 330 mA range R1100HM 0 ohms 110 Q range Cl 1UF 0 capacitance 1 1 range TCSRC 0 temperature thermocouple source RTD 110 0 temperature RTD 110 Q range DC3 3V P DC3A AS dc power
228. LINE VOLTAGE Figure 2 1 Accessing the Fuse and Selecting Line Voltage nn007f eps Preparing for Operation 2 Service Information Table 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke Type Voltage Current North America 120 V 15A North America 240 V 15 A Universal Euro 220 V 16 A United Kingdom 240 V 13A Switzerland 220 V 10 A Australia 240 V 10 A South Africa 240 V 5 A Fluke Option Number LC 1 LC 2 LC 3 LC 4 LC 5 LC 6 LC 7 nnO8f eps Figure 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke 2 7 Service Information Each Model 5520A Calibrator is warranted to the original purchaser for a period of 1 year beginning on the date received The warranty is located at the front of this manual To locate an authorized service center call Fluke using any of the phone numbers listed below or visit us on the World Wide Web www fluke com USA 1 888 99 FLUKE 1 888 993 5853 Canada 1 800 36 FLUKE 1 800 363 5853 Europe 31 402 678 200 Japan 81 3 3434 0181 Singapore 65 738 5655 Anywhere in the world 1 425 446 5500 After warranty service is available but you may choose to repair the calibrator using the information in the Troubleshooting Chapter of the 5520A Service Manual and the Module Exchange Program Refer to the Fluke catalog or contact a Fluke Service Center representative for the module exchange procedure 2 7 5520A Operators Manual 2 8 Placement and Rack Mounting Y
229. Note The u indicator that occasionally appears in the Output Display indicates an internal adjustment to the measured isothermal block temperature and is normal If it appears for more than 10 seconds nominal or if it appears to flash continuously check to see that you are not externally heating the thermocouple miniconnector or wires 4 33 Setting Temperature Simulation RTD RTDs have a characteristic resistance at specific temperatures The simulated output then is a resistance value based on the selected temperature and type of RTD being simulated To toggle the degree reference between the 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard ipts 68 and the 1990 International Temperature Standard its 90 see Using the Instrument Setup Menu earlier in this chapter Complete the following procedure to set a simulated RTD temperature output at the 5520A front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Note When calibrating Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs using the three terminal connection shown in Figure 4 9 be sure the test leads have identical resistances to cancel any errors due to lead resistance This can be accomplished for example by using three identical test lead lengths and identical connector s
230. OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA ARISING FROM ANY CAUSE OR THEORY Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty or exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court or other decision maker of competent jurisdiction such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision Fluke Corporation Fluke Europe B V P O Box 9090 P O Box 1186 Everett WA 98206 9090 5602 BD Eindhoven U S A The Netherlands 11 99 Safety Information This Calibrator complies with IEC publication 1010 1 1992 1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Measuring Control and Laboratory Equipment and ANSI ISA S82 01 1994 and CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 This manual contains information warnings and cautions that must be followed to ensure safe operation and to maintain the Calibrator in a safe condition Use of this Calibrator in a manner not specified herein may impair the protection provided by the Calibrator This Calibrator is designed for IEC 1010 1 Installation Category II use It is not designed for connection to circuit
231. OST 9 d Port 5520A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT with an RS 232 port via PC RS 232 SERIAL 2 Port Ma COM Port Z UUT pa y Port 5520A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT with an RS 232 remote port via 5520A nn301f eps Figure 5 2 Typical RS 232 Remote Control Connections 5 7 5520A Operators Manual 5 8 5 3 IEEE 488 Port Setup Procedure Complete the following procedure to set up the Calibrator for remote operations using the IEEE 488 remote control port The purpose is to select GPIB as the interface and to select the GPIB address for the interface 1 Turn the Calibrator power on You may operate the Calibrator during warmup but specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete 2 Press on the Calibrator front panel Negotiate the softkey selections shown below Verify the HOST port selection is gpib Select the desired GPIB port address 0 to 30 using the UP DOWN softkeys The factory default is 4 CAL SHOW IHSTHT UTILITY SPECS SETUP FUNCTHS 4 L OTHER GUTPUT REMOTE SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP ES La 12 HOST HOST apib SETUP SETUP SETLIP ES AJ 2 s Select gt spit serial GPIB PORT ADDRESS 4 DOWN
232. OTE Puts the Calibrator into the remote state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 REN Remote Enable message SPLSTR Sets the serial remote mode Serial Poll response string SPLSTR Returns the string programmed for serial remote mode Serial Poll responses SRQSTR Sets the serial remote mode SRQ Service Request response up to 40 characters SRQSTR Returns the string programmed for Serial Mode SRQ response UUT_RECVB Returns binary data from the UUT serial port as integers UUT_SENDB Sends binary data to the UUT serial port as integers UUT_FLUSH UUT_RECV UUT_RECVB UUT_SEND UUT_SET UUT_SET 6 10 5 232 UUT Port Commands Flush the UUT receive buffer Returns data from the UUT serial port Returns binary data as integers from the UUT serial port Sends a string to the UUT serial port Sets the UUT serial port communication parameters and saves them in nonvolatile memory Returns the UUT serial port communication parameters contained in nonvolatile memory 6 7 5520A Operators Manual 6 8 6 11 CLOCK CLOCK DBMZ D DBMZ D FORMAT LIMIT LIMIT PR RPT PRES UNIT D PRES UNIT D REFCLOCK D REFCLOCK D REFPHASE D REFPHASE D RTD TYPE D RTD TYPE D SP SET SP SET TC TYPE D TC TYPE D TEMP STD TEMP STD TLIMIT D TLIMIT D UNCERT Setup and Utility Commands Sets the real time clock Queries the real time clock
233. PPER LOWER i020 0000 LIM anc LIMIT LIMIT 4 a Press the Upper Limit or the Lower Limit softkey as desired and enter the new limit b Press ENTER then One or more times to return to a previous menu To Limit Current applies to both dc and ac currents Press a softkey under CURRENT to open the current limits menu below I LIM 20 5000 UPPER LOWER I LIM 20 3000 LIMIT LIMIT a Press the Upper Limit or the Lower Limit softkey as desired and enter the new limit b Press ENTER then One or more times to return to a previous menu 4 55 5520A Operators Manual 4 51 Measuring Pressure The 5520A can be used as a pressure calibrator when you use it with the following accessories To measure pressure e Fluke 700 Series Pressure Module Model 700PCK Pressure Calibration Kit necessary because it provides the interface module To source pressure e stable hand operated or automated pressure source e Fluke 700 Series Pressure Module Model 700PCK Pressure Calibration Kit necessary because it provides the interface module See Figure 4 for how to connect a 700 Series Pressure Module to the 5520A To connect a pressure module to the 5520A and display a pressure measurement proceed as follows 1 Connect the 700 Series Pressure Module to the 700PCK input jack and connect the 700PCK power supply
234. R DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR Appendices E Error Messages A6 3 3V DC fault A6 3 3V DC fault A8 33V DC fault A6 33 mV AC fault A6 330 mV AC fault A6 3 3V AC fault 8 33V AC fault A6 vloop error amp fault A6 3 3V amp fault A6 polarity inverter fault A6 3 3V sense buffer fault A6 33V sense buffer fault A6 330V sense buffer fault A6 1000V sense buffer fault A6 trim DAC 0 3 3V fault A6 trim DAC 0 33V fault A6 trim DAC 1 fault 8 33V DC offset fault A8 330V AC low F fault A8 330V AC high F fault A8 330V DC fault A8 1000V AC low F fault A8 1000V AC high F fault A8 1000V DC fault A5 interface fault A5 X input amp fault A5 lo comp amp fault A5 coarse ZDAC fault A5 fine ZDAC fault A5 inverting amp fault A5 X2 45 input amp fault A5 X3 input amp fault A5 X13 1 input amp fault A5 input leakage fault A5 offset comp fault A5 input voltage detect fault A5 12 75 ohm reference fault 5 33 25 ohm reference fault A5 100 ohm reference fault A5 325 ohm reference fault A5 1 kohm reference fault A5 3 25 kohm reference fault A5 10 kohm reference fault A5 33 kohm reference fault A5 100 kohm reference fault 5 325 kohm reference fault E 5 5520A Operators Manual E 6 1062 1063
235. RE when the ac primary output Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals is a square wave and NONE when there is no secondary output on the front panel AUX terminals ZCOMP Impedance Compensation command Activates or deactivates 2 wire or 4 wire impedance compensation For resistance output compensation is allowed when the resistance is less than 110 kO For capacitance output compensation is allowed when the capacitance is equal to or greater than 110 nF For all other resistances and capacitances the compensation is NONE and attempts to use other parameters results in the error message Can t change compensation now For RTD temperature simulation compensation is allowed for all temperatures IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Parameter NONE Turns off impedance compensation circuitry WIRE2 Turns on the 2 wire impedance compensation circuitry WIRE4 Turns on the 4 wire impedance compensation circuitry Example ZCOMP WIRE2 Set 2 wire impedance compensation for the Calibrator UUT connection Resistance if the ohms value is less than 110 kQ capacitance if the farads value is 110 nF or more or RTD temperature simulation any value ZCOMP IEEE 488 RS 232 Impedance Compensation query Returns status of 2 wire or 4 wire impedance compensation X X X Sequential
236. Register 2 2 2 40044 1 22 the ESR and ESE Programming the ESR and 5 2 2 21 1 Instrument Status Register ISR sees Instrument Status Change Registers see Instrument Status Change Enable Registers Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCR and ISCE Programming the ISR ISCR and Output Queue Error Queue Remote Program Examples sese Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator Writing an SRQ and Error Handler sees Verifying a Meter the IEEE 488 Bus Verifying a Meter on the RS 232 UUT Serial Port Using OPC OPC and WA Leserreise citeerden ternie skeis Taking a Thermocouple Measurement eee Taking a Pressure Measurement seen Using the RS 232 UUT Port to Control an Instrument Input Buffer Operation Contents continued Remote Comnmands 55 nnn cac ac 6 1 lir lucojeli ejn 6 2 Command Summary by Function 6 3 Common 6 4 Error Mode Commands sss sss sese sese eee 6 5 External Connection Commands eene 6 6 Oscilloscope Commands
237. Self Test Format Nonvolatile Memory and Instrument Configuration SELF NS MEN IMSTMT TEST CONFIG AEE A 4 SELF TEST This softkey opens a menu with calibrator self test choices FORMAT NV MEM Format Nonvolatile Memory Opens a menu to restore all or part of the data in the nonvolatile memory EEPROM to factory defaults nnO66f eps INSTMT CONFIG Instrument Configuration Allows you to view the versions of software installed in the calibrator as well as the user entered report string 4 5 5520A Operators Manual 4 6 4 8 4 9 Using the Format EEPROM Menu Caution Use with extreme care The format nonvolatile memory menu softkeys permanently erase calibration constants Pressing ALL or CAL invalidates the state of calibration of the 5520A Pressing FORMAT NV MEM in the utility functions menu opens the following Format HW Memory ALL CAL SETUP 2 L the softkeys in this menu require the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to be in the ENABLE position The nonvolatile memory contains calibration constants and dates setup parameters and the user report string In the case of calibration constants factory defaults are the same for all Calibrators They are not the calibration constants obtained when the 5520A was calibrated by the factory before shipment The softkeys are e ALL replaces the entire contents of the EEPROM with factory defaults This
238. T X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Uncertainties command Retums specified uncertainties for the present output If there are no specifications for an output returns zero Parameter 1 optional Preferred unit of primary output uncertainty or PCT default 2 optional Preferred unit of secondary output uncertainty or PCT default Response 1 float 90 day specified uncertainty of primary unit 2 float 1 year specified uncertainty of primary output 3 character Unit of primary output uncertainty 4 float 90 day specified uncertainty of secondary unit 5 float 1 year specified uncertainty of secondary output 6 character Unit of secondary output uncertainty Example UNCERT returns 6 120 01 6 150 01 9 50 02 1 150E 01 PCT UUT FLUSH IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Flush UUT Receive Buffer command Flushes the UUT receive buffer for data received from the UUT over the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port The command may be sent over gpib or RS 232 ports but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation Parameter None Example UUT_FLUSH Flush the Calibrator receive data buffer for the UUT UUT 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled
239. T OF 5520A RANGE 30 A SPL 6 DO A SERIAL POLL 40 IF AND 72 0 THEN PRI EAV and RQS should have been set 50 PRINT 46 STB RETRIEVE BYTE 60 INPUT Q6 A 70 IF A AND 8 0 THEN PRI EAV should have been set 5 47 Event Status Register ESR The Event Status Register event status register ESR ESR event status register is a two byte register in which the higher eight bits are always 0 and the lower eight bits represent various conditions of the Calibrator The ESR is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on and every time it is read Many of the remote commands require parameters Improper use of parameters causes command errors to occur When a command error occurs bit CME 5 in the Event Status Register ESR goes to 1 if enabled in ESE register and the error is logged in the error queue 5 48 Event Status Enable ESE Register A mask register called the event status enable register ESE ESE event status enable register Event Status Enable register ESE allows the controller to enable or mask disable each bit in the ESR When a bit in the ESE is 1 the corresponding bit in the ESR is enabled When any enabled bit in the ESR is 1 the ESB bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte also goes to 1 The ESR bit stays 1 until the controller reads the ESR or does a device clear a selected device clear or sends the reset or CLS command to the Calibrator The ESE is cleared set to 0 when the
240. T and return to the capacitance reading Default Impedance Measurement range 50 ohm 8 46 Input Impedance Measurement With MEAS Z mode selected perform the following procedure to measure the input impedance of an oscilloscope 1 Use the MEASURE softkey to select res 5004 or res 1 termination 2 Connect the SCOPE terminal on the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope 3 Press to initiate the measurement 8 32 5520A SC600 Option 8 Testing Overload Protection 8 47 Input Capacitance Measurement With MEAS Z mode selected perform the following procedure to measure the input capacitance of an oscilloscope 1 Set the oscilloscope for 1 MQ input impedance Note that input capacitance testing cannot be done with 50Q input impedance Use the MEASURE softkey to select cap With the output cable connected to the Calibrator but not connected to the oscilloscope press the SET OFFSET softkey to cancel stray capacitances Connect the output cable to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope Press to initiate the measurement 8 48 Testing Overload Protection Caution This test checks the power handling capability of the 500 input of your oscilloscope Before proceeding ensure that the power rating of your oscilloscope can handle the voltages and currents that this test can output Failing to do so could damage your oscilloscope UUTTRIP in 4 15 Output T LIMIT OUT V
241. UT while using the Levsine function Dutput a SCOPE MORE SET TO MODE terminal 506 OPTIOMS LAST levs ine 2 5 S 5 set to last F levzine zet to 50 kHz marker wavyegen volt edge gl029i eps Each option in the Levsine menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 500 Indicates the location and impedance of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press srev You cannot change the impedance while you in Levsine mode MORE OPTIONS Opens additional menu items which are described in detail under The MORE OPTIONS Menu SET TO LAST F Toggles between the current frequency setting and the reference value of 50 kHz This option is useful for reverting to the reference to check the output after you make adjustments at another frequency e MODE Indicates you Levsine mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four calibration modes Note If a question mark appears in the Output Display then no specifications are available for the frequency you are using This will occur at frequencies greater than 250 MHz Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage Three options are available for controlling the sine wave settings e SET TO LAST F toggles between the last frequency used and the reference frequency of 50 kHz letting you check the output at the
242. UX LO terminals are tied at the UUT select open with the LO s softkey If the NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are not tied at the UUT select tied with the LO s softkey The default is tied 9 amp REF MENUS Phase Difference and 10 MHz reference source Selects the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs selects internal or Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output external 10 MHz reference and sets the phase difference between an external master 5520A using 10 MHz IN OUT and the NORMAL output See Adjusting the Phase and Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN OUT later in this chapter 4 30 Setting Resistance Output Complete the following procedure to set a synthesized resistance output at the 5520A front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entry error press CE clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Note Since this is a synthesized output be sure the terminal connections from the 5520A to the UUT are LO to LO and HI to HI Set the UUT to measure resistance on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired resistance output maximum six numeric keys For example 12 3456 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press k Press 0 The Control Display
243. V 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 5 kHz 299 100 mV 300 900 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 10 kHz 298 650 mV 301 350 mV 329 999 mV 300 000 mV 30 kHz 287 100 mV 312 900 mV 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 9 5 Hz 2 825 V 3 175 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 10 Hz 2 99505 V 3 00495 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 45 Hz 2 99745 V 3 00255 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 1 kHz 2 99745 V 3 00255 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 5 kHz 2 99410 V 3 00590 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 10 kHz 2 98960 V 3 01040 V 3 29999 V 3 00000 V 30 kHz 2 87720 V 3 12280 V 5 00000 V 5 00000 V 9 5 Hz 4 72500 V 5 27500 V 5 00000 V 5 00000 V 10 Hz 4 99205 V 5 00795 V 5 00000 V 5 00000 V 45 Hz 4 99605 V 5 00395 V 5 00000 V 5 00000 V 1 kHz 4 99605 V 5 00395 V 5 00000 V 5 00000 V 5 kHz 4 99110 V 5 00890 V 5 00000 V 5 00000 V 10 kHz 4 98360 V 5 01640 V Note set the NORMAL output to 300 mV Maintenance Performance Tests 7 Table 7 8 Verification Tests for AC Current Range Output Frequency Lower Limit Upper Limit 329 99 LA 33 00 uA 1 kHz 32 87 LA 33 13 uA 329 99 pA 33 00 HA 10 kHz 32 60 uA 33 40 pA 329 99 33 00 HA 30 kHz 32 20 HA 33 80 uA 329 99 LA 190 00 uA 45 Hz 189 71 WA 190 29 uA 329 99 LA 190 00 uA 1 kHz 189 71 uA 190 29 uA 329 99 LA 190 00 uA 10 kHz 188 66 191 34 nA 329 99 LA 190 00 uA 30 kHz 187 32 uA 192 68 uA 329 99 329 00 10 Hz 328 37 uA 329 63 uA 329 99 LA 329 00 uA 45 Hz 328 57 uA 329 43 LA 329 99 LA 329 00 uA 1 kHz 3
244. able Connection Instructions eene 4 19 RMS Versus Amplitude 2 0488 4 20 Auto Range Versus Locked Range 4 21 Setting the O tput suene ertet ette kennt 4 22 Setting DC Voltage Output 4 23 Setting AC Voltage Output 4 24 Setting DC Current Output 4 25 Setting AC Current 4 26 Setting DC Power Output 4 27 Setting AC Power Output 4 28 Setting a Dual DC Voltage Output 4 29 Setting a Dual AC Voltage Output 4 30 Setting Resistance 4 31 Setting Capacitance Output il Contents continued 4 32 Setting Temperature Simulation Thermocouple 4 33 Setting Temperature Simulation RTD sess 4 34 Measuring Thermocouple Temperatures eee 4 35 Waveform Lypes ioo tete err ee eene pua pt ia 4 36 Sine WAVE E H 4 37 Triangle WaVe 4 38 Sejuare CU P 4 39 Truncated Sine Wave inest a 4 40 Setting Harmonis essere neea E E EEE EE 4 41 Adjusting the PHASE tente E EEEE ene 4 42 Entering a Phase 1 4 43 Entering a Power 0 SIT 1 ise ies 4 44 Entering a DC ren rennen nen 4 45 Editing and Error Output 4 46 Editing the Out
245. al locations Activates or deactivates inductive load compensation for ac current output Returns whether inductive load compensation for ac current output is active Activates the Calibrator output if it is in standby Returns the operate standby setting Sets the output of the Calibrator and establishes a new reference point for the error mode Returns the output amplitudes and frequency of the Calibrator Sets the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX terminals for dual outputs The NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference Returns the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX terminals Returns the equivalent power for dc and ac power output Returns the present output ranges Locks in the present range or selects auto ranging Returns whether or not the preset output range is locked Sets the reference clock source internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector Returns the reference clock source internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN OUT sets the phase difference between the NORMAL terminals on the slave Calibrator and the NORMAL terminals of the master Calibrator If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN OUT returns the phase difference between the NORMAL terminals on the slave Calibrator and the NORMAL terminals of the master Calibrator Puts the Calibrator in standby Sends a synchronization pulse out to a slave Calibrator t
246. alibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope 2 Select the voltage type DC or AC using the OUT VAL softkey 3 Keyin the voltage level The default value is 5 V 4 If necessary change the duration Refer to the procedure described above The default duration is 10s 5 Check for test results displayed with the UUTTRIP softkey 8 49 Remote Commands and Queries 8 34 This section describes commands and queries that are used specifically for the SC600 Option Each command description indicates whether it can be used with IEEE 488 and RS 232 remote interfaces and identifies it as a Sequential Overlapped or Coupled command IEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232 Applicability Each command and query has a check box indicating applicability to IEEE 488 general purpose interface bus or GPIB and RS 232 remote operations Sequential Commands Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands For more information see Sequential Commands in Chapter 5 Overlapped Commands Commands SCOPE TRIG and OUT IMP are designated as overlapped commands because they may be overlapped interrupted by the next command before they have completed execution When an overlapped command is interrupted it may take longer to execute while it waits for other commands to be completed To prevent an overlapped command from being interrupted during execution use OPC OPC or WAI These commands preve
247. an be useful for many oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on low amplitude signals You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing WS MODE Indicates you are in EDGE mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes 8 19 5520A Operators Manual 8 32 Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure This sample procedure shows how to check the oscilloscope s pulse response Before you check your oscilloscope see your oscilloscope s manual for the recommended calibration settings Before you start this procedure verify that you are running the SC600 Option in EDGE mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output at SCOPE TDPULSE TRIG MODE terminal 50Q off Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the pulse response 1 Connect the Calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope Select 50Q impedance or use a 500 termination directly at the oscilloscope input Verify that the key is lit indicating that the signal is connected 2 Alter the voltage setting for the signal so it matches the amplitude value recommended by your oscilloscope manufacturer for calibrating the edge response The default setting is 25 00 mV p p 1 0000 MHz For example on an HP 54522C oscilloscope start with a signal of 1 V 9 1 MHz Adjust the scale on your oscilloscope to achieve a good picture of the edge 4 Adjust the time base on your
248. and displayed Three softkey labels appear on the Control Display WAVE MENUS I OUT AUX or 20A terminals and LCOMP off or on The Control Display also shows the real power output for sine waves Power out is computed as Power Cosine Volts x Current where is the phase difference between the volts and current waveforms Cosine is also known as the Power Factor PF 4 30 Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 5 97557 ml LOOM I QUT WAVE Ties d Hz OFF aux MEHLE A 5 12 12 HARMONIC Y MAYE I EVE OV RE REF HEHLJS sine aine tied MENUS sine z ine tied tri tri open zquare zquare trunca trunci jud id MHz 10 MHz 0 00 int VHCOLIT Z 1 nnO88f eps WAVE MENUS Waveform Menus Opens submenus for selecting the type of harmonic waveform front panel LO terminal condition and phase HARMONIC MENUS Harmonic Frequency Menus Opens submenus for selecting harmonic outputs See Setting Harmonics later in this chapter V WAVE Voltage Waveform Selects the waveform for the voltage output at the NORMAL terminals See Waveform Types later in this chapter I WAVE Current Waveform Selects the waveform for the current output at the front panel AUX terminals See Waveform Types later in this chapter LO s Low Potential Output Terminals The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals
249. andby if the multiplied value exceeds 33 V Press the key if you wish to continue This feature is useful for UUTS with ranges organized in decades 4 54 Front Panel Operation 4 Setting Output Limits 4 49 Setting Output Limits An output limit feature is available to help prevent accidental damage to a UUT from overcurrent or overvoltage conditions This feature allows you to preset the maximum positive and negative allowable voltage or current output Entry limits you set prevent any output greater than the limit from being activated by entry through the front panel keys or the output adjustment controls Positive limits for voltage and current set the limits for ac voltage and current Your limit selections are saved in the nonvolatile memory Voltage limits are expressed as rms values and any voltage offsets are ignored 4 50 Setting Voltage and Current Limits To set voltage and current entry limits proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Press to clear any output from the 5520A Press setur Press the softkey INSTMT SETUP to open the setup submenus Press the softkey OUTPUT SETUP to open the output setup submenus Press the softkey SET LIMITS to open the set limits menu below DIS PLAY OR Petar zi ud LIMITS VOLTAGE CURRENT La 4 L To Limit Voltage applies to both dc and ac voltages Press a softkey under VOLTAGE to open the voltage limits menu below nn117f eps Y LIM 1020 0000 U
250. andwidth mode outputs multiple waveforms down to 0 01 Hz and sine waves to 2 MHz e Variable phase signal output e Standard IEEE 488 GPIB interface complying with ANSI IEEE Standards 488 1 1987 and 488 2 1987 FIA Standard RS 232 C serial data interface for printing displaying or transferring internally stored calibration constants and for remote control of the 5520A Pass through RS 232 C serial data interface for communicating with the Unit Under Test UUT 1 2 Operation Overview The 5520A Calibrator may be operated at the front panel in the local mode or remotely using RS 232 or IEBE 488 ports For remote operations several software options are available to integrate 5520A operation into a wide variety of calibration requirements 1 3 Local Operation Typical local operations include front panel connections to the Unit Under Test UUT and then manual keystroke entries at the front panel to place the calibrator in the desired output mode The front panel layout facilitates hand movements from left to right and multiply and divide keys make it easy to step up or down at the press of a single key You can also review 5520A Calibrator specifications at the push of two buttons The backlit liquid crystal display is easy to read from many different viewing angles and lighting conditions and the large easy to read keys are color coded and provide tactile feedback 1 4 Remote Operation RS 232 There are two rear p
251. anel serial data RS 232 ports SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT Figure 1 2 Each port is dedicated to serial data communications for operating and controlling the 5520A during calibration procedures For complete information on remote operations see Chapter 5 The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial data port connects a host terminal or personal computer to the 5520A You have several choices for sending commands to the 5520A you can enter commands from a terminal or a PC running a terminal program you can write your own programs using BASIC or you can run optional Windows based 1 4 Introduction and Specifications Operation Overview 1 software such as 5500 CAL or MET CAL The 5500 CAL software includes more than 200 example procedures covering a wide range of test tools the 5520A can calibrate See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the RS 232 commands The SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial data port connects a UUT to a PC or terminal via the 5520A see Figure 1 2 This pass through configuration eliminates the requirement for two COM ports at the PC or terminal A set of four commands control the operation of the SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the UUT commands The SERIAL 2 TO UUT port is also used to connect to the Fluke 700 series pressure modules Remote Operation IEEE 488 The 5520A rear panel IEEE 488 port is a fully programmable parallel interface bus meeting standard IEEE 488 1 and supplemental
252. ange for dc volts or dc current is not locked autoranging enabled Remote Commands 6 Commands REFCLOCK IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Reference Clock command Sets the reference clock source internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector Parameter INT Sets internal reference clock XT Sets external reference clock tz Example REFCLOCK INT Once set the Calibrator retains the external guard setting until power off or reset REFCLOCK IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Reference Clock query Returns the reference clock source internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector Response character INT Reference clock is internal character EXT Reference clock is external Example REFCLOCK returns INT REFCLOCK D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Reference Clock Default command Sets the power up and reset default for the reference clock source internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector Parameters INT Sets internal reference clock EXT Sets external reference clock The reference clock is set to the default at power on reset and when going into an ac function Example REFCLOCK_D INT REFCLOCK_
253. aracter ON zero in effect 2 float offset value 3 character units PSI INHG INH2O FTH2O MH20 BAR PAL G CM2 INH2O60F Example ZERO MEAS returns ON 3 66E 02 PSI 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 5 Contents Introduction Replacing the Line Fuse Chapter 7 Maintenance Cleaning the Air RT teret tt t net e orae General Cleaning Performance Tests 7 1 5520A Operators Manual 7 2 Maintenance 7 Introduction 7 1 7 2 Introduction This chapter explains how to perform the routine maintenance and calibration task required to keep a normally operating 5520A Calibrator in service These tasks include e Replacing the fuse e Cleaning the air filter e Cleaning the external surfaces e Calibration verification Refer to the Service manual for intensive maintenance tasks such as troubleshooting calibration or repair and all procedures that require opening the cover of the instrument The Service Manual also contains complete detailed verification and calibration procedures Replacing the Line Fuse The line power fuse is accessible on the rear panel The fuse rating label above the ac power input module shows the correct replacement fuse for each line voltage setting Table 7 1 lists the fuse part numbers for each line voltage setting To check or replace the fuse refer to Figure 7 1 and proceed as follows 1 Disconnect line power 2 The lin
254. ase Specifications Total Watts Output Uncertainty Upower 4 0 017 0 046 0 767 0 7696 VARs When the Power Factor approaches 0 0 the watts output uncertainty becomes unrealistic because the dominant characteristic is the VARs volts amps reactive output In these cases calculate the Total VARs Output Uncertainty as shown in example 3 Example 3 Output 100 V 1 A 60 Hz Power Factor 0 174 80 Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is 150 ppm 2 mV totaling 100 V x 190 x 10 15 mV added to 2 mV 17 mV Expressed in percent 17 mV 100 V x 100 0 017 see AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0 036 100 uA totaling 1 A x 0 00036 360 uA added to 100 uA 0 46 mA Expressed in percent 0 46 mA 1 A x 100 0 046 see AC Current Sine Waves Specifications VARs Adder VARs Adder for 80 at 60 Hz is 0 02 see Phase Specifications Total VARS Output Uncertainty Uvars J 0 017 0 046 0 03 0 058 1 25 5520A Operators Manual 1 27 Additional Specifications The following paragraphs provide additional specifications for the 5520A Calibrator ac voltage and ac current functions These specifications are valid after allowing a warm up period of 30 minutes or twice the time the 5520A has been turned off All extended range specifications are based on performing the internal zero cal function at weekly intervals or w
255. at the front panel TC terminals This is a display only not a softkey function TC MENUS Thermocouple Menu Shows submenus for thermocouple outputs e UNITS Temperature Units Selects C or F as the temperature unit REF SRC Reference Source Selects intrnl Internal or extrnl External temperature reference source Select intrnl when the selected thermocouple has 4 41 5520A Operators Manual alloy wires and you are using the isothermal block internal to the 5520A Calibrator Select extrnl when using an external isothermal block and when the selected thermocouple has copper wires Press the REF softkey to enter the value of the external temperature reference The best accuracy is obtained when you use extrnl and the external isothermal block is maintained at 0 C e REF Temperature Reference Displays the value of the temperature reference When the Reference Source is Internal the display shows the internal reference or NONE if the 5520A is in Standby When the Reference Source is External the display shows the value you entered for external reference OUTPUT Temperature Output Device Selects the temperature device thermocouple tc or resistance temperature detector rtd Select tc e TYPE Thermocouple Type Selects the thermocouple type simulated by the 5520A Calibrator The default is type K The 10 uV C and 1 mV C settings are used as an accurate output voltage source for user supplied linearizations
256. ator Specifications Wave Generator Characteristics Amplitude Square Wave Sine Wave and Triangle Wave into 50 or 1 MQ Range 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 10 Hz to 10 kHz Sequence into 1 MQ into 50 Q 1 8 mV to 55 V p p 1 8 mV to 2 5 V p p 3 of p p output 100 uV 1 2 5 e g 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV Typical DC Offset Range to 240 of p p amplitude 1 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C Frequency Range 10 Hz to 100 kHz Resolution 4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency 25 ppm 15 mHz 1 The DC offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms 8 9 5520A Operators Manual 8 8 Pulse Generator Specifications Table 8 6 Pulse Generator Specifications Pulse Generator Characteristics Positive pulse into 50 Typical rise fall times 1 ns Available Amplitudes 2 5 V 1 V 250 mV 100 mV 25 mV 10 mV Pulse Width Range 4 ns to 44 9 ns 1 45 ns to 500 ns 1 Uncertainty typical 5 500 ps 5 4ns Pulse Period Range 20 ms to 200 ns 50 Hz to 5 MHz Resolution 4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency and width 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty at Cardinal 2 5 ppm Points tcal 5 C 1 Pulse width not to exceed 40 of period 2 Pulse width uncertainties for periods below 2 us are not specified 5520A SC600 Option 8 SC600 Option Specifications 8 9 Trigger Signal Specifications Pulse Function
257. bit DIOS is ignored 2 All data is taken as 7 bit ASCII 3 Lower case or upper case characters are accepted 4 ASCII characters whose decimal equivalent is less than 32 Space are discarded except for characters 10 LF and 13 CR and in the PUD command argument Binary Block Data allows all characters in its argument and terminates in a special way 5 35 5520A Operators Manual 5 36 5 41 Response Message Syntax In the command descriptions in Chapter 6 responses from the Calibrator are described wherever appropriate In order to know what type of data to read in refer to the first part of the entry under Response in the tables The response is identified as one of the data types in Table 5 10 Data Type Table 5 10 Response Data Types Description Integer Integers for some controllers or computers are decimal numbers in the range 32768 to 32768 Responses in this range are labeled Integer Example ESE 123 ESE returns 123 Floating Numbers that may have up to 15 significant figures plus an exponent that may range from E20 Example DC OFFSET returns 1 4293E 00 String Any ASCII characters including quotation mark delimiters Example SROSTR SRQ from 5520A SROSTR returns SRQ from 5520A Character This type of response is always a keyword Response Example OUT 10V 100HZ FUNC Data CRD T returns ACV Indefinite Any ASCII chara
258. ce Interval required nominal 99 1 After long periods of storage at high humidity a drying out period with the power on of at least one week may be 2 For optimal performance at full dual outputs e g 1000 V 20A choose a line voltage setting that is 7 5 from 3 The DC Current ranges 0 to 1 09999 A and 1 1 A to 2 99999 A are sensitive to storage temperatures above 50 C If the 5520A is stored above 50 C for greater than 30 minutes these ranges must be re calibrated Otherwise the 90 day and 1 year uncertainties of these ranges double Introduction and Specifications Specifications 1 1 14 DC Voltage Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C t ppm of output uV Stability Max 24 hours 1 Resolution Burden Range 90 days 1 year ppm output uV pv 1 0 to 329 9999 mV 1541 2011 341 o1 500 0 to 3 299999 V 94 1 10 mA 0 to 32 99999 V 10 10 10 mA 30 V to 329 9999 V 15 100 5mA 100 V to 1000 000 V 15 1000 5 mA O to 329 999 mv 300 350 400 350 30 100 1 5mA 0 33 V to 3 29999 V 3004350 4004350 30 100 10 5mA 3 3Vto7V 3004350 4004350 30 100 100 5mA TC Simulate and Measure in Linear 10 uV C and 1 mV C modes 3 01032999 mv 4043 504 3 542 0 1 100 Remote sensing is not provided Output resistance is 5 mQ for outputs gt 0 33 V The AUX output has an output resistance of lt
259. channel on the Calibrator relative to the sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal The primary channel is the NORMAL AUX or 20A terminal for single outputs and the NORMAL terminal for ac power and ac dual voltage outputs The sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal is the phase reference The set range is 0 00 to 3180 00 degress with for a leading phase difference and for a lagging phase difference Parameter Phase with optional multiplier and DEG unit Example REFPHASE 1 5 DEG 1 5 degrees On either Calibrator set the phase of the primary channel to lead the sync pulse by 1 5 degrees REFPHASE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Reference Phase query If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN OUT returns the phase difference between the primary channel on the Calibrator and the sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal Response float Phase in degrees Example REFPHASE returns 1 50E 00 1 5 degrees Remote Commands Commands 6 REFPHASE D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Coupled Reference Phase Default command If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN OUT sets the power up and reset default phase difference between the primary channel on the Calibrator relative to the sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal The primary channel is the NORMAL AUX or 20A termi
260. character hex 0A Example SPLSTR SPL 02x 02 04x 04xWn Set the SPLSTR to the default values SPL 02 02x 04 04x n SPLSTR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Serial Poll Response String query Returns the string programmed for Serial Poll response For values enter a P lt cntl gt p character Also see the SROSTR command Response lt string gt Example SROSTR returns SRO 02x 02x 04x 04x n Returns the SPLSTR string format default settings in this example 488 X RS 232 X SRE ix Service Request Enable command Loadsa byte into the Service Request Enable SRE register See Service Request Enable Register SRE in Chapter 5 Since bit 6 is not used decimal value 64 the maximum entry is 255 64 191 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Parameter value the decimal equivalent of the SRE byte 0 to 191 Example SRE 56 Enable bits 3 EAV 4 MAV and 5 ESR 6 44 Remote Commands 6 Commands SRE IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Service Request Enable query Returns the byte in the Service Request Enable SRE Response value the decimal equivalent of the SRE byte 0 to 191 Example SRE returns 56
261. cters actually perform the CR and LF functions Indefinite Length Format This format may not be used when a character string requires CR and LF commands 6 53 5520A Operators Manual 6 54 Character String Follow the instructions above and after the character string add a n for CR or r for LF or both where the alpha character is entered in lower case For example in the terminal mode to send the string REMS in this format with both CR and LF the command would be UUT SEND REMS n r In the computer mode where commands are entered as part of a command string use double quotes to show embedded quotes For example uut send REMS n r The following characters and commands may be implemented as described above Carriage Return J n Line Feed M NE Tab Tab t Backspace H b Form Feed L f UUT_SENDB X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Send UUT Binary Data command Send binary data to the UUT serial port Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 to UUT serial port Use the UUT SEND command instead of sending ASCII data The command may be sent over gpib or RS 232 ports but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation Parameter separated integers to send maximum of 10 Example UUT SENDB 42 73 68 78 63 10 Send the ASCII characters IDN followed by a new line ASCII 10 to the UUT serial po
262. cters followed by EOM Queries with this type of response MUST be ASCII IAD the last Query in a program message Example OPT returns SC600 CAL reports and lists which contains Line Feeds are typically of this type Binary A special data type defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard This type is used in PUD Block Data query It is defined as follows non zero digit digits user data The non zero digit specifies the number of characters that will follow in the lt digits gt field Characters allowed in the digits field are 0 through 9 ASCII 48 through 57 decimal The value of the number in the lt digits gt field in decimal defines the number of user data bytes that follow in the lt user data gt field The maximum response is 64 characters Example PUD testl PUD returns 205testl Remote Operation Checking 5520A Status 5 42 Checking 5520A Status The programmer has access to status registers enable registers and queues in the Calibrator to indicate various conditions in the instrument as shown in Figure 5 8 Some registers and queues are defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard The rest are specific to the Calibrator In addition to the status registers the Service Request SRQ control line and a 16 element buffer called the Error Queue provide status information Table 5 11 lists the status registers and gives the read write commands and associated mask registers Table 5 11 Status Register Summary Read
263. d 6 16 ERR UNIT remote command 6 17 error handler 5 3 handler writing 5 46 mode operation 4 18 mode remote commands 6 4 queue 5 45 ESE event status enable re gister 5 40 ESR event status register event status enable register ESE event status register ESR 55 EXGRD key EXPLAIN remote command 6 17 external connection commands 6 4 external guard using 4 10 EXTGUARD remote command 6 18 EXTGUARD remote command 6 18 fan filter 3 10 FAULT remote command 6 18 filter fan 3 10 FORMAT remote command 6 19 frequency response calibration SC300 option response calibration SC600 option specifications 1 26 sweep for oscilloscope calibration SC600 option 8 24 sweep for SC300 option 8 77 frequency response calibration SC300 option 8 78 front panel features 3 3 front panel operation Chapter Ay 4 3 FUNC remote command 6 20 fuse ratings 2 4 replacement fuse accessing the 2 6 GUARD terminal 3 9 HARMONIC remote command 6 20 HARMONIC remote command 6 21 harmonics 2nd 50th specifications IEEE 488 connector interface cable 9 4 interface messages interface overview 5 24 interface description interface setting up 5 8 interface testing the 5 9 remote control connections INCR remote command 6 21 input buffer operation 5 49 input capacitance measurement SC600 opti
264. d ac RCL meters The maximum allowable peak voltage is 3 V The maximum allowable peak current is 150 mA with an rms limitation of 30 mA below 1 1 uF and 100 mA for 1 1 uF and above 3 The maximum lead resistance for no additional error 2 wire COMP mode is 10 5520A Operators Manual 1 20 Temperature Calibration Thermocouple Specifications TC Type 1 20 SUM 1 Temperature standard ITS 90 or IPTS 68 is selectable TC simulating and measuring are not specified for operation in electromagnetic fields above 0 4 V m 2 Resolution is 0 01 C 3 Does not include thermocouple error Absolute Uncertainty Absolute Uncertainty Source Measure Source Measure Range tcal 5 C TC Range teal 5 C 3 Type 3 2 90 days 1 year 1 2 90 days 1 year 60010800 042 0 44 20010 100 037 037 800 to 1000 0 34 0 34 L 100 to 800 0 26 0 26 1000 to 1550 0 30 0 30 800 to 900 0 17 0 17 1550 to 1820 0 26 o33 200 to 100 0 30 0 40 023 oso 100 to 25 0 17 0 22 150 to 650 019 25t0120 0415 0 19 650 to 1000 0 23 0 31 120 to 410 0 14 0 18 1000101800 038 oso 410101300 0 21 0 27 1800 to 2316 0 63 os4 0 to 250 0 48 0 57 250 to 100 0 38 0 50 R 25010400 0 28 0 35 100 to 25 0 12 0 16 400 to 1000 0 26 0 33 25t0350 4000 to 1767 0 30 0 40 350 to 650 0
265. d by function listed alphabetically oscilloscope 6 5 output commands overlapped 5 30 query 5 27 RS 232 Host port 6 7 sequential 5 30 syntax information 5 33 types of 5 26 using 5 26 commands remote RS 232 UUT Port 6 7 common commands 5 27 6 3 compound commands 5 29 controlling an instrument using RS 232 5 49 coupled commands 5 29 CUR_POST remote command 6 11 CUR POST remote command 6 11 DAMPEN remote command 6 11 DAMPEN remote command 6 12 DBMZ remote command DBMZ remote command 6 12 DBMZ D remote command DBMZ D remote command dc current connections setting the output specifications dc power setting the output specification summary 1 22 dc voltage connections 4 16 DC OFFSET remote command DC OFFSET remote command defaults for setup menus 3 22 device dependent commands 5 26 display control 3 4 output 3 4 DIV divide key nets 3 7 DIVIDE key DPF remote command 6 14 DPF remote command 6 14 dual ac voltage setting the output 4 34 dual dc voltage setting the output DUTY remote command DUTY remote command EARTH key 3 5 EARTH remote command 6 15 EARTH remote command 6 15 EDIT FIELD 3 6 EDIT FIELD keys and knob using 4 53 EDIT remote command 6 15 EDIT remote command 6 15 ENTER key 3 8 ERR remote command 6 16 ERR UNIT remote comman
266. d shield from the LO binding post Parameter ON external guard is on i e external OFF external guard is off i e internal Once set the Calibrator retains the external guard setting until power off or reset Example EXTGUARD ON EXTGUARD X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled External guard query Returns whether the internal guard shields are connected or disconnected from earth chasis ground Response character ON external guard is on i e external character OFF external guard is off i e internal Example EXTGUARD returns ON FAULT X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Fault query Returns the first error code contained in the Calibrator error queue then remove that error from the queue After obtaining the error code use the EXPLAIN command to view an explanation A zero value is returned when the error queue is empty To read the entire contents of the error queue repeat FAULT until the response is 0 Only system errors appear in the error queue Response value ofthe error code Example FAULT returns 539 Returns the first error code in the error queue number 539 To view an explanation of the error enter the command EXPLAIN 539 Remote Commands 6 Commands FORMAT X IEEE
267. d the ISCR1 Instrument Status 0 1 Change Register Each status change register has an associated mask register Each ISCR is cleared set to 0 when the Calibrator is turned on every time it is read and at each CLS Clear Status command 5 53 Instrument Status Change Enable Registers The Instrument Status Change Enable registers ISCEO and ISCE1 are instrument status change enable registers ISCRE and 1 ISCEO ISCEI instrument status change enable registers mask registers for the ISCRO and ISCRI registers If a bit in the ISCE is enabled set to 1 and the corresponding bit in the ISCR makes the appropriate transition the ISCB bit in the Status Byte is set to 1 If all bits in the ISCE are disabled set to 0 the ISCB bit in the Status Byte never goes to 1 The contents of the ISCE registers are set to 0 at power up 5 54 Bit Assignments for the ISR ISCH and ISCE The bits in the Instrument Status Instrument Status Change and Instrument Status Change Enable registers are assigned as shown in Figure 5 11 5 42 Remote Operation Checking 5520A Status 5 SETTLED REMOTE UUTBFUL UUTDATA HIVOLT RPTBUSY SETTLED REMOTE UUTBFUL UUTDATA HIVOLT MAGCHG TMPCAL OPER TMPCAL Set to 1 when a calibration report is being printed to the serial port Set to 1 when the output has stabilized to within speclfication or the TC measurement has settled and is available Set to 1 when the 5520A is
268. designed in compliance with supplemental standard IEEE 488 2 which describes additional IEEE 488 features Devices connected to the IEEE 488 bus are designated as talkers listeners talker listeners or controllers Under remote control of an instrument the Calibrator operates as a talker listener A PC equipped with an IEEE 488 interface controls the the Calibrator Compatible software for IEEE 488 operation may be purchased from Fluke including METCAL and METRACK Another software package 5520 CAL is also available but operates only on the RS 232 serial interface When using the IEEE 488 remote control interface there are two restrictions 1 Number of Devices A maximum of 15 devices can be connected in a single IEEE 488 bus system For example one instrument controller one Calibrator and thirteen units under test UUTs 2 Cable Length The total length of IEEE 488 cables used in one IEEE 488 system is 2 meters times the number of devices in the system or 20 meters whichever is less For example if 8 devices are connected the maximum cable length is 2 x 8 2 16 meters If 15 devices are connected the maximum cable length is 20 meters 5 6 Remote Operation Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control 5 SERIAL 1 COM Port FROM HOST sc s r4 Port 5520A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT without a remote port RS 232 SERIAL 1 ime COM Port EM COM Port Na FROM H
269. dwidth 1 28 ac voltage square wave characteristics RS 232 ac voltage triangle wave characteristics interface overview 5 23 typical interface using for remote control capacitance 1 19 pa modem cables de current dc power summary 1 22 frequency 1 26 harmonics 2nd 5048 1 27 phase 1 24 power and dual output limit 1 23 power uncertainty 1 25 SC300 oscilloscope calibration option SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option 8 5 temperature calibration RTD temperature calibration thermocouple 1 20 SPLSTR remote command 6 44 SPLSTR remote command 6 44 square wave and duty cycle 4 48 SRE service request enable register SRE register 5805 37 SRQ error handler example 5 3 SRQ service request line SRQSTR remote command 6 45 SROSTR remote command 6 45 standard eguipment table 2 3 status checking 5520A 5 37 commands register overview figure register summary table STB STB STBY remote command 6 46 synchronizing using 10 MHz IN OUT 4 58 SYNCOUT remote command 6 46 tab or space characters TC thermocouple minijack TC MEAS remote command 6 46 TC OFFSET remote command TC OFFSET remote command OTCD remote command TC OTCD remote command TC REF remote command 6 47 TC REF remote command TC TYPE remote command TC TYPE remote command 6 49 TC_TYPE_D remote command TC_TYPE_D remote command TDPULSE r
270. e A group of softkey labels is called a menu A group of interconnected menus is called a menu tree Figure 3 3 shows the SETUP menu tree structure Figure 3 4 describes each SETUP menu tree display Table 3 3 shows the factory default settings for the SETUP menu tree To return the SETUP menus to their default values use the softkey SETUP in the Format NV Memory menu see Figure 3 4 menu F 3 3 5520A Operators Manual ELKE 5520A CALIBRATOR nnOO9f eps Figure 3 1 Front Panel View Table 3 1 Front Panel Features 1 Output Display The Output Display is a two line backlit LCD that shows output amplitudes frequency and calibrator status Output values or potential output values if in standby are displayed using up to seven digits plus a polarity sign Output frequencies or potential output frequencies if the 5520A is in standby are displayed using four digits Calibrator status is indicated by displaying the following abbreviations OPR Displayed when an output is active at the front panel terminals STBY Displayed when the 5520A is in standby ADDR Displayed when the 5520A is addressed over the IEEE 488 interface u When you change the output a u unsettled is displayed until the output settles to within the specified accuracy m Displayed when the calibrator is making a measurement Thermocouple pressure and impedance
271. e To use the external trigger and view its signal with the calibration signal connect the TRIG OUT output to another channel See your oscilloscope manual for details on connecting and viewing an external trigger FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX SCOPE VO RTD N SENSE AUX V OUT nn228f eps Figure 8 1 Oscilloscope Connection Channel and External Trigger 8 18 Starting the SC600 Option Press LED lit to select the SC600 Option The SCOPE menu shown below appears in the Control Display You can press any of the first four softkeys to go directly to the VOLT EDGE LEVSINE and MARKER calibration menus Press the last softkey to go to the OTHER menu also shown below allowing access to WAVEGEN VIDEO PULSE Impedance Capacitance measurement MEAS Z and Overload OVERLD menus Press to return to the SCOPE menu from the OTHER menu This chapter describes each of these menus in detail Select SCOPE mode VOLT EDGE LEVSINE MARKER OTHER Select SCOPE mode or PREV MENU WAVEGEN VIDEO PULSE MEAS a a z 4 8 13 5520A Operators Manual 8 19 The Output Signal
272. e Calibration Procedure 8 30 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 19 8 31 The Edge Function pesce ai oa obn 8 32 Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure 8 20 8 33 Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser 8 21 8 34 The Leveled Sine Wave Function 8 35 Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage 8 36 The MORE OPTIONS Menu 8 37 Sweeping Through a Frequency Range esee 8 38 Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure 8 39 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 8 40 The Time Marker Function 8 41 Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope 8 42 Testing the Trigger SC600 option 8 43 Testing Video Triggers anal oro ke ako 8 44 Verifying Pulse Capture eki njaki ikono Na Ce 8 45 Measuring Input Resistance and Capacitance 8 46 Input Impedance Measurement 8 47 Input Capacitance Measurement Juan d ponte ali obs UA bi 8 48 Testing Overload Protection usce iier iere e tbe rere diu dida 8 49 Remote Commands and Queries 8 50 General Commands ccecseccccessecceceeseccececscceceesceeceesceeceenneceess 8 51 Edge Function C
273. e Control Display as shown below Sweeping From previous d HALT MODE to disp las ad Frequency SWEEP levs ine A z 4 4 Youcanlet the signal sweep through the entire range or you can halt the sweep if you need to record the frequency at a certain point 910311 To interrupt sweep press the softkey under HALT SWEEP The current frequency will appear on the Output Display and the MORE OPTIONS menu will reappear on the Control Display Note When you interrupt the frequency sweep by pressing HALT SWEEP the FREQ CHANGE method switches back to jump 5 Repeat the procedure if necessary For example if you did a fast sweep you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slow sweep over a subset of your previous frequency range 8 77 5520A Operators Manual 8 105 Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This sample procedure which verifies the frequency response on your oscilloscope is usually performed after the pulse response is verified This procedure checks the bandwidth by finding the frequency at the 3 dB point for your oscilloscope The reference sine wave in this procedure has an amplitude of 6 divisions so that the 3 dB point can be found when the amplitude drops to 4 2 divisions Before you start this example procedure verify that you are running the oscilloscope option in Levsine mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu
274. e Start button La to run the RS 232 test program below is typical If there are no errors continue to Step 10 10 Click the Stop button La on the Toolbar to stop the program Hint Before continuing to the next step connect the 5520A Calibrator and UUT if applicable and test the program in actual operation 11 Save the program as vb rs232 exe by selecting the Make EXE File command from the File menu Save the program files by selecting the Save Program command from the File menu 12 Select the Exit command from the File menu to exit Visual Basic 13 In Program Manager select New from the File menu Check Program Group then click OK In the Description box enter RS 232 Test then click OK This creates and opens the RS 232 Test group 14 With the RS 232 Test group still open select New from the File menu Check Program Item then click OK In the Description box enter Test Ports Use Browse to locate your vb rs232 exe file then click OK to enter this file in the Command Line box Click OK This creates the Test Ports icon below gt RS 232 Test BE FF 0C BMP D 3 5520A Operators Manual D 4 Error Messages The following is a list of the 5520A Calibrator error messages The error message format is shown in Table E 1 Appendix E Error Messages Table E 1 Error Message Format Error Number 0 to 65535 100 Message Class QYE Query Error caused by a full input buffer
275. e frequency error is within specification Change the calibrator output to 1 7 V Verify the frequency error is within specification Change the calibrator output to 1 0 V Verify that the DMM displays 000 0 frequency Change the DMM range to 40 V by pressing RANGE Change the calibrator output to 6 0 V Verify the frequency error is within specification Change the calibrator output to 2 0 V Verify that the DMM displays 000 0 frequency 4 63 5520A Operators Manual 7 Test the Ohms function as follows Press the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to O gt b Setthe calibrator to 190 0 O with 2 wire compensation see Figure 4 3 Press opr Verify the error is within specifications c Repeat the previous step for 19 00 1 900 MQ and 19 00 MQ Verify the errors are within specifications d Press RANGE on the DMM to enter the 40 nS range used for conductance tests of high resistances e Set the calibrator output to 100 MQ Verify the error is within specification 8 Testthe capacitance function as follows use the REL feature of the 80 Series to subtract cable capacitance a Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to O gt and press the blue key b Set the calibrator output to 1 0 uF with compensation off Press Verify the error is within specification c Repeat the previous step using 0 470 uF 0 047 uF and 4 70 nF Verify the errors ar
276. e lethal voltages when not completely inserted into a mating terminal To avoid electric shock use only cables with correct voltage ratings Cables to the calibrator are connected to the NORMAL and AUX terminals To avoid errors induced by thermal voltages thermal emfs use connectors and conductors made of copper or materials that generate small thermal emfs when joined to copper Avoid using nickel plated connectors Optimum results can be obtained by using Fluke Model 5440A 7002 Low Thermal EMF Test Leads which are constructed of well insulated copper wire and tellurium copper connectors See Chapter 9 Accessories 4 9 5520A Operators Manual 4 14 When to Use EARTH and EXGRD Figure 4 1 shows the internal connections made by the and keys Chassis ground Internal guard shield NORMAL LO signal ground EXGRD Lit open Safety ground through ac line cord CO EARTH Not lit lt open GUARD NORMAL LO binding binding post post nnOO3f eps Figure 4 1 EARTH and EXGRD Internal Connections 4 15 Earth The 5520A Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal is normally isolated from earth chassis ground When it is desired to make a connection between the NORMAL LO terminal and earth ground press the key lighting the key annunciator To avoid ground loops and noise you must have only one earth ground to LO terminal connection in the system Usually you make all signal ground connections at
277. e power fuse and line voltage switch are located in a compartment on the right end of the ac input module To open the compartment and remove the fuse insert the blade of a standard screwdriver to the left of the tab located at the left side of the compartment cover 3 Pry the tab out of the slot and the compartment cover will pop part way out 4 Remove the compartment cover with your fingers 5 The fuse comes out with the compartment cover and can be easily replaced 6 To reinstall the fuse push the compartment cover back into the compartment until the tab locks with the ac input module Table 7 1 Replacement Fuses Part Number Fuse Description Line Voltage Setting A 109215 5A 250 V Time Delay 100 V or 120 V A 851931 2 5A 250 V Time Delay 200 V or 240 V 7 3 5520A Operators Manual LINE VOLTAGE INDICATOR CHANGING LINE FUSE CHANGING LINE VOLTAGE nn007f eps Figure 7 1 Accessing the Fuse 7 4 Maintenance 7 Cleaning the Air Filter 7 3 Cleaning the Air Filter A Warning To avoid risk of injury never operate or power the 5520A calibrator without the fan filter in place CAUTION Damage caused by overheating may occur if the area around the fan is restricted the intake air is too warm or the filter becomes clogged The air filter must be removed and cleaned every 30 days or more frequently if the calibrator is operated in a dusty environment The air filter is accessible from the rear panel
278. e within specifications 9 Test the Diode Test function as follows a Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to b Set the calibrator to 3 0 V dc and press opr Verify the error is within specification 10 Test the ac and dc current function a Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to m A b Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in Figure 4 19 FLUKE 5520 CALIBRATOR nn047f eps Figure 4 19 Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series Current Function 4 64 Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications Set the calibrator to 35 0 mA and press oPR Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator output for a reading of 35 00 mA on the DMM Verify that the error shown on the control display is within specification Repeat using 350 0 mA Verify the error is within specification Press the blue key on the DMM to switch to ac current measurement Set the calibrator output to 35 0 mA at 60 Hz Verify the error is within specification Repeat the previous step with the following calibrator settings AC Current Frequency 35 0 mA 1 0 kHz 350 0 mA 60 Hz 350 0 mA 1 0 kHz Press on the calibrator and switch the DMM function switch to HA Set the calibrator output to 350 pA at 0 Hz and press Verify the error is within specification Repeat the pre
279. ear Panel nn226f eps Figure 4 15 Measuring Pressure 4 57 5520A Operators Manual 4 52 Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN OUT You can synchronize one or more 5520A Calibrators using the 10 MHz IN and OUT input output on the rear panel Example applications of this capability are connecting two or more calibrators in parallel in the current output function to sum their outputs or using three calibrators to calibrate a three phase power meter Another use for the 10 MHz IN reference input is to improve the frequency performance of the 5520A by injecting a reference 10 MHz clock signal That application is described next 4 53 Using an External 10 MHz Clock The calibrator uses an internal 10 MHz clock signal as a reference for all ac functions Although this internal clock is very accurate and stable you may have a lab standard that you want to have govern the frequency performance of the calibrator To apply an external clock to the calibrator you have two choices You can make external reference the power up and reset default condition or you can select external reference as a volatile setting for the operating session only To make external reference the power up and reset default setting proceed as follows 1 Connect a 10 MHz square wave signal of 5 V p p maximum to the rear panel 10 MHz IN BNC connector 2 Press the key 3 Press the following sequence of softkeys INSTMT SETUP OUTPUT SETUP b amp
280. ector 9 pins DB 25 Type DB connector 25 pins Data Carrier Detect DCE Data Communications Equipment DSR Data Set Ready DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTR Data Terminal Ready GND Ground RI Ring Indicator RLSD Received Line Signal Detector RTD Request to Send RX Receive Line TX Transmit Line 5 23 5520A Operators Manual 5 22 IEEE 488 Interface Overview The IEEE 488 parallel interface sends commands as data and receives measurements and messages as data The maximum data exchange rate is 1 Mbyte with a maximum distance of 20 meters for the sum length of the connecting cables A single cable should not exceed 4 meters in length Some commands are reserved for RS 232 serial operation because these functions must be implemented as IEEE messages per the IEEE Standards For example the command REMOTE could be sent as data over the IEEE 488 interface to place the Calibrator into remote but it is not because the IEEE Standards call for the remote function to be sent to the device as the uniline message REN This is also true for several other commands and functions as shown below with their equivalent RS 232 emulation A summary of IEEE 488 messages is shown in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 RS 232 Emulation of IEEE 488 Messages IEEE 488 Message RS 232 Equivalent GTL LOCAL command GTR REMOTE command LLO LOCKOUT command SDC DCL C Cntl C character clear the device GET T Cntl T character
281. ed to be matched vary for different oscilloscopes and are specified in your oscilloscope s service manual 8 26 The VOLT Function You can calibrate the Voltage gain using the VOLT function Access this function through the VOLT menu which appears when you press score or when you press the VOLT softkey from the SCOPE menu Output 8 SCOPE TRIG v piv MODE 1 MO pc ac off MENU volt 4 1 DC AC off see The volt 500 DC gt AC 1 V DIV edge Menu levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu Each menu item is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press To disconnect the signal press srev e 1MQ Toggles between 1 and 500 to match the input impedance of the oscilloscope DC AC toggles from ac to dc producing the dc equivalent output DC gt AC Toggles from dc to ac e TRIG If you are using square wave to calibrate the external trigger use this key to toggle the trigger off and on When on the reading will show 1 which indicates that the external trigger is at the same frequency as the volt output The external trigger can be useful for many oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on
282. emote command SC600 option 8 38 TEMP_STD remote command temperature thermocouples measuring 4 45 calibration RTD specifications 1 21 calibration thermocouple specifications 1 20 simulation RTD setting the output 4 42 simulation thermocouple setting the output 4 40 terminators Index continued test lead kit 5500A Leads accessory 9 4 thermocouple connections 4 17 thermocouple measurement remote example 5 48 thermocouples measuring three phase power calibration time marker calibration SC300 option 8 80 time marker calibration SC600 option 8 26 TLIMIT remote command SC600 option TLIMIT remote command SC600 optio TLIMIT D remote command SC600 option 8 40 TLIMIT_D remote command SC600 option 8 40 TMWAVE remote command SC600 option 8 38 TMWAVE remote command SC600 option triangle wave 4 47 TRIG remote command for SC300 8 85 TRIG remote command SC600 option 8 36 TRIG remote command for SC300 8 85 TRIG remote command SC600 option trigger testing SC300 option 8 82 truncated sine recy TSENS_TYPE remote command TSENS_TYPE remote command two 5520As sourcing current in parallel 4 59 UNCERT remote command 6 52 unit keys 3 7 UT connections 4 12 UT_FLUSH remote command T_RECV remote command U UT_RECVB remote command UT_SEND remote command 6 53 U U JT_SENDB
283. ency response is checked by verifying the bandwidth using the Leveled Sine Wave function A leveled sine wave is monitored until the 3 dB point is observed on the oscilloscope Horizontal deflection characteristics are verified by calibrating the time base using the Time Marker function This calibration procedure is similar to the one for verifying the vertical deflection characteristics except that it checks the horizontal axis The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on different waveforms is checked using the Wave Generator function The menus that implement these functions also include parameters for altering the way the output signal responds to voltage frequency and time settings giving you control of the signal during calibration and providing more methods for observing the signal s characteristics 8 59 5520A Operators Manual 8 60 8 77 Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications These specifications apply only to the Oscilloscope Calibration Option General specifications that apply to the 5520A Calibrator can be found in Chapter 1 The specifications are valid providing the 5520A is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1 and has completed a warm up period of at least twice the length of time the calibrator was powered off up to a maximum of 30 minutes 8 78 Volt Function Specifications dc Signal Square Wave Signal Volt Function into 50 Q into 1 MO into 500 into 1 MO Amplitude
284. endent AD Address Talk or listen HS Handshake UC Universal Command SE Secondary ST Status Other B2 etc Information Bits Logic Zero 0 False Blanks Doesn t Care condition Logic One 1 True 5 24 IEEE 488 Interface Overview Remote Operation MESSAGE DATA HAND BUS DESCRIPTION BUS SHAKE MANAGEMENT M TICI DID DIDID NN AE 5 N MESSAGE Y LYE bl ty ty dy ty ty E E 1 ES 81716541321 DIC S ACG Addressed Command Group M AC 0 0 1 ATN Attention U UC 1 DAB Data Byte M DD B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 0 DAC Data Accepted U HS 0 DAV Data Valid U HS 1 DCL Device Clear M UC 0 0 1 0 1 O JO 1 END End U IST 0 1 EOS End Of String M DD B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 0 GET Group Execute Trigger M AC iO 0 j1 O O 0 1 GTL Go To Local M AC o O iO O JO O 1 1 IDY Identify U UC 1 IFC Interface Clear U UC 1 LAG Listen Address Group M AD 011 1 LLO Local Lock Out M UC 0 0 1 0 JO 0 1 1 MLA My Listen Address AD 0 1 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 1 MTA My Talk Address AD 1 0 B5 B4 B3 B2 Bi 1 MSA My Secondary Address 5 111 B5 B4 B2 Bi 1 NUL Null Byte M DD jo
285. ending device operations are done 6 27 5520A Operators Manual 6 28 OPC X IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Operations Complete query Returns a 1 after all pending operations are complete This command causes program execution to pause until operations are complete See WAT Response Example 1 all operations are complete OPC returns 1 Returns 1 when all pending operations are complete OPER X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Operate command Activates the Calibrator output if it is in standby This is the same as pressing the Calibrator front panel key If there are errors in the error queue the OPER command is inhibited for outputs 33 V and over Also see the ERR command and STBY command None Parameter Example OP ER E Connect the selected output to the Calibrator front panel terminals Also lights the annunciator in the key OPER X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Operate query Returns the operate standby setting Response 1 Operate 0 Standby Example OPER returns 1 Returns 1 when the Calibrator is in operate X IEEE 4
286. ents lower than shown the floor adder increases by Floors Floors x Imin Tecua For example a 50 pA stimulus measuring 100 O has a floor specification of 0 0014 1 mA 50 0 028 assuming an ohms zero calibration within 12 hours Introduction and Specifications Specifications 1 17 AC Voltage Sine Wave Specifications NORMAL Normal Output Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 Frequency Resolution 10 Hz to 5 MHz t ppm of output uV Burden Bandwidth 0 s dns oor T UY 500 22909 45Hzto 10 Hz 800 3000 12 329 999 mV 140 8 500 32 3 29999 V 160 60 329900 V 48Hzto 0KHz 125 600 300 600 329 999 V except 20 mA for 0 035 90 pV 0 06 90 uV 0 15 90 uV 33 mV to 10 Hz to 45 Hz 250 8 300 8 0 15 90 uV 20 kHz to 50 kHz 240 6000 300 6000 45 Hz to 0 8 10 mV 50 kHz to 100 kHz 1600 2000 65 Hz 1 0 10 mV 50000 50000 330 V to 45 Hz to 1 kHz 250 10000 300 0 15 30 mV 1020 V 10000 1 kHz to 5 kHz 200 10000 250 0 07 30 mV 10000 5 kHz to 10 kHz 250 10000 0 07 30 mV 1 Max Distortion for 100 kHz to 200 kHz For 200 kHz to 500 kHz the maximum distortion is 0 996 of output floor as shown Note e Remote sensing is not provided Output resistance is lt 5 for outputs 20 33 V The AUX output resistance is lt 1Q The maximum load capacitance is 500 pF subject to the maximum burden current limits 1 5520
287. equencies 1 Make sure the output signal shows the starting frequency If not key in the starting frequency then press ENTER 2 Toggle FREQ CHANGE to sweep Toggle the RATE to a lower frequency if you want to observe a very slow sweep over a small range 3 Key in the end frequency then press enter After you press ENTER the signal sweeps through frequencies between the two values you entered and the Sweep menu Sweeping from previous to displayed frequency appears on the Control Display 4 Youcanlet the signal sweep through the entire range or you can halt the sweep if you need to record the frequency at a certain point To interrupt the sweep press the softkey under HALT SWEEP The current frequency will appear on the Output Display and the MORE OPTIONS menu will reappear on the Control Display Note When you interrupt the frequency sweep by pressing HALT SWEEP the FREQ CHANGE method switches back to jump 5 Repeat the procedure if necessary For example if you did a fast sweep you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slow sweep over a subset of your previous frequency range 8 38 Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure This sample procedure which verifies the frequency response on your oscilloscope is usually performed after the pulse response is verified This procedure checks the bandwidth by finding the frequency at the 3 dB point for your oscilloscope The ref
288. erence sine wave in this procedure has an amplitude of 6 divisions so that the 3 dB point can be found when the amplitude drops to 4 2 divisions 8 24 5520A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope Before you start this example procedure verify that you are running the SC600 Option in LEVSINE mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output SCOPE terminal 500 Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the frequency response 1 Reconnect the signal by pressing the key on the Calibrator Select 500 impedance or use a 50Q external termination directly at the oscilloscope input Adjust the sine wave settings in the Output Display according to the calibration recommendations in your oscilloscope manual For example for the HP 54522C oscilloscope start at 600 mV 1 MHz To enter 600 mV press 6 C0 0 Pm CY then press eres Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary The sine wave should appear at exactly six divisions peak to peak as shown below If necessary make small adjustments to the voltage amplitude until the wave reaches exactly six divisions To fine tune the voltage press to bring a cursor into the Output Display move the cursor with the 4 key and turn the rotary knob to adjust the value See Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob earlier in this chapter 910091 Increase the
289. ery 100th marker You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing WS MODE Indicates you are in MARKER mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes Default marker values are 1 000 ms SHAPE spike The and keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an oscilloscope in a 1 2 5 step sequence For example if the period is 1 000 ms pressing increases the period to the nearest cardinal point which is 2 000 ms Pressing decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point which is 500 us Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This sample procedure uses the Time MARKER function to check the horizontal deflection time base of your oscilloscope See your oscilloscope s manual for the exact time base values recommended for calibration Before you begin this procedure verify that you are in MARKER mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu Output at SCOPE SHAPE TRIG MODE terminal 500 spike off marker A A Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the time base 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel on the oscilloscope Select 500 impedance or use an external 500 termination Make sure the oscilloscope is dc coupled 2 Apply a time marker value according to the recommended calibration settings in your oscilloscope manual For example to enter 200 ns pre
290. es of water 60 degrees Farhenheit BAR Once set the Calibrator retains the pressure units until power off or reset 6 33 5520A Operators Manual 6 34 PRES UNIT D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Pressure Units Default command Sets the power up and reset default pressure display units Parameters Example PSI MHG INHG INH2O FTH2O MH20 BAR PAL G CM2 INH2060F PRES_UNIT_D PSI pound force per square inch meters of mercury inches of mercury inches of water feet of water meters of water bar Pascal grams per centimeter squared Inches of water 60 degrees Farhenheit The pressure unit is set to the default at power on and reset PRES UNIT D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Pressure Units Default query Returns the power up and reset default pressure display units Responses Example character PSI character MHG character I character I N N character FT character character BAI character PAL character G CM2 character I PRES_UNIT_D returns PSI 20 pound force per square inch meters of mercury inches of mercury inches of water feet of water meters of water R
291. etting CAL set only calibration constants to factory settings SETUP resets instrument setup to factory default settings see Table 3 3 OTHER OUTPUT DISPLAY REMOTE SETUP i SETUP f SETUP i SETUP SET Ti ERR UNI TME STD CLOCK i ifs 0 1 iipts 68 1 100ppm its gt 1 FF TMP STD temperature degree standard refers to its 90 1990 International Temperature Standard factory default and ipts 68 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard HOST GPIB HOST LUT spib SETUP SETUP SETUP A A la 4 1 1 1 1 zerial to O to K to HOST selects the IEEE 488 gpib factory default parallel port or RS 232 serial port You cannot operate both IEEE 488 and RS 232 simultaneously H nn015f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees STALL PARITY 2508 Psom ofk nane E BAUD nane add aaa rtzz ctz even BGG 1200 2400 4500 STALL refers to the method of controlling data flow software control xon off hardware control rts cts or none STALL PARITY NEXT 2 DATA 1 STOP none 1 MENU BITS a a 7 z nane add rtzz ctz even STALL refers to the method of controlling data flow software control xon off hardware control rts cts or none REMOTE I lt F EOL MEET ena CRLF MENU BAUD term comp m LJ G
292. ew value by pressing 110 00 MHz 91005 5 Press to remove the cursor from the Output Display and save the new value as the reference value Note If you attempt to use the rotary knob to adjust a value to an amount that is invalid for the function you are using or is outside the value s range limit the value will not change and the Calibrator will beep 8 23 Using and The and keys cause the current value of the signal to jump to a pre determined cardinal value whose amount is determined by the current function These keys are described in more detail under the descriptions for each function 8 24 Hesetting the SC600 Option You can reset all parameters in the Calibrator to their default settings at any time during front panel operations by pressing the key on the front panel 8 15 5520A Operators Manual After resetting the Calibrator press to return to the SC600 Option the SCOPE menu appears Press to reconnect the signal output 8 25 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope The oscilloscope voltage vertical gain is calibrated by applying a dc or low frequency square wave signal and adjusting its gain to meet the height specified for different voltage levels as designated by the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope The signal is applied from the Calibrator in VOLT mode The specific voltages that you should use for calibration and the graticule line divisions that ne
293. execute a group trigger SPE SPD P Cntl P character print the serial poll string UNL UNT not emulated on RS 232 The IEEE 488 interface is based on the IEEE Standards 488 1 and 488 2 For detailed information refer to the standards IEEE 488 1 and IEEE 488 2 IEEE 488 1 IEEE 488 1 is the hardware portion of the interface The parallel signal lines are divided into eight lines for the data bus three lines for the handshake and five lines for bus management The handshake lines take care of the timing for data exchange The bus management lines control the operation of data exchange The ATN line indicates the use of the DIO lines for addresses or messages true or for DIO data false The EOI line is used with the data lines to mark the end of a message and with the ATN line for polling The SRQ line is used by the devices to indicate to the controller that they require service The IFC line is used by the controller to quickly get all the devices on the bus to stop talking and start listening The REN line is used to implement the remote local states IEEE 488 2 IEEE 488 2 is the software portion of the interface specifying data formats common commands message exchange protocol and the status register implementation Use the following to decode the columns in Figure 5 7 Appendix C shows a typical IEEE 488 connector and pin assignments Type M Multiline U Uniline Class AC Addressed Command DD Device Dep
294. ey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes 8 82 5520A SC300 Option 8 Summary of Commands and Queries 8 110 Summary of Commands and Queries This section describes commands and queries that are used specifically for the oscilloscope calibration option Each command description indicates whether it can be used with IEEE 488 and RS 232 remote interfaces and identifies it as a Sequential Overlapped or Coupled command IEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232 Applicability X IEEE 488 X RS 232 command and query have a check box indicating applicability to IEEE 488 general purpose interface bus or GPIB and RS 232 remote operations Sequential Commands X Sequential Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands For more information see Sequential Commands in Chapter 5 Overlapped Commands X Overlapped Commands SCOPE TRIG and OUT IMP are designated as overlapped commands because they may be overlapped nterrupted by the next command before they have completed execution When an overlapped command is interrupted it may take longer to execute while it waits for other commands to be completed To prevent an overlapped command from being interrupted during execution use OPC OPC or WAI These commands prevent interruptions until they detect the command s comp
295. f ON 0 if OFF 8 52 Marker Function Commands TMWAVE 488 RS 232 Sequential Selects the waveform for MARKER mode Parameters SINE Sine wave 2 ns to 15 ns SPIKE Triangular sawtooth pulse 15 ns to 5s SQUARE Square wave 50 duty cycle 4 ns to 5s SQ20PCT Square wave 20 duty cycle 85 ns to 5s Example TMWAVE SPIKE TMWAVE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the MARKER mode waveform setting Parameters None Response character Returns SINE SPIKE SQUARE or SQ20PCT 8 53 Video Function Commands VIDEOFMT 488 RS 232 Sequential Selects the format for VIDEO mode Parameters NTSC PAL PALM for PAL M or SECAM Example VIDEOFMT SECAM 8 38 5520A SC600 Option 8 Hemote Commands and Queries VIDEOFMT IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the VIDEO mode format Parameters None Response NTSC PAL PALM for PAL M or SECAM VIDEOMARK IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Programs the VIDEO mode line marker location Parameters Line marker number Example VIDEOMARK 10 VIDEOMARK IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the VIDEO mode line marker setting Parameters None Response character SINE SPIKE SQUARE or SQ20PCT 8 54 Overload Function Commands OL TRIP IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the detected state of scope overload protection Parameters None Response Returns the number o
296. f enable LOCKOUT 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Lockout command Puts the Calibrator into the lockout state when in remote control see the REMOTE command This means no local operation at the front panel is allowed during remote control To clear the lockout condition use the LOCAL command This command duplicates the IEEE 488 LLO Local Lockout message 6 25 5520A Operators Manual 6 26 Parameter None Example LOCKOUT Set the instrument into the front panel lockout state The front panels controls cannot be used LOWS IEEE 488 xX RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Low Potential Output Terminals command Selects whether or not the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal are internally tied together default or are open This feature is used for ac power dc power dual dc volts and dual ac volts outputs Once set the Calibrator retains the LO setting until power off or reset Parameter OPEN disconnect NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals TIED connect NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals Example LOWS TIED Tie the front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals together LOWS X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Low Potential Output Term
297. f seconds before protection was tripped Returns 0 if protection has not been tripped or if OVERLD mode not active TLIMIT IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Sets the OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal The Calibrator automatically returns to STANDBY if the UUT protection trips within this interval or at the end of this interval if the protection has not tripped Parameters 1 to 60 seconds Example TLIMIT 30 TLIMIT IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the programmed OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal Response Integer Time limit in seconds 8 39 5520A Operators Manual 8 40 TLIMIT D IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Sets the default OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal Parameters 1 to 60 seconds Example TLIMIT_D 15 TLIMIT_D IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Returns the default overload time limit Response Integer Default time limit in seconds 8 55 Impedance Capacitance Function Commands ZERO MEAS IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Sets the measurement offset to the capacitance value Parameters boolean ON or OFF TAG IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Triggers and returns a new impedance measurement value when used with the SC600 option in MEAS Z mode See Chapter 6 for TRG use in all cases except MEAS Z mode with the SC600 option Responses measurement value OHM input impedance value in ohms measurement value F
298. frequency to 400 MHz for 500 MHz instruments or 500 MHz for 600 MHz instruments To enter 400 MHz press 4 0 0 M Hz then press ENTER Continue to increase the frequency slowly until the waveform decreases to 4 2 divisions as shown below To increase the frequency slowly fine tune it using the rotary knob To do this press to place a cursor in the Output Display Press again to place it in the frequency field and use 4 and K keys to move it to the digit you want to change Then change the value by turning the rotary knob Continue making small increments in the frequency until the signal drops to 4 2 divisions At 4 2 divisions the signal is at the frequency that corresponds to the 3 dB point 8 25 5520A Operators Manual glo10i eps 6 Remove the input signal by pressing sev 7 Repeat this procedure for the remaining channels on your oscilloscope 8 39 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope The horizontal deflection time base of an oscilloscope is calibrated using a method similar to the vertical gain calibration A time marker signal is generated from the Calibrator and the signal s peaks are matched to the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope 8 40 The Time Marker Function The Time MARKER function which is available through the MARKER menu lets you calibrate the timing response of your oscilloscope To access the MARKER menu press the softkey u
299. from earth chassis ground EARTH Returns whether the internal guard shield is connected or disconnected from earth chassis ground EXTGUARD Connects or disconnects the internal guard shield from the LO binding post EXTGUARD Returns whether the internal guard shields are connected or disconnected from earth chassis ground LOWS Returns whether or not the low terminals are internally open or tied together LOWS Selects whether or not the low terminals are internally open or tied together for dual outputs PRES UNIT Sets the pressure display units PRES UNIT Returns the pressure display units RTD TYPE Sets the Resistance Temperature Detector RTD type RTD TYPE Returns the Resistance Temperature Detector RTD type TC REF Sets whether the internal temperature sensor or an external reference value is used for Thermocouple TC outputs and measurements TC REF Returns the source and value of the temperature being used as a reference for thermocouple simulation and measurement TC TYPE Sets the thermocouple TC temperature type TC TYPE Returns the thermocouple TC type TSENS TYPE Sets temperature sensor type when output is set to a temperature with OUT command TSENS TYPE Returns the temperature sensor type Remote Commands Command Summary by Function 6 6 6 Oscilloscope Commands See Chapter 8 for usage information
300. ftkey under MODE until wavegen appears Output 4 WAVE SCOPE Z OFFSET MODE SCOPE square 1 MO 0 0 V wavegen 4 a square 1 MO volt sine 500 edge tri levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the WAVEGEN menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press oPR To disconnect the signal press stev e WAVE Scrolls through the three types of waveforms that are available You can select a square sine or triangle wave as the output e SCOPE Z Toggles the calibrator s output impedance setting between 500 and 1 e OFFSET Displays the offset of the generated wave To change the offset key in the new value and press enter Using the rotary knob does not change the offset it changes the actual voltage output When you change the offset you must remain within certain limits to avoid clipping the peaks The limit depends on the wave s peak to peak value Specifically the peak excursion equals the absolute value of the offset plus half of the wave s peak to peak value See Wave Generator Specifications at the beginning of this chapter e MODE Indicates you are in WAVEGEN mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus f
301. ge from the Tester Front Panel Operation Sample Applications 4 4 65 Testing Harmonics Amps Performance 4 66 1 20 0 1 10 1 191 20 9 8 Press the VAW button on the Tester until A is displayed above the upper right corner of the harmonics display Press the REF button on the Tester until is displayed in the top status line Press the SMOOTH button on the Tester until 20s is displayed in the top status line of the Tester Connect the calibrator NORMAL output to the V and COM connectors on the Tester Connect the calibrator AUX output to the Current Probe connector on the Tester Set the calibrator output to 7 0 V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 20 mV at 60 Hz on the AUX output Press the WAVE MENUS then the amp REF MENUS softkey and ensure the phase angle is 10 00 degrees Press the HARMONIC MENU softkey and ensure the HARMONIC selection is set to 1 and the FUNDMTL selection is set to normal Press Verify that the harmonic amplitude and phase angle readings displayed by the Tester are within the minimum and maximum limits listed in Table 4 5 Table 4 5 Harmonics Performance for Amps Harmonics screen 5520A AUX Output Fluke Tester Performance Limits Harmonic Amplitude Phase cursor Amplitude Phase mV No deg No MIN MAX MIN MAX 12 20 0 3 20 3 191 20 9 14 26 20 0 13 40 13 19 1 20 9 29 51 200
302. gree of agreement among independent measurements of a quantity under the same conditions resistance A property of a conductor that determines the amount of current that will flow when a given amount of voltage exists across the conductor Resistance is measured in ohms One ohm is the resistance through which one volt of potential will cause one ampere of current to flow resolution The smallest change in quantity that can be detected by a measurement system or device For a given parameter resolution is the smallest increment that can be measured generated or displayed rf radio frequency The frequency range of radio waves from 150 kHz up to the infrared range rms root mean square The value assigned to an ac voltage or current that results in the same power dissipation in a resistance as a dc current or voltage of the same value rms sensor A device that converts ac voltage to dc voltage with great accuracy RMS sensors operate by measuring the heat generated by a voltage through a known resistance 1 power therefore they sense true rms voltage resistance temperature detector RTD A resistance device that provides a proportional resistance output for a temperature of the device Most RTDs are characterized by their resistance at 0 C called the ice point The most common ice point is 100 Q at 0 C The curve of resistance vs temperature can be one of several pt385 0 00385 ohms ohm C and pt3926 0 003926 ohms oh
303. guestion about the effectiveness of instrument earth grounding through the line power cord ground wire The CHASSIS GROUND terminal is internally grounded to the chassis If the 5520A is the location of the ground reference point in a system this binding post can be used for connecting other instruments to earth ground Refer to Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT in Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation for details The AC Power Input Module provides a grounded three prong connector that accepts the line power cord a switch mechanism to select the operating line voltage and a line power fuse See Chapter 2 Preparing for Operation for information on selecting the operating line voltage and fuse rating and replacement information 5520A Operators Manual Front Panel Key Next Section nn013f eps Figure 3 3 SETUP Softkey Menu Tree Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees
304. gure 4 11 The variables for the sine wave are amplitude frequency and dc offset voltage Peak RMS 70 Peak nnO26f eps Figure 4 11 Sine wave 4 37 Triangle wave When the wave selection is tri the triangle wave is present on the calibrator outputs Figure 4 12 The variables for the triangle wave are amplitude frequency and dc offset voltage Whenever a triangle wave is selected the Output Display indicates amplitudes in p p units Peak to Peak nn027f eps Figure 4 12 Triangle Wave 4 38 Square Wave When the wave selection is square a square wave current or voltage signal is present on the calibrator outputs Figure 4 13 The variables for the square wave are duty cycle amplitude frequency and dc offset voltage Whenever a square wave is selected the Output Display indicates amplitude in p p units If the calibrator is set for a single voltage or current output the duty cycle of the signal can be set through the keypad To enter a new duty cycle press the DUTY CYCLE softkey and up to five numeric keys followed by enter The negative going edge of the square wave will move based on the duty cycle setting 4 47 5520A Operators Manual a Period gt Peak to Peak Decrease Duty Cycle 4 Increase Duty Cycle nnO28f eps Figure 4 13 Square Wave and Duty Cycle 4 39 Truncated Sine Wave When the wave selection is truncs a tr
305. hange and the 5520A will beep If you need to reach a different range of values turn the knob quickly to jump to the new range Using and The and keys cause the current value of the signal to jump to a pre determined cardinal value whose amount is determined by the current function These keys are described in more detail under the descriptions for each function Resetting the Oscilloscope Option You can reset all parameters in the 5520A to their default settings at any time during front panel operations by pressing the key on the front panel After resetting the 5520A press to return to the Oscilloscope Calibration Option the Volt menu appears Press to reconnect the signal output 5520A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 93 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope The oscilloscope voltage gain is calibrated by applying a low frequency square wave signal and adjusting its gain to meet the height specified for different voltage levels designated by the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope The signal is applied from the 5520A in Volt mode The specific voltages that you should use for calibration and the graticule line divisions that need to be matched vary for different oscilloscopes and are specified in your oscilloscope s service manual 8 94 The Volt Function The Voltage gain is calibrated using the Volt function This function is accessed through the Volt menu
306. he error queue contains up to 16 entries If many errors occur only the first 15 errors are kept in the queue A 16th entry in the queue is always an error queue overflow error and all later errors are discarded until the queue is at least partially read The first errors are kept because if many errors occur before the user can acknowledge and read them the earliest errors are the most likely to point to the problem The later errors are usually repetitions or consequences of the original problem 5 58 Remote Program Examples 5 59 The following programming examples illustrate ways to handle errors to take measurements take a number of successive readings lock the range and calibrate the Calibrator These excerpts from programs are written in DOS BASIC Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator Commands are processed one at a time as they are received Some commands require a previous condition be set before the command will be accepted by the Calibrator For example the waveform must be SQUARE before the DUTY command will be accepted Using the following programming guidelines will insure that the output is programmed to the desired state e All external connections commands should be programmed first The calibrator will be placed in standby and the output may be changed to accommodate the new external connection The setting may be set even if the present output does not use the setting for example setting the current post whi
307. he last value of the thermocouple measurement in volts 6 9 5520A Operators Manual 6 14 Commands The following is an alphabetical list of all Calibrator commands and queries including common commands and device dependent commands Each command title includes a graphic that indicates remote interface applicability IEEE 488 and RS 232 and command group Sequential Overlapped and Coupled IEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232 Applicability IEEE 488 X RS 232 command and query has a check box indicating applicability to IEEE 488 general purpose interface bus or GPIB and RS 232 remote operations For sorting purposes this list ignores the character that precedes the common commands Sequential Commands X Sequential Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands For more information see Sequential Commands in Chapter 5 Overlapped Commands X Overlapped Commands that require additional time to execute are called overlapped commands because they can overlap the next command before completing execution To be sure an overlapped command is not interrupted during execution use the OPC OPC and WAI commands to detect command completion For more information see Overlapped Commands in Chapter 5 Coupled Commands X Coupled These are called coupled commands examples CUR POST and OUT because t
308. he occurrence of a command error from causing bit 5 ESB in the serial poll status byte to go to 1 you can reset to 0 bit 5 in the ESE register The following sample program accomplishes this by checking the status of the CME bit then toggling it if it is 1 10 THIS PROGRAM RESETS BIT 5 CME IN THE ESE 20 PRI Q6 ESE 33 INITIAL ESE IS CME OPC 30 GOSUB 100 GET AND PRINT INITIAL ESE 40 IF A AND 32 THEN A A 32 CLEAR CME BIT 5 50 PRINT 66 ESE A LOAD ESE WITH NEW VALUE 60 GOSUB 100 GET AND PRIN EW ESE 70 END 100 PRINT 86 ESE ASK FOR ESE CONTENTS 110 INPUT 086 A RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS 120 PRI ESE A 130 RETURN 5 51 Instrument Status Register ISR The Instrument Status Register ISR instrument status register ISR ISR instrument status register gives the controller access to the state of the Calibrator including some of the information presented to the operator on the Control Display and the display annunciators during local operation 5 52 Instrument Status Change Registers There are two registers dedicated to monitoring changes in the ISR These are the ISCRO Instrument Status 1 0 Change Register instrument status change registers ISCRO and DISCRO ISCR1 instrument status change registers an
309. he steps necessary to calibrate a Fluke 80 Series handheld multimeter Note These procedures are included here as an example The 80 Series Service Manual contains the authoritative testing and calibration procedures for 60 Series meters Two procedures are provided The first tests each function and range for compliance to specifications The second is the calibration procedure for the 80 Series meters The 80 Series Service Manual gives instructions for disassembly and access to the pca printed circuit assembly You will need to access the pca for the calibration procedure Before connecting the calibrator to the 80 Series DMM you need to determine what type of cables to use and whether to use or not This decision making process is covered next Cables Fluke 5440A 7002 Low Thermal Cables are recommended for many calibrations connections but they are not specifically required for 80 Series calibration Thermal emf errors that the Low Thermal cables are designed to reduce are not significant when calibrating a 3 1 2 digit meter The cables support the following measurements e AC and dc voltages resistances AC and dc currents up to 20 A EARTH Connection Because the 80 Series DMMs are battery operated their inputs have no connection to earth ground Therefore enabling the calibrator s earth chassis ground to guard and LO is appropriate connection is appropriate Press the key so that the indicator is lit and
310. hen the ambient temperature changes by more than 5 C See Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation 1 28 Frequency Specifications Frequency 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty Range teal 5 C Jitter Resolution 0 01 Hz to 119 99 Hz 0 01 Hz 120 0 Hz to 1199 9 Hz 0 1 Hz 1 200 kHz to 11 999 kHz 1 0 Hz 2 5 ppm 5 uHz 1 100 nS 12 00 kHz to 119 99 kHz 10 Hz 120 0 kHz to 1199 9 kHz 100 Hz 1 200 MHz to 2 000 MHz 1 kHz 1 With REF CLK set to ext the frequency uncertainty of the 5520A is the uncertainty of the external 10 MHz clock 5 uHz The amplitude of the 10 MHz external reference clock signal should be between 1 V and 5 V p p 1 26 Introduction and Specifications Additional Specifications 1 1 29 Harmonics 2nd to 50th Specifications Fundamental Voltages Voltages Amplitude Frequency 1 NORMAL Terminals Currents AUX Terminals Uncertainty Same of 10 Hz to 45 Hz 33 mV to 32 9999 V 3 3 mA to 2 99999 A 10 mV to 5 V output as 45 Hz to 65 Hz 33 mV to 1000 V 3 3 mA to 20 5 A 10 mVto 5 V the eguivalent 65 Hz to 500 Hz 33 mV to 1000 V 33 mA to 20 5 A 100 mV to 5 V single output but twice the 500 Hz to 5 kHz 330 mV to 1000 V 33 mA to 20 5 A 100 mV to 5 V floor adder 5 kHz to 10 kHz 3 3 V to 1000 V 33 mA to 100 mV to 5 V 329 9999 mA 10 kHz to 30 kHz 3 3 V to 1000 V 33 mA to 100 mV to 329 9999 mA 3 29999 V 1 The maximum freguency of the harmonic output is 30 kHz 10 kHz for 3 V to 5
311. hey couple in a compound command sequence Care must be taken to be sure the action of one command does not disable the action of a second command and thereby cause a fault For more information see Coupled Commands in Chapter 5 CFREG IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Capacitance Frequency query Returns the optimal frequency for stimulus when measuring or calibrating capacitance output Response value ofthe optimal frequency Example CFREQ returns 1 0 2 Returns 100 Hz as the optimal frequency for the selected capacitance output 1 0 uF for this example The return is 0 if not sourcing capacitance CLOCK IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Real Time Clock command Sets the real time clock time only or date and time To set the date the CALIBRATION switch must be in the ENABLE position Parameters 1 optional year in the format YYYY 2 optional month in the format MM 3 optional day in the format DD 4 hour in the format HH 5 minute in the format MM 6 second in the format SS Remote Commands Commands 6 Examples CLOCK 1998 6 1 9 52 10 sets clock to June 1 1998 9 52 10 AM CLOCK 13 10 10 sets clock time only to 1 10 10 PM CLOC
312. hrough the 10 MHZ OUT BNC connector Sets the waveforms for ac outputs Returns the waveforms of the output Activates 2 wire or 4 wire or deactivates impedance compensation Returns whether or not impedance compensation is active and if active which type Remote Commands Command Summary by Function 6 6 8 Pressure Measurement Commands DAMPEN DAMPEN PRES PRES MEAS VAL ZERO MEAS ZERO MEAS Activates or deactivates dampening averaging of pressure readings Returns whether dampening averaging of pressure readings is active Queries the attached pressure module for its model and serial number Changes the operating mode to pressure measurement Returns the last thermocouple pressure or for the SC600 impedance measurement value Zeros the pressure module or sets the zero offset for capacitance measurement using the SC600 Returns the zero offset for the pressure module or capacitance measurement using the 5 600 6 9 RS 232 Host Port Commands P lt cntl gt p Control P character prints the serial poll string See SPLSTR for string format C cntl c Control C character clears the device T lt cntl gt t Control T character executes a group trigger LOCAL Puts the Calibrator into the local state LOCKOUT Puts the Calibrator into the lockout state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 LLO Local Lockout message REM
313. iage return line feed Example SP SET returns 9600 TERM XON DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE CRLF Returns the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port as shown when set to the factory default values 6 43 5520A Operators Manual IEEE 488 X RS 232 X SPLSTR X Serial Poll String command Sets the Serial Poll String string up to 40 characters which is saved in the Calibrator non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands The SPLSTR is sent to the host over the serial interface when a P lt cntl gt P character is sent The default format is SPL 02x 02x 04x 04x Sequential Overlapped Coupled where the term 02x 8 bits means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 2 hex digits and 04x 16 bits means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 4 hex digits The string representations are SPL STB ESR ISCRO ISCR1 See the commands respectively STB ESR ISCRO and ISCR1 A typical string in the default format sent to the hostis SPL 44 00 0000 1000 This command is for format For values instead of format enter a P lt cntl gt p character Also see the SROSTR command Parameter lt string gt n n represents the NEWLINE
314. ibrator uses your voltage setting to automatically set the range limit that provides the most accurate output When set to locked the range limit remains fixed and you can decrease the voltage down to the bottom of the range For example assume the range limit is 40 mV If you enter 5 mV with auto selected the calibrator will automatically change the range limit to 10 mV and output 5 mV from within the 10 mV range However if you start with the 40 mV range locked and then enter 5 mV the calibrator will output 5 mV from within the 40 mV range 8 23 5520A Operators Manual The default range setting is auto which should always be used unless you are troubleshooting discontinuities in your oscilloscope s vertical gain The range setting will always return to auto after you leave LEVSINE mode e MODE Indicates you are in LEVSINE mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other calibration modes 8 37 Sweeping Through a Frequency Range When you change frequencies using the sweep method the output sine wave sweeps through a specified range of frequencies This feature lets you identify the frequency at which the oscilloscope s signal exhibits certain behavior you can quickly see the frequency response of the oscilloscope Before you start this procedure make sure you are in the MORE OPTIONS menu and the sine wave is displayed on the oscilloscope Perform the following procedure to sweep through fr
315. ical to local except the Calibrator will go into the remote with lockout state instead of the remote state when it receives a remote command 5 19 Remote State When the Calibrator is placed in remote either via RS 232 REMOTE command or via IEEE 488 asserting the REN line it enters the remote state In the remote state the Output Display continues to display the output setting or measurement as in local operation The Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local te 4 The left side of the Control Display shows information regarding the present output function However front panel operation is restricted to use of the power switch and the Go To Local softkeys Pressing either of these softkeys using RS 232 to send the command LOCAL or IEEE 488 to send the GTL Go To Local message returns the Calibrator to the local state 5 20 Remote with Lockout State When the Calibrator is placed in lockout either via RS 232 LOCKOUT command or via the IEEE 488 message LLO the 5520A front panel controls are totally locked out In remote with lockout the Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local RI HE e The left side of the Control Display shows information regarding the present output function However front panel operation is restricted to use of the power switch To return the Calibrator to the local with lockout state send the RS 232 LOCAL command or the IEEE 488 GTL
316. ifications that satisfies the calibration requirements of a measurement system or device The minimum use specifications are usually determined by maintaining a specified test uncertainty ratio between the calibration equipment and the unit under test noise A signal containing no useful information that is superimposed on a desired or expected signal normal mode noise An undesired signal that appears between the terminals of a device A 4 Appendices A Glossary offset error Same as zero error The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is applied is its offset or zero error parameters Independent variables in a measurement process such as temperature humidity test lead resistance etc power factor The ratio of actual power used in a circuit expressed in watts to the power which is apparently being drawn from the source expressed in volt amperes precision The precision of a measurement process is the coherence or the closeness to the one result of all measurement results High precision for example would result in a tight pattern of arrow hits on a target without respect to where on the target the tight pattern falls predictability A measure of how accurately the output value of a device can be assumed after a known time following calibration If a device is highly stable it is also predictable If a device is not highly stable but its value changes at the same rate every time after calibration its
317. imal point key more than once in a single number will sound the beeper The Polarity key changes the polarity of the output for dc voltage or dc current functions Press the key then enter to toggle the output polarity The SCOPE TRIG Scope Trigger BNC connector is used to trigger the oscilloscope during oscilloscope calibration This is active only when an oscilloscope option is installed The SCOPE OUT Oscilloscope BNC connector is used for outputs during oscilloscope calibration This is active only when an oscilloscope calibration option is installed Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 S 6 The TC Thermocouple minijack is used for thermocouple simulation during thermometer calibration and thermocouple measurements You must use the correct thermocouple wire and plug when using this connector For example if simulating a type K thermocouple use type K thermocouple wire and type K plug for making connections The 20A terminal is the source of current output when the 20 A range is selected 3 A 20 A The AUX Auxiliary Output terminals are used for ac and dc current outputs the second voltage output in dual voltage modes and ohms sense for 2 wire and 4 wire compensated resistance and capacitance measurements and RTD simulation The GUARD terminal is always connected internally to the internal guard shield This shield is tied to the NORMAL LO signal ground inside the
318. in the Setup Menu are shown below OTHER OUTPUT DISPLAY REMOTE SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SSE O L nnO65f eps The list below describes submenus accessed by each softkey OTHER SETUP Opens a menu that lets you toggle the degree reference between the 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard ipts 68 and the 1990 International Temperature Standard its 90 factory default This is also where you set the clock and set the power up and reset defaults for the SC 600 Oscilloscope Calibration Options s Overload test safety timeout function OVLD T and displayed error units For Main software version 1 9 or greater this is where you configure the instrument for best operation with a 50 Hz line frequency OUTPUT SETUP Opens a menu to change the power up and reset defaults for current and voltage output limits default thermocouple and RTD types set the phase reference internal or external phase reference source impedance for dBm display and pressure units DISPLAY SETUP Opens submenus to set the brightness and contrast of both the Control Display and Output Display REMOTE SETUP Allows you to change the configuration of the two RS 232 ports SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT and IEEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB See Chapter 5 Remote Operation for more information Utility Functions Menu The Setup Menu softkey labeled UTILITY FUNCTNS Utility Functions provides access to
319. inals query Returns whether or not the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal are internally tied together default or are open Response OPEN disconnected NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals TIED connected NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals Example LOWS returns OPEN Returns OPEN when the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are not tied together MULT X IEEE 488 x RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Multiply command Multiplies the reference magnitude as selected with the EDIT command or default to the primary output The reference magnitude is the present reference in either direct mode or in error mode Parameter value multiplier expressed as a floating point number Remote Commands 6 Commands Example MULT 2 5 Multiply the existing reference by 2 5 creating a new reference For example an existing reference of 1 V is multiplied to 2 5 V NEWREF X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled New Reference command Sets the new reference to the present Calibrator output value and exit the error mode if selected For example you might edit the Calibrator output using the EDI T and INCR commands and then use the NEWREF command to establish a new reference point and exit the error mode This is the same a
320. ine Marker Polarity Selectable Line Video Marker 5520A Operators Manual 8 12 8 14 Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications Table 8 12 Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications Scope input selected 50 0 1 MO Measurement Range 40 O to 60 Q 500 kQ to 1 5 MQ Uncertainty 0 1 96 0 1 96 8 15 Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications Table 8 13 Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications Scope input selected 1 MO Measurement Range 5 pF to 50 pF Uncertainty 5 of input 0 5 pF 1 1 Measurement made within 30 minutes of capacitance zero reference Scope option must be selected for at least five minutes prior to any capacitance measurement including the zero process 8 16 Overload Measurement Specifications Table 8 14 Overload Measurement Specifications Source Typical On current Typical Off current Maximum Time Limit DC Voltage indication indication or AC 1 kHz 5Vto9V 100 mA to 180 mA 10 mA setable 1s to 60s 5520A SC600 Option 8 Oscilloscope Connections 8 17 Oscilloscope Connections Using the cable supplied with the SC600 Option connect the SCOPE output on the Calibrator to one of the channel connectors on your oscilloscope see Figure 8 1 To use the external trigger connect the TRIG OUT output on the Calibrator to the external trigger connection on your oscilloscop
321. information is returned by query and interface messages are queued and returned by command RS 232 Pass Through Mode The RS 232 pass through mode is used to pass commands from the PC to a UUT but via the Calibrator This configuration is used when the UUT has an RS 232 port Commands are sent to the UUT by using the UUT SEND command returns use the UUT_RECV query and UUT_F LUSH clears the UUT receive buffer in the Calibrator Types of Commands The commands for the Calibrator can be grouped into one or more categories depending on how they function Each category is described below Device Dependent Commands Device dependent commands are unique to the Calibrator An example of a device dependent command is OUT 100 V 1 A 60 HZ instructing the Calibrator to source 100 watts of ac power 5 26 5487 5 20 Remote Operation Using Commands 5 Common Commands Common commands are defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard and are common to most bus devices Common commands always begin with an character Common commands are available whether you are using the IEEE 488 or RS 232 interface for remote control An example of a common command is IDN instructing the Calibrator to return the instrument identification string Query Commands Query commands request information which is returned as the command executes or placed in a buffer until requested An example of a query which always ends with a question
322. input capacitance value in farads measurement value NONE no measurement is available Example TRG returns 1 00 03 1 input impedance Note You can also use the VAL query to return an impedance measurement value with the SC600 option VAL returns the last measurement whereas TRG gets a new measurement Responses are the same as shown above for the TRG command See Chapter 6 for VAL use with thermocouple measurements 5520A SC600 Option 8 Verification Tables 8 56 Verification Tables The verification test points areprovided here as a guide when verification to one year specifications is desired 8 57 DC Voltage Verification Table 8 16 DC Voltage Verification 1 MO output impedance unless noted Nominal Measured Value Deviation 0 0 00004 0 00125 0 000040625 0 00125 0 000040625 0 00249 0 000041245 0 00249 0 000041245 0 0025 0 00004125 0 0025 0 00004125 0 00625 0 000043125 0 00625 0 000043125 0 0099 0 00004495 0 0099 0 00004495 0 01 0 000045 0 01 0 000045 0 0175 0 00004875 0 0175 0 00004875 0 0249 0 00005245 0 0249 0 00005245 0 025 0 0000525 0 025 0 0000525 0 0675 0 00007375 0 0675 0 00007375
323. ion Tables 6 66 Edge Verification Amplitude Table 8 25 Edge Verification Amplitude Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Hz Value V p p V p p V p p 0 005 1kHz 0 0003 0 005 10kHz 0 0003 0 005 100kHz 0 0003 0 01 100kHz 0 0004 0 025 100kHz 0 0007 0 05 100kHz 0 0012 0 1 100kHz 0 0022 0 25 100kHz 0 0052 0 5 100 kHz 0 0102 100 kHz 0 0202 25 100kHz 0 0502 25 10kHz 0 0502 25 1 kHz 0 0502 8 67 Edge Verification Frequency Table 8 26 Edge Verification Frequency Nominal Frequency Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec 25 1kHz 0 0025 25 10kHz 0 025 25 100kHz 0 25 25 1MHz 25 25 10MHz 25 6 68 Edge Verification Duty Cycle Table 8 27 Edge Verification Duty Cycle Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value V p p Value from 50 96 Frequency 25 1MHz 5 8 53 5520A Operators Manual 8 54 8 69 Edge Verification Rise Time 8 70 Nominal Value V p p Table 8 28 Edge Verification Rise Time Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value s ns ns Frequency 0 25 1 kHz 0 3 0 25 100 kHz 03ns 0 25 10 MHz 0 3 0 5 1 2 03ns
324. ion Verification eese 8 117 Wave Generator Function Verification 1 Load 8 118 Wave Generator Function Verification 50 Q Load 8 119 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Amplitude 8 120 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Flatness 8 121 Leveled Sine Wave Function Verification Frequency 8 122 Marker Generator Function Verification PC COSSOMGS e 9 Higiene Er 9 2 Rack Mount Kit iieri eet maerore ODPO aken ni erede 9 3 IEEE 488 Interface Cables eene 9 4 RS 232 Null Modem Cables eene 9 5 RS 232 Modem Cables inii itte rn tree eee crate ide 9 6 O500A EBEADS ittis tiere eie eed eret t Re ee teta er 5520A Operators Manual Appendices GI cria ASCII and IEBE 488 Bus 5 232 488 Cables and Connectors C 1 Creating a Visual Basic Test Program D 1 Error Messages iudice i ese er ROTER E Pes i i e viii Table Title 2 l Standard Equipment uiui ettet epe iEn repone 2 2 Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke eee 3 1 Front Panel
325. ion out of range Pulse width must be 1 255 Can t set range directly now Not a range for this function Cant set TD pulse now ZERO MEAS only for C or PRES meas That requires a SC option That requires a SC600 option Time limit must be 1s 60s Can t set ref phase now ZERO MEAS reading not valid Cant set dampen now Cant turn EXGRD on now Outguard watchdog timeout Power up RAM test failed Power up GPIB test failed Saving to NV memory failed NV memory invalid NV invalid so default loaded NV obsolete so default loaded Serial parity error s Serial framing error 96s Serial overrun error 96s Serial characters dropped s Report timeout aborted Sequence failed during diag Guard xing link diag fail Inguard bus r w diag fail A6 A D comm fault A6 A D or DAC fault A6 DAC fine channel fault A6 DCI loop fault ACI loop fault A6 TC fault A6 loop fault A6 ACV loop fault A6 33 mV divider fault A6 330 mV DC fault 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE F
326. ion overload 10s at test safety timeout Temperature standard its 90 G1 Host interface gpib IEEE 488 at UUT serial interface 8 bits 1 stop bit xon xoff parity none 9600 baud Host serial interface term 8 bits 1 stop bit xon xoff K L M N parity none 9600 baud CRLF 012 000 GPIB Port Address 4 lo Display brightness Note level 1 0 Display contrast Note level 7 7 dBm impedance 600 Q ls Pressure units psi S RTD type pt385 si Thermocouple type K 51 Phase reference 0 00 10 MHz reference clock internal S2 Current limits 20 5A U Voltage limits 1020 V V Note Output Display and Control Display respectively There are 8 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 31 4 33 4 35 Contents Introduction Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Turning on the Warming up the Calibrator eene Using the Softkeys 5 iita IR iaia Using the Setup Menu nena Using the Instrument Setup Menu eese Utility Functions 2 2 nennen Using the Format EEPROM Menu Resetting the Calibrator nena Zeroing the Calibrator i eii iecit etd pede rae arta Using the Operate and Standby Modes Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT eere Recommended Cable and Connector
327. ion using a Terminal to set up the 5520A RS 232 Host port to match the parameters of the PC COM port After Step 9 return to this procedure and continue to Step 3 below 3 On the Terminal screen type UUT SEND lt uut command gt where uut command is the command you selected for the UUT response then press Enter Observe the UUT responds For example to send the command REMS to a UUT use UUT SEND REMS n and press Enter Note the use of n which indicates a Carriage Return CR as the end of line character Other characters include Line Feed t Tab Nb Backspace and Form Feed If your UUT commands require an end of line character select one or more of the above 5 14 Remote Operation 5 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control The characters UUT SEND lt uut command gt should have appeared as they were entered If they did not appear on the screen the RS 232 interface between the PC and 5520A Host port is not operating Review the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure and correct the problem If the UUT command does not execute refer to step 3 of the RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure procedure to verify the RS 232 UUT port parameters Also check the cable for UUT connection was a modem not null modem cable Be sure your command was entered correctly had the proper end of line character s if required When finished testing UUT commands select the E
328. isions as shown below To increase the frequency slowly fine tune it using the rotary knob To do this press to place a cursor in the Output Display Press again to place it in the frequency field and use the 4 and K keys to move it to the digit you want to change Then change the value by turning the rotary knob Continue making small increments in the frequency until the signal drops to 4 2 divisions At 4 2 divisions the signal is at the frequency that corresponds to the 3 dB point gl010i bmp Remove the input signal by pressing sre Repeat this procedure for the remaining channels on your oscilloscope 8 79 5520A Operators Manual 8 106 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope The horizontal deflection time base of an oscilloscope is calibrated using a method similar to the vertical gain calibration A time marker signal is generated from the 5520A and the signal s peaks are matched to the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope 8 107 The Time Marker Function The Time Marker function which is available through the Marker menu lets you calibrate the timing response of your oscilloscope To access the Marker menu press the softkey under MODE until marker appears Output at SCOPE TEIG MODE terminal 50 OFF marker OFF marker 1 Did valt 100 edge devs ime gl033i eps Each option in the Marker menu is described below
329. isting commands before continuing WAVE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped X Coupled Waveform command Sets the waveforms for ac outputs If the Calibrator is sourcing one output one parameter is required If the Calibrator is sourcing two outputs two parameters are required or one parameter to set the waveform to both outputs Waveform choices are SINE sine wave TRI triangle wave SQUARE square wave TRUNCS truncated sine wave or NONE waveform does not apply Parameter 1st waveform SINE TRI SQUARE TRUNCS NONE 2nd waveform SINE TRI SQUARE TRUNCS NONE Example WAVE SINE SQUARE Set the waveforms for a dual output to Sine wave on the primary output Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals and Square wave on the secondary output front panel AUX or 20A terminals WAVE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Waveform query Returns the waveform types for ac outputs Waveform choices are SINE sine wave TRI triangle wave SQUARE square wave TRUNCS truncated sine wave or NONE waveform does not apply Responses lt lst waveform SINE TRI SQUARE TRUNCS NONE 2nd waveform SINE TRI SQUARE TRUNCS NONE Remote Commands Commands 6 Example WAVE returns SQUARE NONE Returns SQUA
330. ithout a remote port Controller 5520A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT with an IEEE 488 remote port or to 5520A BP RS 232 nm SERIAL 2 Port x COM Port E UUT y v 3 Port 5520A Calibrator Controller System for a UUT with an RS 232 remote port NN300F EPS Figure 5 1 Typical IEEE 488 Remote Control Connections 5 5 5520A Operators Manual RS 232 The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port connects the PC and Calibrator while the SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port acts as a pass through port passing commands from the PC to UUT via the Calibrator You can write your own computer programs using the command set or operate the PC as a terminal and enter individual commands or you can purchase optional Fluke MET CAL or 5520 CAL software for RS 232 system operations Typical RS 232 remote configurations are shown in Figure 5 2 After configuring the IEEE 488 or RS 232 port for remote operation you are ready to begin using the command set The operation of the command set is described under Using Commands in this chapter A summary of remote commands is in Chapter 6 Remote Commands 5 2 Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control The Calibrator is fully programmable for use on the IEEE Standard 488 1 interface bus The IEEE 488 interface is also
331. itude on an Oscilloscope 8 97 Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This example procedure describes how to use the Volt menu to calibrate the oscilloscope s amplitude gain During calibration you will need to set different voltages and verify that the gain matches the graticule lines on the oscilloscope according to the specifications for your particular oscilloscope See your oscilloscope manual for the recommended calibration settings and appropriate gain values Before you start this procedure verify that you are running the oscilloscope option in Volt mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu oU pee SCOPE e MDL MODE SCOFE i Ma volt A 4 si Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the vertical gain gl026i eps 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope making sure the oscilloscope is terminated at the proper impedance 1 MQ for this example Verify that the key on the 5520A is lit indicating that the signal is connected 2 Key in the voltage level that is recommended for your oscilloscope For example to enter 20 mV press 2 0 v then press enter See Keying ina Value earlier in this chapter 3 Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary The waveform should be similar to the one shown below with the gain at exactly the amount specified for the calibration settings for your oscilloscope This exa
332. just DISPLAY i ami DISPLAY Contrasti i levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 There are eight levels of contrast 0 to 7 for the Output Display and Control Display Each may have its own level of contrast The factory defaults are 7 and 7 Adjust UIS FLAY poo DISPLAY Bright i i i levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 There are eight levels of brightness 0 to 7 for the Output Display and Control Display Each may have its own level of contrast The factory defaults are 1 and 0 TEMP jid amp dBm iPRESUMI SET SETUP SETUP i 600 psi 5 la laj la LA to S1 to S2 300 mmHa lk CdBEv3 inHa 1200 0 zn LHD 75 mH Si mbar iun E 135 cme 150 in He 01 6 aun nn018f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 5520A Operators Manual pt385 TC TYPE 5009289 3859 1 PESTZE niliz cult L Jdin U Tdin ide ime EH 0 00 i 1 REF CLE int LA xt A DISPLAY OF CHANGE ENTRY LIMITS VOLTAGE i i CURRENT AJ TA to V to U The values set here become the new limits and can be changed only with new entries or returned to factory defaults using Format NV Memory SETUP see menu F
333. kHz 30 kHz 50 kHz 1 0999 nF 1 1 nF to 0 38 0 01 nF 0 5 0 01 nF 0 1 pF 10 Hz to 3 kHz 30 kHz 50 kHz 3 2999 nF 3 3 nF to 0 19 0 01 nF 0 25 0 01 nF 0 1 pF 10 Hz to 1 kHz 20 kHz 25 kHz 10 9999 nF 11 nF to 0 19 0 1 nF 0 25 0 1 nF 0 1 pF 10 Hz to 1 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 32 9999 nF 33 nF to 0 19 0 1 nF 0 25 0 1 nF 1 pF 10 Hz to 1 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 109 999 nF 110 nF to 0 19 0 3 nF 0 25 0 3 nF 1 pF 10 Hz to 1 kHz 2 5 kHz 3 5 kHz 329 999 nF 0 33 uF to 0 19 1 nF 0 25 1 nF 10 pF 10 Hz to 600 Hz 1 5 kHz 2 kHz 1 09999 uF 1 1 uF to 0 19 3 nF 0 25 3 nF 10 pF 10 Hz to 300 Hz 800 Hz 1 kHz 3 29999 uF 3 3 uF to 0 19 10 nF 0 25 10 nF 100 pF 10 Hz to 150 Hz 450 Hz 650 Hz 10 9999 uF 11 uF to 0 30 30 nF 0 40 30 nF 100 pF 10 Hz to 120 Hz 250 Hz 350 Hz 32 9999 uF 33 uF to 0 34 100 nF 0 45 100 nF 1 nF 10 Hz to 80 Hz 150 Hz 200 Hz 109 999 uF 110 uF to 0 34 300 nF 0 45 300 nF 1 nF 0 to 50 Hz 80 Hz 120 Hz 329 999 uF 0 33 uF to 0 34 1 uF 0 45 1 uF 10 nF 0 to 20 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 1 09999mF 1 1 mF to 0 34 8 uF 0 45 3 uF 10 nF 0 to 6 Hz 30 Hz 40 Hz 3 2999 mF 3 3 mF to 0 34 10 uF 0 45 10 uF 100 nF 0 to 2 Hz 15 Hz 20 Hz 10 9999 mF 11 mF to 0 7 30 uF 0 75 30 uF 100 nF 0 to 0 6 Hz 7 5 Hz 10 Hz 32 9999 mF 33 mF to 1 0 100 uF 1 1 100 uF 10 uF 0 to 0 2 Hz 3Hz 5Hz 110 mF 1 The output is continuously variable from 190 pF to 110 mF 2 Specifications apply to both dc charge discharge capacitance meters an
334. l 1 11 5520A Service Manual The 5520A Service Manual can be ordered through your local Fluke Sales or Service representative see Service Information in Chapter 2 The 5520A Service Manual includes theory of operation performance testing maintenance and calibration information 1 8 Introduction and Specifications 1 Specifications 1 12 Specifications The following tables list the 5520A specifications All specifications are valid after allowing a warm up period of 30 minutes or twice the time the 5520A has been turned off For example if the 5520A has been turned off for 5 minutes the warm up period is 10 minutes All specifications apply for the temperature and time period indicated For temperatures outside of L 5 C t is the ambient temperature when the 5520A was calibrated the temperature coefficient as stated in the General Specifications must be applied The specifications also assume the Calibrator is zeroed every seven days or whenever the ambient temperature changes more than 5 C The tightest ohms specifications are maintained with a zero cal every 12 hours within 1 C of use See Zeroing the Calibrator in Chapter 4 Also see additional specifications later in this chapter for information on extended specifications for ac voltage and current The dimensional outline for the 5520A Calibrator is shown in Figure 1 3 43 2 17
335. l operation If the front panel is locked out the Control Display shows the softkey REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL LOCK OUT See the LOCKOUT command To unlock the front panel use the LOCAL command or cycle the Calibrator power switch None REMOTE Parameter Example Place the Calibrator in the remote state and display this state on the front panel Control Display with a softkey REMOTE CONTROL 6 39 5520A Operators Manual 6 40 STR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Report String command Loads the user report string The user report string can be read on the Control Display in local operation and appears on calibration reports The CALIBRATION switch must be set to ENABLE Sequential command Parameter String of up to 40 characters STR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Report String query Returns the user report string The user report string can be read on the Control Display in local operation and appears on calibration reports Sequential command Parameter None Response String Up to 40 characters RST X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Reset Instrument command Resets the Calibrator to the power up state RST holds off
336. l with a mercury anode a cadmium mercury amalgam cathode and a cadmium sulfate solution as the electrolyte systematic errors Errors in repeated measurement results that remain constant or vary in a predictable way temperature coefficient A factor per C deviation from a nominal value or range that the uncertainty of an instrument increases This specification is necessary to account for the thermal coefficients in a calibrator s analog circuitry test uncertainty ratio The numerical ratio of the uncertainty of the measurement system or device being calibrated to the uncertainty of the measurement system or device used as the calibrator Also called test accuracy ratio thermal emf The voltage generated when two dissimilar metals joined together are heated thermocouple Two dissimilar metals that when welded together develop a small voltage dependent on the relative temperature between the hotter and colder junction traceability The ability to relate individual measurement results to national standards or nationally accepted measurement systems through an unbroken chain of comparisons i e a calibration audit trail Measurements measurement systems or devices have traceability to the designated standards if and only if scientifically rigorous evidence is produced in a continuing basis to show that the measurement process is producing measurement results for which the total measurement uncertainty relative to national or o
337. le measurements Remote Commands Commands 6 TC OTCD Xx IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Open Detection command Activates or deactivates the open thermocouple detection circuit in thermocouple measurement mode Once set the Calibrator retains open thermocouple detection circuit setting until power off or reset Parameters ON turn on thermocouple detection circuit default OFF turn off thermocouple detection circuit Example TC_OTCD ON Activate the open thermocouple detection circuit If an open thermocouple is detected this condition is displayed on the front panel TC_OTCD X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Open Detection query Returns the status of the open thermocouple detection circuit in thermocouple measurement mode Responses ON thermocouple detection circuit is on OFF thermocouple detection circuit is off Example TC OTCD returns ON Returns ON when the open thermocouple detection circuit is activated TC REF x IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Reference command Sets whether the internal temperature sensor INT or an external reference value EXT is used for Thermocouple T
338. le sourcing voltage e The output and output mode should be programmed next with the OUT command other output parameters such as impedance compensation offset and waveforms should be programmed next The DUTY command must follow the WAVE command e The error status should be checked with the ERR command The calibrator will not process the OPER command if an unacknowledged error exists e Finally the Calibrator should be placed in operate with the OPER command A controller program first needs to initialize the interface and the Calibrator Refer to following sample program 10 INIT PORT 0 REMOTE 6 PUT THE 5520A INTO THE REMOTE STATE 20 PRINT 86 RST OUT 10V OPER RESET THE 5520A PROGRAM IT TO OUTPUT 10 VOLTS DC If you wish to use SRQs first use the SRE ESE and ISCE commands to enable the desired event Refer to Checking 5520A Status 5 45 5520A Operators Manual You retrieve instrument parameters with a query a programming command that ends with a question mark 200 PRINT 86 FUNC RETRIEVE OUTPUT FUNCTION 210 INPUT LINE 66 A 220 PRINT Function is A 230 PRINT 6 ONTIME RETRIEVE ON TIME 240 INPUT LINE 66 AS 250 PRINT The instrument has been on for A minutes This program generates the following sample outpu
339. letion For more information see Overlapped Commands in Chapter 5 Coupled Commands X Coupled SCOPE and OUT IMP are coupled commands because they can be coupled combined with other commands to form a compound command sequence Care must be taken to ensure that commands are not coupled in a way that may cause them to disable each other since this may result in a fault For more information see Coupled Commands in Chapter 5 8 83 5520A Operators Manual 8 84 SCOPE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Programs the oscilloscope calibration option hardware if installed The instrument settings are determined by this command s parameter Once in SCOPE mode use the OUT command to program new output OPER STBY OPC OPC all operate as described in Chapter 6 The state of the oscilloscope s output while in SCOPE mode is reflected by the bit in the ISR that is assigned to SETTLED The FUNC query returns SDCV SACV LEVSINE MARKER EDGE and WAVEGEN for the corresponding oscilloscope modes Parameters Example OFF VOLT EDGE MARKER WAVEGEN Turns the oscilloscope hardware off Programs 0 V 0 Hz output at the NORMAL terminals standby Oscilloscope ac and dc v
340. librator Controller 5 8 nn307f bmp Figure 5 4 Testing the RS 232 Host Port Terminal This procedure uses the Terminal accessory supplied with Windows or equal to test RS 232 Host port operation To use this method you must select term as the Remote I F in Step 4 in the procedure RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure Visual Basic This procedure uses Visual Basic see Appendix D to test RS 232 Host port and RS 232 UUT port operation Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 Host port operation using the Windows Terminal accessory or equal 1 Complete the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5520A for RS 232 Host port operation Note the RS 232 Host port parameters that you selected in this procedure 2 Connect the selected COM port on the PC to the 5520A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port using a standard null modem RS 232 cable See Appendix C for information on RS 232 cables and connectors 3 Open Windows to the Program Manager screen on your PC Open Terminal from the Accessory group of Program Manager below If a terminal configuration file already exists e g host t rm select the desired file using the Open command from the File menu and go to Step 7 Otherwise go to Step 5 13 5520A Operators Manual 5 14 Terminal Untitled BES File Edit Settings Phone Transfers Help
341. llowed when the frequency is less than 1 kHz and the amplitude is greater than or equal to 0 33 A Parameters OFF turns off the inductive load compensation circuitry ON turns on the inductive load compensation circuitry Example LCOMP ON LCOMP X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Inductive compensation query Returns whether inductive load compensation for ac current output is active Responses character OFF Inductive load compensation circuitry is off character ON Inductive load compensation circuitry is on Example LCOMP returns ON Remote Commands 6 Commands LIMIT IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Limit command Sets the maximum permissible output magnitude negative and positive for voltage and current which is saved in the Calibrator non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands Both negative and positive values must be entered Once set the Calibrator retains the limit settings until either another limit is entered or the FORMAT SETUP command resets the limits and all other defaults to the factory settings 1000 V 11 A See the FORMAT command The magnitude of the limit has the following effect on different waveforms
342. llowing the controller to send another data byte The calibrator clears the input buffer on power up and on receiving the DCL Device Clear or SDC Selected Device Clear messages from the controller RS 232 Under RS 232 C serial port remote control using S lt Cntl gt S XOFF protocol the Calibrator issues a S XOFF when the input buffer becomes 80 full The calibrator issues a Q lt Cntl gt Q when it has read enough of the input buffer so that it is less than 40 full When using RTS Request to Send protocol selected as part of the RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure the serial interface asserts and unasserts RTS in response to same conditions as for XON XOFF protocol 5 49 5520A Operators Manual 5 50 Chapter 6 Remote Commands Contents 6 1 6 2 Command Summary by Function 6 3 Common Commands 0 400 enne enne 6 4 Error Mode 6 5 External Connection Commands eese 6 6 Oscilloscope Commands eese 6 7 Output Commands esent teet pete Eee dere dudes 6 8 Pressure Measurement Commandscommands remote pressure mMeas rement PD 6 9 RS 232 Host Port Commands eee 6 10 RS 232 UUT Port Commands esee 6 11 Setup and Utility 6 12 Status 5 02 44 4
343. low amplitude signals You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing H e V DIV MENU Opens the voltage scaling menu which lets you select the scale of the signal in volts per division This menu is described below in detail under The V DIV Menu 5520A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope 8 27 8 28 e MODE Indicates you are in VOLT mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes The V DIV Menu The V DIV menu shown below sets the number of volts denoted by each division on the oscilloscope This menu provides alternative methods for changing the output amplitude that may be more convenient for certain oscilloscope applications To access the V DIV menu press V DIV from the VOLT menu 20 00 mV div up down rN 1 mV 0 5 V 2 mV 1 V 5 mV 2 V 10 mv 5 V 20 mV 10 V 50 mv 20 V 100 mv 50 V 200 mv 100 V Each item in the V DIV menu is described below 1 MODE down volt edge DIV up 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 levsine marker wavegen video pulse meas 2 overld e V div Changes the number of volts per division in the Output Display so that the values selected correspond to the oscilloscope s input sensitivity VOLTS DIV The available settings shown in the figure above are provided in 1 2 5 step increments Press the softkey under UP to increase the volts per division Press
344. ltage replacing the fuse and connecting to line power Instructions for cable connections other than line power can be found in the following chapters UUT Unit Under Test connections Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation EEE 488 parallel interface connection Chapter 5 Remote Operation e RS 222C serial interface connection Chapter 5 Remote Operation Unpacking and Inspection The calibrator is shipped in a container designed to prevent damage during shipping Inspect the calibrator carefully for damage and immediately report any damage to the shipper Instructions for inspection and claims are included in the shipping container When you unpack the calibrator check for all the standard equipment listed in Table 2 1 and check the shipping order for any additional items ordered Refer to Chapter 9 Accessories for more information Report any shortage to the place of purchase or to the nearest Fluke Service Center see Service Information in this section performance test is provided in Chapter 7 Maintenance If reshipping the calibrator use the original container If it is not available you can order a new container from Fluke by indicating the Calibrator s model and serial number Table 2 1 Standard Equipment Item Model or Part Number Calibrator 5520A Line Power Cord See Table 2 2 and Figure 2 2 5520A Operators Manual English 688739 5520A Operators Guide
345. m C are examples scale The absolute span of the reading range of a measurement device including overrange capability scale error Same as gain error Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter s response curve is not exactly 1 A meter with only scale error no offset or linearity error will read OV with OV applied but something other than 10V with 10V applied secondary standard A standard maintained by comparison against a primary standard sensitivity The degree of response of a measuring device to the change in input quantity or a figure of merit that expresses the ability of a measurement system or device to respond to an input quantity shield A grounded covering device designed to protect a circuit or cable from electromagnetic interference SI System of Units The accepted International System of Units See also units base units and derived units A 6 Appendices A Glossary specifications A precise statement of the set of requirements satisfied by a measurement system or device stability A measure of the freedom from drift in value over time and over changes in other variables such as temperature Note that stability is not the same as uncertainty standard A device that is used as an exact value for reference and comparison standard cell A primary cell that serves as a standard of voltage The term standard cell often refers to a Weston normal cell which is a wet cel
346. mF 110 000 mF 27 0 mA dc 108 800 mF 111 200 mF Table 7 10 Verification Tests for Thermocouple Simulation TC Type Output C Lower Limit mV Upper Limit mV 10 uV C 0 00 C 0 0000 mV 0 0030 0 0030 100 00 C 1 0000 mV 0 99696 1 00304 100 00 C 1 0000 mV 1 00304 99696 1000 00 C 10 0000 mV 9 99660 10 00340 1000 00 C 10 0000 mV 10 0034 9 9966 10000 00 C 100 0000 mV 99 9930 100 0070 10000 00 C 100 0000 mV 100 0070 99 9930 Table 7 11 Verification Tests for Thermocouple Measurement TC Type Input mV Lower Limit C Upper Limit C 10 uV C 0 00 C 0 0000 mV 0 30 0 30 10000 00 C 100 0000 mV 9999 30 10000 70 10000 00 C 100 0000 mV 10000 70 9999 30 30000 00 C 300 0000 mV 29998 50 30001 50 30000 00 C 300 0000 mV 30001 50 29998 50 7 19 5520A Operators Manual 7 20 Range Normal Output V 3 29999 Table 7 12 Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy V and V Output Normal V 3 00000 Frequency 65 Hz 400 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 65 Hz 400 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 65 Hz 400 Hz 1 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz 30 kHz 32 9999 30 0000 65 Hz 329 999 50 000 65 Hz Range AUX Output 3 29999 V Output AUX 3 00000 V Lower Upper Phase Limit Limit 0 0 10 0 10 0 25 0 25 0 50 0 50 2 50 2 50 5 0
347. mark in the Output Display indicates the amplitude values are not accurate enough to use for checking the oscilloscope s accuracy The wave generator is available through the Wavegen menu shown below To access this menu press the softkey under MODE until wavegen appears Output a NAVE SCOPE square laj s MODE Wavegen zquare 1 HO Wavegen zine S80 volt tri edge levzine marker gl035i eps Each option in the Wavegen menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press opr To disconnect the signal press srev e WAVE Scrolls through the three types of waveforms that are available You can select a square sine or triangle wave as the output e SCOPE Z Toggles the calibrator s output impedance setting between 500 and 1 e OFFSET Displays the offset of the generated wave To change the offset key in the new value and press enter Using the rotary knob does not change the offset it changes the actual voltage output When you change the offset you must remain within certain limits to avoid clipping the peaks The limit depends on the wave s p p value Specifically the maximum peak excursion equals the offset plus half of the wave s p p value See Wave Generator Specifications at the beginning of this chapter e MODE Indicates you are in Wavegen mode Use the softk
348. mination directly at the oscilloscope input Verify that the key is lit indicating that the signal is connected Alter the voltage setting for the signal so it matches the amplitude value recommended by your oscilloscope manufacturer for calibrating the edge response The default setting is 25 mV 1 MHz For example on a Fluke PM3392A oscilloscope start with a signal of 1 V 1 MHz Adjust the scale on your oscilloscope to achieve a good picture of the edge For example on a Fluke PM3392A oscilloscope with a 1 V 1 MHz signal use 200 mV div Adjust the time base on your oscilloscope to the fastest position available 20 0 or 50 0 ns div Pulse aberrations gl007i eps 5 Verify that your oscilloscope exhibits the proper rise time and pulse aberration characteristics 6 Remove the input signal by pressing stev 8 73 5520A Operators Manual 8 74 8 101 8 102 The Leveled Sine Wave Function The Leveled Sine Wave Levsine function uses a leveled sine wave whose amplitude remains relatively constant over a range of frequencies to check the oscilloscope s bandwidth When you check your oscilloscope you change the wave s frequency until the amplitude displayed on the oscilloscope drops 3046 which is the amplitude that corresponds to the 3 dB point To access the Levsine menu press the softkey under MODE until levsine appears Note Make sure there is no cable connected to TRIG O
349. minator Carriage Return CR 13 Chr 13 Cntl M n Line Feed LF 10 Chr 10 lt cntls J E Backspace BS 8 Chr 8 lt Cnitl gt H W Form Feed FF 12 Chr 12 lt Cntls L y Examples RS 232 Terminal Mode OUT 1 V 60 Hz Enter UUT SEND REMS n Enter UUT SEND 4205REMS M Enter M means lt gt RS 232 Computer Mode Commi Output OUT 1 V 60 HZ Chr 10 typical to Visual Basic Comml output UUT SEND REMS Wn Chr 10 IEEE 488 Mode OUT 1 V 60 Hz command only UUT SEND REMS An IEEE 488 Interface The Calibrator sends the ASCII character Line Feed with the EOI control line held high as the terminator for response messages The calibrator recognizes the following as terminators when encountered in incoming data ASCII LF character e Any ASCII character sent with the EOI control line asserted RS 232 Interface The Calibrator returns an EOL End of Line character with each response to the PC This is selectable as Carriage Return CR Line Feed LF or both CRLF See RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter Commands sent to the Calibrator must end in either a CR or LF or both See Table 5 9 above 5 40 Incoming Character Processing The Calibrator processes all incoming data as follows except Binary Block Data as described under Parameter Syntax Rules 1 The most significant data
350. mmary nana 7 1 Replacement BUSES ia a cett tnter eR RI seers 7 2 Verfication Tests for DC Voltage Normal 7 3 Verification Tests for DC Voltage 7 4 Verification Tests for DC Current AUS 7 5 Verification Tests for 7 6 Verification Tests for AC Voltage 7 7 Verification Tests for AC Voltage 7 8 Verification Tests for AC Current 7 9 Verification Tests for Capacitance 2 eene eene nenne 7 10 Verification Tests for Thermocouple Simulation 7 11 Verification Tests for Thermocouple Measurement eee 7 12 Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy V and 7 13 Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy V 1 List of Tables 5520A Operators Manual 7 14 Verification Tests for 8 1 Volt 5 1 eo Qa morc Co on UM a ERE NUEVA REA En Rb QUEE 8 6 8 2 Edge SpecifiCalotis nere e 8 3 Leveled Sine Wave Specifications 8 4 Time Marker 8 5 Wave Generator 8 6 Pulse Generator 8 7 Trigger Signal 5
351. mple shows the gain at 20 mV to be 4 divisions at 5 mV per division gl006i bmp 4 Change the voltage to the next value recommended for calibrating your oscilloscope model and repeat this procedure at the new voltage level verifying the gain is correct according to the specifications in your manual 5 Repeat the procedure for each channel 8 71 5520A Operators Manual 8 98 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope The pulse response is calibrated with a square wave signal that has a fast leading edge rise time Using this signal you adjust the oscilloscope as necessary until it meets its particular specifications for rise time and pulse aberrations Following pulse verification the frequency response is checked by applying a leveled sine wave and acquiring a frequency reading at the 3 dB point when the amplitude drops approximately 30 8 99 The Edge Function The Edge function is used for calibrating the pulse response for your oscilloscope To reach the Edge menu press the softkey under MODE until edge appears Output at SCOPE TRIG MODE terminal S s FF edge 5 BEG 5 OFF edge 1 leyvs ine marker Wasegern volt gl027i eps Each option in the Edge menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 500 Indicates the location and impedance of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope pre
352. must be tied together either at the UUT or at the 5520A When tied at the UUT select open The default is tied 9 amp REF MENUS Phase Difference and 10 MHz reference source Selects the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs selects internal or external 10 MHz reference and sets the phase difference between an external master 5520A using 10 MHz IN OUT and the NORMAL output See Adjusting the Phase and Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz ON OUT later in this chapter 5520A Operators Manual 4 28 Setting a Dual DC Voltage Output Note Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the 5520A via the LO s softkey selection tied The calibrator produces a dual dc voltage output by sourcing one dc voltage on the NORMAL outputs and a second on the AUX terminals Complete the following procedure to set a dual dc voltage output If you make an entry error press one or more times to clear the display then reenter the value Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the interconnecting wiring Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 3 Setthe UUT to measure dual dc voltage on the desired range B Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at the NORMAL terminals maximum
353. n 5520A 2 the slave press for operate mode On 5520A 1 the master press for operate mode Now the two 5520As are synchronized There are two ways to synchronize pressing on the master or pressing the SYNC softkey on the master 5520A 1 Load Meter 5520A 2 nnOO1f eps Figure 4 16 Two 5520As Sourcing Current in Parallel 4 59 5520A Operators Manual 4 55 Three Phase Power Calibration You can configure three 5520As to calibrate a three phase power meter This example uses the assumption that you want to apply a perfectly balanced calibration output with a unity power factor By changing the phase relationships you can apply other test stimulus The figure shows the phase relationship of each 5520A By changing the phase relationships you can apply other test stimulus 30 Power Meter P NEUTRAL 5520A nn225f eps Figure 4 17 Three Phase Power Calibration 4 60 Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications 4 56 Sample Applications 4 57 4 58 4 59 Samples of a few selected applications are provided here e Calibrating a Fluke 80 Series 3 1 2 digit handheld multimeter Calibrating a Fluke Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer for Power and Harmonics e Calibrating a Fluke Model 51 Digital Thermometer Calibrating an 80 Series Handheld Multimeter This example goes through t
354. n example The Model 41 Service Manual contains the complete authoritative testing and calibration procedures Testing Watts VA VAR Performance Perform the following procedure to test the Watts VA and VAR functions of the Tester Refer to Table 4 3 A Warning Ensure that the calibrator is in standby mode before making any connection between the calibrator and Tester Dangerous voltages may be present on the leads and connectors 4 67 5520A Operators Manual Table 4 3 Watts Performance Text Screen Calibrator Outputs Performance Limits Normal Phase VAR KVAR Phase Vac in Model 41 Harmonics Screen 60 Hz MAX 5 0V 0 0 30 0 mV 145 156 145 156 0 4 2 2 8 0V 0 0 30 0 mV 234 246 234 246 0 4 2 2 100 0 V 157 0 150 0 mV 14 3k 13 3k 14 5k 15 6k 5 4k 6 3k 155 159 100 0 V 157 0 360 0 mV 37k 29k 32k 40k 10k 18k 155 159 10 0 V 46 0 1 40 V 9 2 10 2 13 5 14 5 9 6 10 6 44 48 100 0 V 46 0 1 40V 92 102 135 145 96 106 44 48 1 Connect the calibrator to the Model 41 as shown in Figure 4 21 Note Voltage is connected to the Model 41 amps channel to simulate current clamp operation 1 mV 1 A FLUKE 4150 5520A CALIBRATOR
355. n of an instrument s interface itself as each byte 1s sent over the bus 5 27 5520A Operators Manual 5 28 Table 5 4 IEEE 488 Interface Messages Received Mnemonic Name Function ATN Attention A control line that when asserted notifies all instruments on the bus that the next data bytes are an interface message When ATN is low the next data bytes are interpreted as device dependent or common commands addressed to a specific instrument DAC Data Accepted Sets the handshake signal line NDAC low DAV Data Valid Asserts the handshake signal line DAV DCL Device Clear Clears the input output buffers END End A message that occurs when the Controller asserts the EOI signal line before sending a byte GET Group Execute Trigger a TC measurement and put the reading in the output buffer Trigger GTL Go To Local Transfer control of the 5520A from one of the remote states to one of the local states See Table 5 1 LLO Local Lockout Transfers remote local control of the 5520A See Table 5 1 IFC Interface Clear control line that sets the interface to a quiescent state MLA My Listen Addresses a specific device on the bus as a listener The controller Address sends MLA automatically whenever it directs a device dependent or common command to a specific instrument MTA My Talk Addresses a specific device on the bus as a talker The controller Address sends MTA automatically whenever it di
356. nal for single outputs and the NORMAL terminal for ac power and ac dual voltage outputs The sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal is the phase reference The set range is 0 00 to 180 00 degress with for a leading phase difference and for a lagging phase difference Sequential Overlapped Parameter Phase with optional multiplier and DEG unit REFPHAS Example E D 1 5 DEG 1 5 degrees On either Calibrator set the power up and reset default phase of the primary channel to lead the sync pulse by 1 5 degrees REFPHASE D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Reference Phase Default query If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN OUT returns the power up and reset default phase difference between the primary channel on the Calibrator and the sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal Response Float Phase in degrees Example REFPHASE D returns 1 50E 00 1 5 degrees REMOTE IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Remote command Places the Calibrator into the remote state This command duplicates the IEEE 488 REN Remote Enable message When in the remote state the Control Display shows the softkey REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local Pressing this softkey returns the Calibrator to loca
357. nder MODE until marker appears Output at SCOPE TRIG MODE terminal 50Q off marker sine off volt spike 1 edge square 10 levsine sq20 100 marker wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu Each option in the MARKER menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 500 Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press oPR To disconnect the signal press stev 8 26 5520A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 8 41 e SHAPE Indicates the type of waveform Depending on frequency setting possible selections are sine spike square 50 duty cycle square wave and sq20 20 duty cycle square wave Note that selections available under SHAPE depend on the selected marker period frequency as follows Selection Period Frequency sine 10 ns 2 ns 100 MHz 500 MHz spike 5s 20ns 0 2 Hz 50 MHz square 5s 10 ns 0 2 Hz 100 MHz sq20 20 ms 100 ns 50 kHz 10 MHz e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to cycle through the trigger settings The available trigger settings are off 1 trigger signal appears on each marker 10 trigger signal appears on every tenth marker and 100 trigger signal appears at ev
358. ndle the UUT port data flow The RS 232 cable length for each port should not exceed 15 meters although longer cable lengths are permitted if the load capacitance measured at a connection point including signal terminator does not exceed 2500 pF 5 11 5 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure Complete the following procedure to set up the SERIAL 2 TO UUT port defaults in bold The RS 232 parameters you are selecting must match the RS 232 parameters of the UUT This port operates independently whether the Calibrator is controlled from the IEEE 488 port or from the RS 232 Host serial port See Figures 5 1 and 5 2 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control Remote Operation 5 Turn the Calibrator power on You may operate the Calibrator during warmup but specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete Press on the Calibrator front panel Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to configure the UUT serial port to match the settings of the UUT RS 232 port The factory defaults shown below in bold are 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Other parameters include flow control STALL IHSTHT SETUF SHOU CAL SPECS UTILITY FUHCTHS L Le 5 DISPLAY SETUF OUTPUT Bus il SETUF SETUP La AEA 05 REMOTE SETUP HOST LILIT HOST Serial GPIB SETUP SETUP SETLIF 4 La 4
359. new value 4 47 Displaying the UUT Error When you edit the output value the Control Display shows the difference between the reference value the value you originally entered and the edit value the value shown in the Output Display displaying error difference in parts per million ppm or percent 96 For example if ERR UNI is set to gt 100 ppm the error will be displayed in ppm up to 99 and then the error will change to 0 010046 at 100 ppm This allows you to edit the output such that the UUT displays the expected value and thus give an indication of the UUT accuracy ref 10 00000 wv errz 30 0 ppm 2 4 15 For example an edited difference of 00030 volts for an output of 10 00000 V represents 0 00030 10 00000 0 000030 or 30 parts per million The sign is negative 30 0 ppm because the output necessary to display 10 00000 at the UUT shows the UUT is reading below the output value When the reference is negative the error sign is relative to the magnitude For example if the reference is 10 00000 V and the output display is 10 00030 the error is 30 ppm nn116f eps 4 48 Using Multiply and Divide The 5520A output value or reference value if you have edited the output can be multiplied by a factor of 10 by pressing the key Similarly the output value or reference value if you have edited the output can be divided a factor of 10 by pressing the key The output will be placed in STBY St
360. ng 5 5 25 5520A Operators Manual 5 26 5 23 Using Commands 5 24 5 25 Communications between the controller and the Calibrator consists of commands queries and interface messages Although the commands are based on the 488 2 standard they can be used on either the IEEE 488 or RS 232 interface except for a few specialized RS 232 commands described in Commands for RS 232 Only For more information on command structures see the IEEE 488 2 standard Refer to Chapter 6 Remote Commands when you require additional information about command references used this chapter All commands and units may be entered in UPPER or lower case There are four specific remote control configurations that use commands queries and interface messages IEEE 488 RS 232 Terminal Mode RS 232 Computer Mode and RS 232 Pass Through Mode Setting up and testing each mode is discussed earlier in this chapter IEEE 488 Mode The IEEE 488 mode is used when the Calibrator is operated by computer program In this mode requested information is returned by query and interface messages are queued and returned by command RS 232 Terminal Mode The RS 232 terminal mode is an interactive mode where an operator inputs commands with immediate returns for requested information queries and interface messages RS 232 Computer Mode The RS 232 computer mode is used when the Calibrator is operated by computer program In this mode requested
361. ng the WAVE MENUS softkey that appears when outputting dual ac voltages or ac power shown below for ac power output I OUT Bux q58q a ml 125 4 Hz Epi WAVE MENUS HARMONIC MEHLIS V WAVE I WAVE zine zine OV z open FHASE 0 00 Phase MO Hew Phase SHOL PF a Power Factor Hew pF PF 1 000 lead SHO PHASE LA La 5 lead laa When one output is a harmonic of the other the phase shift is based on the phase angle NN nn110f eps or power factor cosine of the harmonic signal For example when the AUX output is generating a 60 Hz signal and the NORMAL output is generating a 120 Hz 2nd Harmonic signal a phase shift of 60 PF of 5 would move the AUX signal 60 of 120 Hz 30 of 60 Hz Entering a Phase Angle Complete the following procedure to enter a phase shift in degrees This procedure assumes you have already sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output 1 Press the softkey WAVE MENUS opening the waveform menu 2 Press the softkey PHASE opening the phase entry menu Front Panel Operation 4 Adjusting the Phase 4 43 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired phase angle maximum five numeric keys For example 123 45 Press to select leading or lagging phase shift default is The Control Display now
362. nit of emf electromotive force or electrical potential in the SI system of units One volt is the difference of electrical potential between two points on a conductor carrying one ampere of current when the power being dissipated between these two points is equal to one watt voltage guard A floating shield around voltage measurement circuitry inside an instrument The voltage guard provides a low impedance path to ground for common mode noise and ground currents thereby eliminating errors introduced by such interference watt The unit of power in the SI system of units One watt is the power required to do work at the rate of one joule second In terms of volts and ohms one watt is the power dissipated by one ampere flowing through a one ohm load working standard A standard that is used in routine calibration and comparison procedures in the laboratory and is maintained be comparison to reference standards Zero error Same as offset error The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is applied is its zero or offset error Appendix B ASCII and IEEE 488 Bus Codes B 1 5520A Operators Manual B 2 DECIMAL OCTAL BINARY 7654 3210 DEV NO MESSAGE ATN TRUE ASCII CHAR DECIMAL 64 ASCII and IEEE 488 Bus Codes OCTAL HEX 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 Appendices DEV MESSAGE ATN TRUE A D D R E S S E D C 0 M M A N D S 3 g
363. nment See Chapter 7 Maintenance for instructions on cleaning the air filter 2 8 Chapter 3 Features Contents Introduction EE ERE Front Panel Features Rear Panel Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 1 5520A Operators Manual 3 2 Features 3 Introduction 3 2 Introduction This chapter is a reference for the functions and locations of the 5520A Calibrator s front and rear panel features Please read this information before operating the calibrator Front panel operating instructions for the calibrator are provided in Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation remote operating instructions are provided in Chapter 5 Remote Operation Front Panel Features Front panel features including all controls displays indicators and terminals are shown in Figure 3 1 Each front panel feature is described in Table 3 1 Rear Panel Features Rear panel features including all terminals sockets and connectors are shown in Figure 3 2 Each rear panel feature is described in Table 3 2 Softkey Menu Trees The Setup softkeys are identified in Figures 3 3 and 3 4 The Setup softkeys are associated with the 5520A Calibrator front panel key The functions of the five softkeys are identified by label information displayed directly above each key The softkey labels change during operation so that many different functions are quickly accessibl
364. now shows the amplitude of your resistance entry For example 12 3456 kQ below 12 2456 k 2 L 8 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 345 ia 9 EPI krmi STBY nn097f eps 9 Press to activate the calibrator output The softkeys allow selection of three lead compensation settings and ohms zero 4 37 5520A Operators Manual HES ZERO GE E 2 4 4 L OFF z Wire 4 wire nnO98f eps e OHMS ZERO Press to recalibrate internal circuitry for the ohms function allow several minutes e COMP Compensation Applies 4 wire compensation 2 wire compensation or turns compensation off Compensation is available for resistances up to but not including 110 See Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections earlier in this chapter for more information 4 31 Setting Capacitance Output Complete the following procedure to set a synthesized capacitance output at the front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entry error press to clear the display then reenter the value 1 Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Also refer to Cable Connection Instructions for a procedure to null out stray capacitances due to the test cable connections
365. nt Amp Thermal Limit Exceeded Output current lim exceeded Input V or A limit exceeded VDAC counts out of range IDAC counts out of range AC scale dac counts out of range DC scale dac counts out of range Frequency dac counts out of range IDAC counts DC OFFSET out of range ZDAC counts out of range Cant read External Clock register External Clock too Fast External Clock too Slow Can t load waveform for scope mode OPM transition error TC measurement fault Z measurement fault Unknown error d E 7 5520A Operators Manual E 8 Index CLS remote command 6 11 triangle wave characteristics typical ESE remote command 6 17 ac power ESE remote command 6 17 45 Hz to 65 Hz specification summary 1 22 ESR remote command 6 17 setting the 38 IDN remote command 6 21 AC POWER INPUT module 3 11 OPC command using 5 47 ac voltage OPC remote command 6 27 OPC command using 5 47 OPC remote command 6 28 OPT remote command 6 28 PUD remote command 6 35 PUD remote command 6 35 RST remote command 6 40 SRE remote command 6 44 non sine wave specifications 1 29 sine wave extended bandwidth specifications connections 4 16 dc offset specifications square wave characteristics 1 31 triangle wave characteristics E accessing the fuse and selecting line voltage 2 6 SRE remote command 6 45 accessories and options Chapter 8 19
366. nt interruptions until they detect the command s completion For more information see Overlapped Commands in Chapter 5 Coupled Commands SCOPE and OUT IMP are coupled commands because they can be coupled combined with other commands to form a compound command sequence Care must be taken to ensure that commands are not coupled in a way that may cause them to disable each other since this may result in a fault For more information see Coupled Commands in Chapter 5 5520A SC600 Option 8 Hemote Commands and Queries 8 50 General Commands SCOPE IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Programs the 5520A SC oscilloscope calibration hardware if installed The instrument settings are determined by this command s parameter Once in SCOPE mode use the OUT command to program new output in all functions except Impedance Measurement and the RANGE command as required in OVERLD PULSE and MEAS Z functions only OPER STBY OPC OPC and WAT all operate as described in Chapter 6 The state of the oscilloscope s output while in SCOPE mode is reflected by the bit in the ISR that is assigned to SETTLED Parameter OFF Table 8 15 SCOPE Command Parameters Description Example Turns the oscilloscope hardware off Programs 0 V 0 Hz output at the NORMAL terminals standby VOLT Oscilloscope ac and dc VOLT mode Programs 20 mV peak to peak 1 KHz output at the SCOPE BNC output impedance 1 MQ
367. ntl gt P character print the serial poll string 1 See How IEEE 488 Operates later in this chapter In addition to the commands and special characters that emulate the IEEE 488 functions shown above there are several more commands that are related to operation and control of the actual RS 232 Host port and are therefore completely unrelated to IEEE 488 operations These include the following six commands SP SET SPLSTR SROSTR SP SET SPLSTR SROSTR 5520A Operators Manual 5 32 5 85 Commands for IEEE 488 Only The command graphic X IEEE 488 indicates commands that are used for the IEEE 488 interface This is all the commands except for those used for RS 232 operations See Commands for RS 232 Only All commands are transferred over the IEEE 488 as data except for the commands LOCAL REMOTE and LOCKOUT which are implemented per IEEE Standards as messages see Table 5 7 Table 5 7 Commands for IEEE 488 Only IEEE 488 Message 1 GTL GTR LLO SDC DCL GET SPE SPD Command Representation LOCAL command 1 See How IEEE 488 Operates later in this chapter Remote Operation 5 Using Commands 5 36 Command Syntax The following syntax rules apply to all the remote commands Information about syntax of response messages is also given 5 37 Parameter Syntax Rules Table 5 8 lists the units accepted in command parameters and used in responses All commands and uni
368. o 500 mV 800 mV 0 1 330 uV 0 33 mV to 3 29999 V Oto5V 0 1 3300 uV 3 3 V to 32 9999 V 0 to 50 V 55V 0 1 33 mV Triangle Waves and Truncated Sine Waves p p 9 3 mV to 92 999 mV 0 to 50 mV 80 mV 0 1 93 uV 93 mV to 929 999 mV 0 to 500 mV 800 mV 0 1 930 LW 0 93 mV to 9 29999 V oto5V 0 1 9300 uV 9 3 mV to 92 9999 V 0 to 50 V 55 V 0 1 93 mV Square Waves p p 6 6 mV to 65 999 mV 0to 50 mv 80mV 0 1 66 uV 66 mV to 659 999 mV 0 to 500 mV 800 mV 0 1 660 LW 0 66 mV to 6 59999 V oto5V 0 1 6600 uV 6 6 mV to 65 9999 V 0 to 50 V 55 V 0 1 66 mV 1 Offsets are not allowed on ranges above the highest range shown above 2 The maximum offset value is determined by the difference between the peak value of the selected voltage output and the allowable maximum peak signal For example a 10 V p p square wave output has a peak value of 5 V allowing a maximum offset up to 50 V to not exceed the 55 V maximum peak signal The maximum offset values shown above are for the minimum outputs in each range 3 For frequencies 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz and 500 kHz to 2 MHz the offset uncertainty is 5 of output 1 of the offset range Introduction and Specifications Additional Specifications 1 1 33 AC Voltage Square Wave Characteristics Risetime Settling Time Overshoot 1 kHz 1 kHz 9 1 kHz Typical Typical Typical Duty Cycle Range Duty Cycle Uncertainty 1 us
369. olt sweep 10 MHz auto edge 100 kHz locked levsine marker 10 mV wavegen 40 mV video 100 mV putes meas 7 2 overld V Each option in the MORE OPTIONS menu is described below FREQ CHG Toggles between two settings that control the way the output signal adjusts to a new frequency Jump is the default setting Jump causes the output signal to jump immediately to a new frequency setting Sweep causes the signal to sweep through a series of frequency values over a range you set Use the sweep function to watch the signal gradually change over a given bandwidth and see the point at which its amplitude changes Details for using the sweep function are provided under Sweeping Through a Frequency Range RATE Used when FREQ CHANGE is set to sweep to select a sweep speed of 100 kHz 1 MHz or 10 MHz A slower sweep rate lets you watch the frequency change very slowly After a faster sweep you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slower sweep over a subset of your previous frequency range RANGE The softkeys toggle between two settings The first setting auto changes the range limit automatically in accordance with the voltage level The second setting locked freezes the present range limit subsequent changes in voltage level are then measured with this range limit There are six range limits in LEVSINE mode 10 mV 40 mV 100 mV 400 mV 1 3 V and 5 5 V When set to auto the cal
370. oltage function rto my auta 4 L auta lacked nnO63f eps Range Operating Range selects autorange auto or lock locked for the present range When auto the default setting is selected the calibrator automatically selects the range that provides the best output resolution When locked is selected the calibrator will not change ranges when you are editing the output The locked selection is usually made when you do not want range changes that may cause a small perturbation in the output e g when checking the linearity of a given multimeter range 4 23 Setting AC Voltage Output 4 20 10 You may select an ac voltage output in volts or as a power output in dBm where dBm is log Pout 001 where Pout is expressed in watts The output range is 1 mV to 1000 V When selecting dBm outputs the 5520A calculates dBm at a selected impedance level Based on this the formula is 20 log V 10 log Impedance 001 2 dBm Complete the following procedure to set an ac voltage output at the 5520A front panel NORMAL terminals If you make an entry error press CE to clear the display then reenter the value Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the interconnecting wiring Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output Press to clear any output from the 5520A Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under C
371. oltage mode Programs 20 mV p p 1 KHz output at the SCOPE BNC output impedance 1 MQ standby if from OFF or previously in standby Oscilloscope Edge mode Programs 25 mV peak to peak 1 MHz output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby Oscilloscope leveled sine mode Programs 30 mV p p 50 kHz output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby Oscilloscope Marker mode Programs the period to 1 ms output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby Oscilloscope Wavegen mode Programs 20 mV p p square wave 1 kHz no offset output impedance 1 MQ standby if from OFF or previously in standby SCOPE VOLT OUT 2 V 0 Hz dc voltage 2 V SCOPE VOLT OUT 4 V 1 kHz ac voltage 4 V peak to peak 1 kHz SCOPE EDGE OUT 0 5 V 5 kHz Edge 0 5 V p p 5 kHz SCOPE LEVSINE OUT 1 V 20 kHz Leveled sine wave 2 V p p 20 kHz SCOPE MARKER OUT 2 MS Marker period of 2 ms SCOPE WAVEGEN OUT 1 V 1 kHz Wave Generator 1 V p p 1 KHz 5520A SC300 Option Summary of Commands and Queries 8 SCOPE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Returns the oscilloscope s current mode of operation Returns OFF if the oscilloscope is off Parameter None Response lt character gt
372. ommand description in Chapter 6 for more information The Calibrator clears SRQ and RQS whenever the controller host performs a serial poll sends CLS or whenever the MSS bit is cleared The MSS bit is cleared only when ESB MAV EAV and ISCB are 0 or they are disabled by their associated enable bits in the SRE register being set to 0 Service Request Enable Register SRE The Service Request Enable Register SRE enables or masks the bits of the Serial Poll Status Byte The SRE is cleared at power up Refer to Figure 5 9 for the bit functions 5 39 5520A Operators Manual 5 46 Programming the STB and SHE By resetting to 0 the bits in the SRE you can mask disable associated bits in the serial poll status byte Bits set to 1 enable the associated bit in the serial poll status byte The following sample BASIC program enables the Error Available EAV bit 10 THIS PROGRAM SETS EAV IN THE SRE 20 PRINT 6 SRE 8 LOAD THE REGISTER 30 PRINT 86 SRE ASK FOR THE SRE CONTENTS 40 INPUT 06 A RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS 50 PRINT SRE A 60 RETURN The following BASIC program generates an error and checks the Serial Poll Status Byte Enable the EAV bit with the example above 10 THIS PROGRAM GENERATES AN ERROR AND CHECKS I 20 PRINT 86 OUT 1300V 1300V IS OU
373. omrnabdsu cassis eric ibi leo qun o npa ei 8 52 Marker Function Commands eese eren 8 53 Video Function Commands 8 54 Overload Function 2 200047 0000 8 55 Impedance Capacitance Function Commands 8 56 Verification Tables 8 57 DC Voltage Verification decesserit dasererat rore Rd 8 58 AC Voltage Amplitude Verification esee 8 59 AC Voltage Frequency Verification essere 8 60 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 1 MQ Output Impedance 8 43 8 61 Wave Generator Amplitude Verification 50 Q Output Impedance 8 62 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Amplitude 8 63 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Frequency 8 64 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Harmonics 8 65 Leveled Sine Wave Verification Flatness 8 66 Edge Verification Amplitude eene 8 67 Edge Verification Frequency eese 8 68 Edge Verification Duty Cycle 8 69 Edge Verification Rise Time 8 70 Tunnel Diode Pulser 2 2 8 71 Marker Generator 2 eene 8 72 Pulse Generator Verification Period 8 73 Pulse Generator Verification Pulse Width
374. on 8 33 input impedance measurement SC600 option 8 32 instrument status change enable registers ISCRE 1 5 42 instrument status change registers ISCRO and 1 5 42 instrument status register ISR interface messages IEEE 488 5 27 ISCE remote command 6 22 ISCE remote command 6 22 ISCEO remote command 6 22 ISCEO ISCEI instrument status change enable registers 5 42 ISCEO remote command 6 22 ISCEI remote command 6 22 ISCE1 remote command 6 23 ISCR remote command 6 23 ISCRO ISCR1 instrument status change registers 5 42 ISCRO remote command 6 23 ISCR1 remote command 6 23 ISR instrument status register ISR remote command 6 24 LCOMP remote command LCOMP remote command 6 24 LIMIT remote command 6 25 LIMIT remote command line power cord types table of 2 7 voltage selecting 2 6 LOCAL remote command 6 25 local state 5 22 local with lockout state LOCKOUT remote command 6 25 Lockout State Local with 5 22 LOWS remote command 6 26 LOWS remote command 6 26 maintenance Chapter 7 MEAS TC key 3 7 modem cables 9 4 module pressure Index continued MORE MODES key MULT remote command multiplier keys MULTIPLY ke NEW REF 3 6 NEWREF remote command 6 27 NORMAL terminals null modem cables numeric keys 3 8 OL TRIP remote command SC600
375. onnecting the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure ac voltage on the desired range Output in volts Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output maximum six numeric keys For example 2 44949 Output in dBm Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired power output maximum six numeric keys For example 10 0000 For a power output less than 1 mW negative dBm values press to append the numeric entry with the negative symbol When you press the dBm key the right most softkey becomes active This allows the dBm value and output impedance to be entered as a unit When output is entered in dBm the Control Display appears as follows dB 0 REF WAWE 600 MENUS Square 2 L TDD zine lk ddEvj 1200 SO 0 100 135 is 300 nn227f eps 4 21 5520A Operators Manual Note At voltage outputs of 100 V and above nominal you may notice a slight high pitched sound This is normal Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m 6 Output in volts Press v Output in dBm Press Select an impedance for dBm from a list on the Control Display using the rightmost softkey 7 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 2 44949 V below 2 44949 V 2 4 si 15 8 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency outpu
376. ontrol Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage entry For example 123 456 mV below 123 4568 mV 2 L Note The AUX output is limited to 3 3 V rms for sine waves 6 6 V p p for square waves 9 3 V p p for triangle and truncated sine waves nn084f eps Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at the AUX terminals maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press vy The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries for the NORMAL terminals upper reading and AUX terminals lower reading below is typical 125 456 zid SEF rali La sl E nnO92f eps Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 12 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output maximum five numeric keys Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press the kilo multiplier key k Then press the key For example 1 1234 kHz 13 The Control Display now shows your voltage and frequency entries For example 123 456 mV and 234 567 mV at 1 1234 KHz below 123 456 mV 1 1234 kHz 234 56 2 L 14 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical STEV 204 558 mW nn094f eps 15 Pres
377. ontrol line on the IEEE 488 interface You can do a serial poll to read this bit to see if the 5520A is the source of an SRQ Master summary status Set to 1 whenever bits ESB MAV EAV or ISCB are 1 and enabled 1 in the SRE This bit can be read using the STB command in serial remote control in place of doing a serial poll Set to 1 when one or more enabled ESR bits are 1 Message available The MAV bit is set to 1 whenever data is available in the 5520A s IEEE 488 interface output buffer Error available An error has occurred and an error is available to be read from the error queue by using the ERR query ISCB One or more enabled ISCR bits are 1 nn318f eps Figure 5 9 Serial Poll Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable SRE Service Request SRQ Line IEEE 488 Service Request SRQ is an IEEE 488 1 bus control line that the Calibrator asserts to notify the controller that it requires some type of service Many instruments can be on the bus but they all share a single SRQ line To determine which instrument set SRQ the Controller normally does a serial poll of each instrument The calibrator asserts SRQ whenever the RQS bit in its Serial Poll Status Byte is 1 This bit informs the controller that the Calibrator was the source of the SRQ RS 232 Remote operations using the RS 232 interface emulate the IEEE 488 SRQ line by sending the SRQSTR string over the serial interface when the SRQ line is set See the SROSTR c
378. or higher than the locked range are not allowed The locked selection is usually made when you do not want range changes that may cause a small perturbation in the output e g when checking the linearity of a given multimeter range 4 21 Setting the Output Setting the calibrator output is similar to entering values into a calculator press the keys that represent the value you desire and then press a units key to identify which of the volts amps hertz etc you want the value to represent The control display indicates the value and units you select as you type them into the calibrator Once you are satisfied with the value and units press enter If the output display indicates STBY press to output the selection The display of a small u unsettled in the Output Display indicates the calibrator is allowing for its internal circuitry to settle For example to set the output to 10 V dc press dBm 1 gt 0 y Entr J opr Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 4 22 To set the output to 20 V ac at 60 Hz press dBm 210 gt 6 0 uz Lenten opr To change the output to dc press 0 Hz gt ENTER or ENTER Step by step procedures are provided for each output function as follows e DC voltage e AC voltage DC current e AC current e DC power e AC power e Dual DC voltage e Dual AC voltage e Capacitance e Temperature
379. or other oscilloscope calibration modes Default Wavegen settings are 20 mV p p 1000 0 Hz WAVE square and offset 2 0 0 V 8 29 5520A Operators Manual 8 43 Testing Video Triggers 8 30 Output at SCOPE terminal 500 10 ODD FORMAT ntsc edge levsine marker wavegen video overld meas Z pulse You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the VIDEO menu is described below Output SCOPE terminal 5002 Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press oPR To disconnect the signal press stBy LINE MK Allows you to select the marker line number For ntsc and pal m formats you can also select field or For pal and secam formats the field ODD or is selected automatically based on marker line number FORMAT Scrolls through the available formats You can select ntsc pal pal m and secam MODE Indicates the calibrator is in VIDEO mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes Default video settings are 100 96 format NTSC and videomark 10 5520A SC600 Option 8 Verifying Pulse Capture 8 44 Verifying Pulse Capture 2 5 V off volt 1 0 V 1 edge 250 mV 10 levsine 100 mV 100 marker 25 mV
380. ork normally 1 Press to clear any output from the calibrator 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT 3 Setthe UUT to measure dc current on the desired range 4 23 5520A Operators Manual 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 Press to select the polarity of the current default is 4 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press A The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 234 567 mA 9o A BM nn077f eps 9 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 234 567 m STEV nn078f eps 10 Press to activate the calibrator output A range softkey appears on the Control Display in the dc current function operating range This selects autorange auto or lock locked for the present range When auto the default setting is selected the calibrator automatically selects the range that provides the best output resolution When locked is selected the calibrator will not change ranges when you are editing the output The locked selection is usually made when you do not want range changes that may cause a small perturbation in the output e g When checking the linearity of a given multimeter range
381. ors on your oscilloscope see Figure 8 3 To use the external trigger attach the TRIG OUT connector on the 5520A to the external trigger connection on your oscilloscope To use the external trigger and view its signal with the calibration signal attach the TRIG OUT connector to another channel See your oscilloscope manual for details on connecting and viewing an external trigger FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR nn230f eps Figure 8 3 Oscilloscope Connection Channel and External Trigger 8 65 5520A Operators Manual 8 86 Starting the Oscilloscope Calibration Option Press to start the Oscilloscope Calibration Option The Control Display opens the Volt menu shown below which contains options for calibrating the vertical gain on your oscilloscope This is the first of five calibration menus which you can scroll through by pressing the softkey under MODE Each menu is described in detail in this chapter Output upe AC SE Wo S MDL HODE SCOPE Ino HEHLI volt 5 2 5 8 87 The Output Signal The location of the output signal is indicated on the Control Display the display on the right side If your 5520A is connected but the output does not appear on the oscilloscope you may have the 5520A in standby mode 910211 The settings for the output signal indicated in the O
382. ort via IEEE 488 Port This procedure uses the Win32 Interactive Control utility supplied by National Instruments with the recommended interface cards Connect the UUT Calibrator and PC as shown in Figure 5 6 Note the use of a modem cable NOT null modem for the UUT connection See Appendix C for information about RS 232 cables and connectors yl Modem Cable IEEE 488 Cable SERIAL 2 TO UUT Port 5520A Calibrator Controller nn314f eps Figure 5 6 Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 UUT port operation via the IEEE 488 port using the Win32 Interactive Control utility 1 Ue 55 Complete the IEEE 488 Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5520A for GPIB operation Complete Testing the IEEE 488 Port to prepare the Calibrator IEEE 488 port for testing Before the final step return to this procedure and continue to Step 3 below Go to Start then to the Programs menu Select NI 488 2M software for your operating system From the NI488 2M software menu select Win32 interactive control A DOS window opens with a prompt as shown here Remote Operation 5 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control onal Instruments Corporation Copyrig ALL rights re Type help for help or to quit 7 At the prompt type the following line to activate the
383. oscilloscope to the fastest position available 20 0 or 50 0 ns div Pulse aberrations gl007i eps 5 Verify that your oscilloscope exhibits the proper rise time and pulse aberration characteristics 6 Remove the input signal by pressing stev 8 20 5520A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 33 Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser You can use the calibrator to drive a tunnel diode pulser Fluke Part Number 606522 or Tektronix 067 0681 01 or equivalent allowing you to check for pulse edge rise times as fast as 125 ps The calibrator sources a maximum pulser drive signal of 100 V p p at 100 kHz The recommended and default output setting is 80 V p p at 100 KHz Perform the following procedure to use a tunnel diode pulser 1 Connect the calibrator tunnel diode pulser and oscilloscope as shown in Figure 8 2 2 With the SC600 Option in EDGE mode press the TDPULSE softkey to 3 Press opr 4 Rotate the control on the pulser box to the minimum setting necessary to trigger a reading FELLIKEE 5520A CALIBRATOR NORMAL AUX SCOPE V RTD A N SENSE AUX V OUT nn229f eps Figure 8 2 Tunnel Diode Pulser Connection
384. ost Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5520A for RS 232 Host port operation Note the RS 232 Host port parameters that you selected in this procedure 2 Connect the selected COM port on the PC to the 5520A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port using a standard null modem RS 232 cable See Appendix C for information on RS 232 cables and connectors 3 start the program open the Test Ports icon from the RS 232 Test group below RS 232 Test BE nn310f bmp 5 15 5520A Operators Manual 4 Verify the Calibrator is powered and in the reset condition if in doubt press RESET then click the Command button below nn311f bmp 5 Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL below REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local FSGS C 6 Click the Command2 button Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes back to the reset condition below nn325f eps The Command3 button is used for RS 232 UUT port testing later in this chapter S30 mV auta ta 7 Close the program by clicking the top left corner and Close nn323f sps 5 10 Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control The SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial data port connects a UUT to a PC or terminal via the Calibrator Figures 5 1 and 5 2 This pass through configuration eliminates the requirement for two COM ports at the PC or Terminal The UUT_ commands see Chapter 6 ha
385. ot loaded TC offset limited to 500 C Cant go to STBY in Meas TC Cant set an offset now Cant lock this range Cant set phase or PF now Cant set wave now Cant set harmonic now change duty cycle now Cant change compensation now Current OUTPUT moved to 5725A TC ref must be valid TC temp Cant turn EARTH on now STA couldn t update OTD Cant enter W with non sine Cant edit now Cant set trigger to that now E 3 5520A Operators Manual E 4 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 600 601 602 700 701 702 703 800 801 802 803 900 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 DDE DDE FR DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE FR DDE FR DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE DDE FR D DDE FR DDE FR DDE R DDE R DDR DDE R DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR DDE FR NO NI NO wy w Cant set output imp now Compensation is now OFF Period must be gt 0 A report is already printing ScopeCal option not installed Not a ScopeCal function set marker shape now set video parameter now Marker locat
386. ou may place the calibrator on a bench top or mount it in a standard width 24 inch 61 cm deep equipment rack For bench top use the calibrator is equipped with non slipping non marring feet To mount the calibrator in an equipment rack use the 5520A Rack Mount Kit Model Y5537 Instructions for rack mounting the calibrator are packed with the rack mount kit 2 9 Cooling Considerations Warning To avoid risk of injury never operate or power the calibrator without the fan filter in place Caution Damage caused by overheating may occur if the area around the air intake is restricted the intake air is too warm or the air filter becomes clogged Baffles direct cooling air from the fan throughout the chassis to internally dissipate heat during operation The accuracy and dependability of all internal parts of the calibrator are enhanced by maintaining the coolest possible internal temperature You can lengthen the life of the calibrator and enhance its performance by observing the following rules e The area around the air filter must be at least 3 inches from nearby walls or rack enclosures e The exhaust perforations on the sides of the calibrator must be clear of obstructions The air entering the instrument must be at room temperature make sure the exhaust air from another instrument is not directed into the fan inlet e Clean the air filter every 30 days or more frequently if the calibrator is operated in a dusty enviro
387. output on the NORMAL terminals and simulates the thermocouple temperature as a dc voltage output on the TC terminals If the temperature sensor type is changed the temperature output is reset to 0 degrees C Once set the Calibrator retains the temperature sensor type until power off or reset Parameters TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance Temperature Detector Example TSENS TYPE RTD Set the temperature sensor type to an RTD TSENS TYPE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Temperature Sensor Type query Returns the temperature sensor type thermocouple TC or Resistance Temperature Detector RTD for temperature measurements Responses TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance Temperature Detector Example TSENS_TYPE returns TC Returns TC when the temperature sensor type is a thermocouple 6 51 5520A Operators Manual 6 52 TST X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Self Test command Initiates self test and returns a 0 for pass or a 1 for fail If any faults are detected they are displayed on screen terminal mode or are logged into the fault queue where they can be read by the ERR query computer mode Response 0 pass self test 1 fail self test Example TST returns 1 Returns 1 when self test is successful UNCER
388. ove it to the Output Display gl023i eps Other settings in the display will remain unaltered unless you key in an entry and specify the units for that setting 8 90 Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob To adjust values in the Output Display using the rotary knob 1 Turn the rotary knob A cursor appears in the output display under the lowest digit and begins changing that digit If you wish to place the cursor in the field without changing the digit press ing MHz gl003i eps 5520A Operators Manual 8 91 8 92 8 68 2 To move the cursor between the voltage and frequency fields press FRI 120 50 mip MHz gl004i eps Use the 4 and K keys to move the cursor to the digit you want to change 4 Turn the rotary knob to change the value When you use the rotary knob in either Volt mode or Marker mode the Control Display shows the new value s percentage change from the reference value This is useful for determining the percentage of error on the oscilloscope You can set the reference value to the new value by pressing x 110 00 MHz 91005 5 Press to remove the cursor from the Output Display and save the new value as the reference value Note If you attempt to use the rotary knob to adjust a value to an amount that is invalid for the function you are using or is outside the value s range limit the value will not c
389. pecifications 1 25 Phase Sp cifications neseni rean EE TEE EEE 1 26 Calculating Power Uncertainty esee 1 27 Additional 1 28 Frequency Specifications eese nnne 1 29 Harmonics 2nd to 50th 1 30 AC Voltage Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications 1 31 AC Voltage Non Sine Wave Specifications 1 32 AC Voltage DC Offset Specifications essen 1 33 AC Voltage Square Wave Characteristics 1 34 AC Voltage Triangle Wave Characteristics typical 1 35 AC Current Sine Wave Extended Bandwidth Specifications i 5520A Operators Manual 1 36 AC Current Non Sine Wave Specifications 1 37 AC Current Square Wave Characteristics typical 1 38 AC Current Triangle Wave Characteristics typical Preparing for Operation 2 1 WnitrO WUC OM 2 2 Unpacking and Inspection eese 2 3 Replacing the Fuse 4 cese eer ri retten ete 2 4 Selecting Line 2 5 Connecting to Line 2 6 Selecting Line F
390. perly grounded power outlet Do not use a two conductor adapter or extension cord this will break the protective ground connection Use the rear panel CHASSIS GROUND terminal for a protective grounding wire if there is any question about the effectiveness of instrument earth grounding through the line power cord ground wire The calibrator is shipped with the appropriate line power plug for the country of purchase If you need a different type refer to Table 2 2 and Figure 2 2 for a list and illustration of the line power plug types available from Fluke After you verify that the line voltage selection is set correctly and that the correct fuse for that line voltage is installed connect the calibrator to a properly grounded three prong outlet Selecting Line Frequency The calibrator is shipped from the factory for nominal operation at 60 Hz line frequency For calibrators with Main software version 1 9 or greater and if you are using 50 Hz line voltage you should re configure the 5520A for optimal performance at 50 Hz To do so from the front panel go into SETUP INSTMT SETUP OTHER SETUP and then turn MAINSSOH to Store the change After the instrument is properly warmed up on for 30 minutes or longer you must re zero the complete instrument For details see the section on Zeroing the Calibrator in Chapter 4 2 5 5520A Operators Manual 2 6 LINE VOLTAGE INDICATOR CHANGING LINE FUSE CHANGING
391. permitted if the load capacitance measured at a connection point including signal terminator does not exceed 2500 pF RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure Complete the following procedure to set up the SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port The RS 232 parameters you select here must match the parameters set for the PC COM port The factory defaults shown on the display below are 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Other parameters include flow control EOL end of line character and EOF end of file characters 1 Turn the Calibrator power on You may operate the Calibrator during warmup but specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete 2 Press on the Calibrator front panel Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to select the serial port for remote operation then continue to Step 4 nn323f eps Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control SHOU IHSTHMT UTILITY TAL SPECS SETUP LFUNMCTHS 2 B LE Remote Operation REMOTE OTHER OUTPUT DISPLBA SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP 2 4 ES ULT SETUP HOST GFIE HOST zerial SETUP SETIF ES 4 BE Select gt gpib zepisl To Step 4 121 5 5520A Operators Manual 4 Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to select the HOST serial port parameters to match the PC COM parameters Individual softkey functions a
392. pies nnO80f eps it into the Output Display below is typical E lz3 45 amp 6 mH stay 1123 4 Hz 10 Press to activate the calibrator output nn081f eps 4 25 5520A Operators Manual REF LECOMP OUTPUT WAVE MENUS OFF aux sine an 20 sine tri square truncz 10 MHz 0 00 int 10 MHz SV HCDLT A 4 z 5 e amp REF MENUS Phase Difference and 10 MHz reference source Selects the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs selects internal or external 10 MHz reference and sets the phase difference between an external master 5520A using 10 MHz IN OUT and the NORMAL output See Adjusting the Phase and Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN OUT later in this chapter e LCOMP turns inductive compensation on and off Inductive compensation is available for frequencies up to 1 kHz at outputs up to 239 999 mA and for frequencies up to 440 Hz above 239 999 mA e OUTPUT shows whether the output is on the AUX or 20A terminals Outputs 3A or above are always on the 20A terminals e WAVE waveform selects one of four different types of waveforms sine wave triangle wave square wave and truncated sine wave See Waveform Types later in this chapter for more information Whenever a non sinusoidal waveform is selected the Output Display will convert the RMS reading to p p PP 4 26 Set
393. port communication parameters and saves them in nonvolatile memory Returns the HOST serial port communication parameters contained in nonvolatile memory Sets the power up and reset default thermocouple type Returns the power up and reset default thermocouple type Sets the temperature degree standard ipts 68 or its 90 Returns the temperature degree standard ipts 68 or its 90 Sets the power up and reset default for the time limit for SC600 OVERLD mode to stay in operate Returns the power up and reset default for the time limit for BC600 OVERLD mode to stay in operate Retums specified uncertainties for the present output If there are no specifications for an output returns zero Remote Commands Command Summary by Function 6 6 12 Status Commands ERR Returns the first error code with an explanation contained in the Calibrator error queue then removes that error code from the queue EXPLAIN Explains an error code This command returns a string that explains the error code furnished as the parameter FAULT Returns the first error code contained in the Calibrator error queue then removes that error from the queue FUNC Returns the present output measurement or calibration function ISCE Loads two bytes into both the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register and the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register ISCE Returns the OR of the contents of the In
394. power is turned on 5 49 Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE The bits in the Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable register ESE are assigned as shown in Figure 5 10 5 40 Remote Operation 5 Checking 5520A Status Power on This bit is set to 1 if line power has been turned off and on since the last time the ESR was read Command error The 5520A s IEEE 488 interface encountered an incorrectly formed command The command ERR fetches the earliest error code in the error queue which contains error codes for the first 15 errors that have occurred Execution error An error occurred while the 5520A tried to execute the last command This could be caused for example by a parameter being out of range The command ERR fetches the earliest error in the error queue which contains error codes for the first 15 errors that have occurred Device dependent error An error related to a device dependent command has occurred Query error The 5520A was addressed to talk when no response data was available or appropriate or when the controller failed to retrieve data on the output queue Operation complete All commands previous to reception of a c ommand have been executed and the interface is ready to accept another message nn319f eps Figure 5 10 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable ESE 5 50 Programming the ESR and ESE To read the contents of the ESR send
395. presently selected values of ERR UNIT Responses 1000 UUT error is displayed in above 1000 ppm ppm below GT100 UUT error is displayed in above 100 ppm ppm below GTIO UUT error is displayed in above 10 ppm ppm below PPM UUT error is displayed in ppm always PCT UUT error is displayed in always ESE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Event Status Enable command Loads a byte into the Event Status Enable ESE register See Event Status Enable Register ESE in Chapter 5 Parameter lt value gt decimal equivalent of the ESE byte 0 to 255 Example ESE 140 Load decimal 140 binary 10001100 to enable bits 7 PON 3 DDE and 2 OYE ESE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Event Status Enable query Returns the contents of the Event Status Enable ESE register See Event Status Enable Register ESE in Chapter 5 Response lt value gt decimal equivalent of the ESE byte 0 to 255 Example ESE returns 133 Returns decimal 133 binary 10000101 when bits 7 PON 2 QYE 1 OPC are enabled ESR X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Event Status Register query Returns the contents of the
396. pulse capture verifying SC600 J 8 31 remote control connections 5 7 pulse response calibration SC300 RTD connections 4 17 option 8 72 8 73 RTD TYPE remote command 6 41 pulse response calibration SC600 option 8 19 RTD TYPE remote command query commands 5 27 RTD TYPE D remote command RTD TYPE D remote command queue error queue output SC300 option rack mount kit 9 4 verification tables 8 86 RANGE remote command SC600 option 8 37 SC300 oscilloscope calibration option 8 59 RANGE remote command 6 35 SC600 option RANGELCK remote command verification tables 8 41 RANGELCK remote command SC600 oscilloscope calibration rear panel features 3 3 introduction REFCLOCK remote command 6 37 SCOPE key 3 5 REFCLOCK remote command 6 37 REFCLOCK_D remote command REFCLOCK_D remote command REFOUT remote command 6 38 REFPHASE remote command 6 38 SCOPE remote command for SC300 8 85 REFPHASE remote command 6 38 SCOPE remote command SC600 option REFPHASE_D remote command 6 39 sequential commands 5 30 REFPHASE D remote command 6 39 SERIAL 1 FROM HOST connector 3 10 registers SERIAL 2 TO UUT connector ESE event status enable re gister 5 40 serial poll ESR event status register status byte 5 37 SCOPE OUT BNC connector 3 8 SCOPE remote command for SC300 8 84 SCOPE remote command SC600 option SCOPE TRIG BNC 5
397. put 5 4 47 Displaying the UUT entere eene ette rne 4 48 Using Multiply and Divide eee 4 49 Setting Output Limits eese nennen 4 50 Setting Voltage and Current Limits eee 4 51 Meas ring Pressure e eerte eese dodenus 4 52 Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN OUT 4 53 Using an External 10 MHz 1 4 54 Sourcing AC Current with Parallel Connected 5520 5 4 55 Three Phase Power Calibration seen 4 56 Sample Applications 4 57 Calibrating an 80 Series Handheld Multimeter 4 58 Sch m sa vedna 4 59 EARTH Connection 4 60 Testing the Meter eee e o e ct e eda 4 61 Calibrating the Meter eec ster ation ha etn 4 62 Testing a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer 4 63 Testing Watts VA VAR 4 64 Testing Harmonics Volts Performance 4 65 Testing Harmonics Amps Performance 4 66 Calibrating a Fluke 51 Thermometer 4 67 Testing the Thermometer seen 4 68 Calibrating the Thermometer seen Remote Operation lt
398. put Terminals The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the 5520A When the front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are tied at the UUT select open with the LO s softkey If the NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are not tied at the UUT select tied with the LO s softkey The default is tied 4 33 5520A Operators Manual 4 34 4 29 Setting a Dual AC Voltage Output Note Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the 5520A via the LO s softkey selection tied The calibrator produces a dual ac voltage output by sourcing one ac voltage on the NORMAL outputs and a second on the AUX terminals Complete the following procedure to set a dual ac voltage output If you make an entry error press one or more times to clear the display then reenter the value 10 11 Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the interconnecting wiring Press to clear any output from the 5520A Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT Set the UUT to measure dual ac voltage on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at the NORMAL terminals maximum six numeric keys For example 123 456 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The C
399. put terminals This chapter presents instructions for operating the 5520A Calibrator from the front panel For a description of front panel controls displays and terminals see Chapter 3 Features Turning on the Calibrator ANWarning To avoid electric shock make sure the 5520A Calibrator is safely grounded as described in Chapter 2 Caution Before turning the 5520A Calibrator on make sure that the line voltage selection is set properly Refer to Selecting Line Voltage in Chapter 2 to check the line voltage setting When the 5520A Calibrator is powered the initial display is Starting Up see below and it completes a self test routine If a self test fails the Control Display identifies an error code For a description of error codes see Chapter 7 Maintenance Starting up 2 2 After self test the control display shows the reset condition below NNO62F EPS 222 n y auta 2 4 a 4 5 auta lacked nnO63f eps For a discussion of the softkey selection shown above auto locked see Auto Range Versus Locked Range later in this chapter 4 3 5520A Operators Manual 4 4 4 3 4 4 Warming up the Calibrator When you turn on the 5520A allow a warm up period of at least 30 minutes for the internal components to stabilize This ensures that the calibrator meets or exceeds the specifications listed in Chapter 1 If you turn the 5520
400. query Returns the two bytes from the 16 bit ISCE1 register See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Response lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 SCE1 returns 6272 Example Returns decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 if bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT are set to 1 ISCR X Instrument Status Change Register query Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register ISCRO and Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register ISCR1 See Instrument Status Change Register in Chapter 5 for more information IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Response lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 ISCR returns 6272 Example Returns decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 if bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT are set to 1 ISCRO X Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register query Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Response lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 ISCRO returns 6272 Example
401. r on and reset Responses PT385 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 200 200 ohm RTD curve a 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 500 500 ohm RTD curve a 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 1000 1000 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT3926 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 003926 ohms ohm C PT3916 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 003916 ohms ohm C CU10 10 ohm RTD empirical curve NI120 120 ohm RTD empirical curve Example RTD TYPE D returns PT3926 Returns PT3926 when the RTD default type is a 100 ohm RTD with curve 00 003926 ohms ohm C SP SET X 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Host Serial Port Set command Sets the RS 232 C settings for the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port which is saved in the Calibrator non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands To set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port see the UUT SET command The factory default values are shown below in bold type To return to the factory defaults see the FORMAT SETUP command The interface selection sets the command response with command echo back for commands and error messages with TERM terminal or no echo back with COMP computer Parameters baud rate value 300 600 1200 2400 4800 960
402. r to a UUT 4 13 ANWarning The 5520A Calibrator is capable of supplying lethal voltages Do not make connections to the output terminals when a voltage is present Placing the instrument in standby may not be enough to avoid shock hazard since the opr key could be pressed accidentally Press reset and verify that the STBY annunciator appears on the Control Display before making connections to the output terminals The outputs labeled NORMAL HI and LO are used to source voltages resistances capacitance and simulate resistance temperature detector RTD outputs The LO terminal connects to the analog signal ground inside the guard shield This signal line may or may not be tied to the guard shield and or to chassis ground depending on the settings of the and keys See When to Use EARTH and EXGRD on the next page for an explanation of these internal connections The outputs labeled AUX HI and LO source current and low voltages in the dual voltage function These outputs are also used for four wire or remote sensing in the resistance capacitance and RTD functions When an oscilloscope calibration option is installed the BNC connectors labeled SCOPE OUT and TRIG deliver signals for oscilloscope calibration The socket labeled TC is used to measure thermocouples and to generate simulated thermocouple outputs Recommended Cable and Connector Types A Warning Using standard banana plugs on the calibrator output will expos
403. raphic X Sequential shows a check for sequential commands The majority of the commands are sequential 5 30 Remote Operation Using Commands 5 5 33 Commands that Require the Calibration Switch 5 34 The following commands do not work unless the rear panel CALIBRATION switch is in the ENABLE position CLOCK when setting date but not time FORMAT ALL FORMAT CAL PUD Attempting to use any of these commands with the CALIBRATION switch in the NORMAL position logs an error into the error queue Or it returns the error message if in the RS 232 Terminal Mode Commands for RS 232 Only The graphic IEFE 488 X RS 232 indicates RS 232 interface commands The IEEE 488 and RS 232 interfaces both send commands to the Calibrator as data except for those IEEE 488 functions that must be implemented as a message as specified in the IEEE 488 standards For example the RS 232 interface uses the command REMOTE to place the Calibrator in the remote mode Although the IEEE 488 interface could also send a command REMOTE as data it does not because this is one of the functions that must be implemented per IEEE 488 Standards The relationship between these IEEE 488 messages and the equivalent RS 232 emulation is shown in Table5 6 Table 5 6 Commands for RS 232 Only IEEE 488 Message 1 RS 232 Equivalent GTL LOCAL command GET T lt Cntl gt T character execute a group trigger SPE SPD P lt C
404. re discussed in Chapter 3 Features If operating the port with a computer program instead of individual commands from a terminal select Remote I F comp amp DATA 1 STOP STALL BITS BIT sores E PARITY none Eau 2 4 5 1 z none add GO 2 4 4 2 sone SOF E mone rts even FEO REMOTE T E E IL HEAT term CELF 200 term CEL comp CR 1200 LF 2400 4500 ae SET FIEST EOF MENJ 2 4 4 L MUL ai 2 EOF 012 000 FF L3 Hew EOF L Scr OE 000 000 ta e aL Set using the numeric keypad 5 Press not nn122f eps several times until the message STORE CHANGES DISCARD CHANGES appears or if there were no changes the reset display If you select STORE CHANGES the serial and host port setting are saved in the instrument non volatile memory Remote Operation 5 Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control Testing the RS 232 Host Port Choose or adapt one of the following test procedures to test the Calibrator RS 232 Host port connected to a PC COM port A typical connection is shown in Figure 5 4 Note the use of a null modem cable for connection See Appendix C for information about RS 232 cables and connectors Null Modem Cable SERIAL 1 COM Port FROM HOST PA r4 Port pe 5520A Ca
405. rects a device dependent or common query to a specific instrument REN Remote Enable remote local control of the 5520A See Table 5 1 RFD Ready For Sets the handshake signal line NRFD low Data SDC Selected Does the same thing as DCL but only if the 5520A is currently Device Clear addressed as a listener SPD Serial Poll Cancels the effect of a Serial Poll Enable Disable SPE Serial Poll After the 5520A receives this message it sends the Status Byte the Enable next it is addressed as a listener no matter what the command is UNL Unlisten Unaddresses a specific device on the bus as a listener The controller sends UNL automatically after the device has successfully received a device dependent or common command UNT Untalk Unaddresses a specific device on the bus as a listener The controller sends UNL automatically after the device has successfully received a device dependent or common query Remote Operation Using Commands 5 Table 5 5 IEEE 488 Interface Messages Sent Mnemonic Function END End A message that occurs when the 5520A asserts the EOI control line The 5520A asserts EOI while it transmits the ASCII character LF for its termination sequence or terminator DAC Data Accepted Set the handshake signal line NDAC low DAV Data Valid Asserts the handshake signal line DAV RFD Ready for Data Sets the handshake line NRFD low SRQ Service Req
406. requency nena 2 7 Service Information cene ern pieie creed 2 8 Placement and Rack Mounting eese 2 0 Cooling Considerations eae desee uu 3 TNO 3 2 Front Panel Features 3 3 Rear Panel Features 3 4 Softkey Menu Trees Front Panel Operatlon retineri Raton ana eee reenn 4 1 Writ OMUCtIOM C a a 4 2 Turning on the 4 3 Warming up the Calibrator eene 4 4 Using the aT eere tete e 4 5 Using the Setup Menu eere eee theta eie 4 6 Using the Instrument Setup Menu eere 4 T Utility Functions 4 8 Using the Format EEPROM Menu 4 9 Resetting the Calibrator nena 4 10 Zeroing the Calibrator eee eee eree 4 11 Using the Operate and Standby Modes eese 4 12 Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT eene 4 13 Recommended Cable and Connector 4 14 When to Use EARTH and EXGRD eee 4 15 Barth 4 16 External Guard tite ttes Potter orna 4 17 Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections 4 18 C
407. rial port The command may be sent over gpib or RS 232 ports but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation Include a line feed RS 232 character to terminate the block data or End or Identify EOI command IEEE 488 Parameter 2 lt gt lt characters string definite length O character string indefinite length lt character string character string Examples SEND 206F1S2R0 definite length format Sends the data F1S2R0 to the UUT in definite length format The format is 2 two numbers follow 06 characters follow F1S2R0 6 characters SEND 0F1S2R0 indefinite length format Sends the data F1S2R0 to the UUT in indefinite length format The format is 0 then the characters UUT SEND F1S2R0 character string Sends the data F1S2R0 to the UUT as a character string Special Case When the character string sent to a UUT must end in a carriage return CR command or line feed LF command or both you must use the following Definite Length Format Follow the instructions above and after the character string add a command J for CR or M for LF or both where J means hold down the lt Cntl gt key and type the letter J For example sending the string REMS in this format with both CR and LF you would count 4 characters for REMS and 1 character each for J and M for a total of 6 characters The command would be UUT SEND 206REMS J M then enter The J and M chara
408. rns that the 5th harmonic frequency is selected and the fundamental is at the secondary output AUX terminals Therefore the harmonic frequency appears at the primary or NORMAL terminals IEEE 488 RS 232 IDN Identification query Returns instrument model number serial number and firmware revision levels for the main encoder and inguard CPUs Sequential Overlapped Coupled Responses as follows Indefinite ASCII A message containing four fields separated by commas 1 Manufacturer 2 Model number 3 Serial number 4 Firmware revision levels for the Main CPU Front Panel CPU Inguard PGA IDN returns FLUKE 5520A 5248000 1 2 1 3 1 3 Example Returns Fluke manufacturer model 5520 serial number 5248000 main firmware version 1 2 encoder firmware 1 3 and inguard PGA 1 3 INCR X Increment command Increments or decrements the output as selected using the EDIT command or defaults to the primary output and enters error mode the same as using the Calibrator output adjustment knob in local operation IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Parameters lt value increment value optional unit matching edit field value decrement value Example INCR 00001 mV Load the error mode and increment the selected edit field b
409. ropriate figure from Table 4 1 For capacitance outputs null out stray capacitance by connecting the test leads to the UUT routing them but not connecting to the 5520A Calibrator on a non conductive surface Null out the reading on the UUT using rel offset or null whichever method applies and then connect the test leads to the 5520A Calibrator Table 4 1 UUT Connections 5520A Output Figure Reference Resistance 4 2 Resistance four wire compensated 4 3 Resistance two wire compensated 4 4 Resistance compensation off Capacitance 4 5 Capacitance two wire compensated 4 6 Capacitance compensation off DC Voltage 4 7 DC Voltage AC Voltage AC Voltage 4 7 DC Voltage AC Voltage DC Current 4 8 DC Current AC Current AC Current 4 8 DC Current AC Current RTD Simulation 4 9 Temperature RTD Thermocouple Simulation 4 10 Temperature Thermocouple Note See the discussion under Four Wire versus Two Wire Connections above Front Panel Operation 4 Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT SOURCE 5520A CALIBRATOR cis ANz0v PK MAX Figure 4 2 UUT Connection Resistance Four Wire Compensation Gm Gum GD aav PK MAX N nn040f eps FLUKE 5520A CALIBRATOR C CEE A 20v Pk max TC 20vPKuax N Figure 4 3 UUT Connection Resistance Two Wire Compensation nn041f eps 4 13 5520
410. ror at 1000 V to verify it is within specification g Set the output of the calibrator to 350 mV and press Verify the errors are within specifications 4 62 Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications 4 Testthe ac voltage function Press on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to V Set the output of the calibrator to 350 mV at 60 Hz and press oPR Verify the errors are within specifications Check the error against specifications at the following voltages and frequencies 350 mV 60 Hz 5 kHz amp 20 kHz 3 500 V 60 Hz 5 kHz amp 20 kHz 35 00 V 60 Hz 5 kHz amp 20 kHz 329 0 V 60 Hz 5 kHz amp 20 kHz 100 0 V 20 kHz 200 0 V 20 kHz 300 0 V 20 kHz 1000 V 60 Hz amp 5 kHz 5 Test the Frequency function a Press the calibrator set the DMM function switch to Y and press Hz on the DMM Set the calibrator to 150 mV at 19 0 kHz and press opr Verify the error is within specification Set the calibrator to 150 mV at 190 kHz Hint press twice to move the cursor to the frequency reading in the output display and press 17 Verify the error is within specification 6 Test Frequency Sensitivity and Trigger Levels a Press on the calibrator set the DMM function switch to Y and press Hz on the DMM to choose the frequency mode Set the calibrator to 300 mV at 1 kHz and press oPR Verify th
411. rt UUT_SET X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled UUT Serial Port Set command Sets the RS 232 C settings for the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port which is saved in the Calibrator non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands To set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port see the SP_SET command The factory default values are shown below in bold type To return to the factory defaults see the FORMAT SETUP command The interface selection sets the command response with command echo back with TERM terminal and no echo back with COMP computer Parameters baud rate value 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 flow control XON xon xoff NOSTALL none RTS rts cts number data bits DBIT7 7 bits or DBITS 8 bits number stop bits SBIT1 1 bit or SBIT2 2 bits parity PNONE none PODD odd PEVEN even Example UUT SET 9600 XON DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE Set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port to the factory default values Remote Commands 6 Commands UUT SET X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled UUT Serial Port Set query Return
412. rt p p to rms for truncated sine wave multiply the p p value by 0 2165063 2 Uncertainty is stated in p p Amplitude is verified using an rms responding DMM 3 Uncertainty for Truncated Sine outputs is typical over this frequency band Square 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty wave Range tcal 5 Max Voltage p p 1 Frequency t of output of range 2 Resolution Normal Channel Single Output Mode 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 4 0 5 Two digits on each range 2 9 mV 10 Hz to 45 Hz 0 25 0 5 to 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 0 25 Six digits on each range 66 V 1 kHz to 20 kHz 0 5 0 25 20 kHzto 100kHz 5 0 0 5 Auxiliary Output Dual Output Mode 66 mV 0 01 Hz to 10 Hz 5 0 4 0 5 Two digits on each range to 10Hzto45Hz 0 25 0 5 14V 45 Hz to 1 kHz 0 25 4 0 25 Six digits on each range 4 kHz to 10 kHz 3 5 0 0 5 1 To convert p p to rms for square wave multiply the p p value by 0 5000000 2 Uncertainty is stated in p p Amplitude is verified using an rms responding DMM 3 Limited to 1 kHz for Auxiliary outputs gt 6 6 V p p 1 29 5520A Operators Manual 1 30 1 32 AC Voltage DC Offset Specifications Range 1 Normal Channel Max Peak Offset Range 2 Signal Sine Waves rms 1 Year Absolute Offset Uncertainty tcal 5 C 3 dc output floor 3 3 mV to 32 999 mV 0 to 50 mV 80mV 0 1 33 uV 33 mV to 329 999 mV 0 t
413. s 8 34 The Leveled Sine Wave Function The Leveled Sine Wave LEVSINE function uses a leveled sine wave whose amplitude remains relatively constant over a range of frequencies to check the oscilloscope s bandwidth When you check your oscilloscope you change the wave s frequency until the amplitude displayed on the oscilloscope drops 3046 which is the amplitude that corresponds to the 3 dB point Default values are 30 mV p p 50 kHz To access the LEVSINE menu press the softkey under MODE until levsine appears 8 21 5520A Operators Manual Output SCOPE MORE SET TO MODE terminal 500 OPTIONS LAST levsine fe A see LAST F volt The 50 kHz edge MORE levsine OPTIONS marker Menu wavegen video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu Each option in the LEVSINE menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE terminal 500 Indicates the location and impedance of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press oPR To disconnect the signal press You cannot change the impedance while you are in LEVSINE mode e MORE OPTIONS Opens additional menu items which are described in detail under The MORE OPTIONS Menu SET TO LAST F Toggles between the current frequency setting and the reference value of 50
414. s s Value s s typical s 2 5 4 0E 09 2 0E 06 6 2E 9 2 5 4 0E 09 2 0E 05 6 2E 9 2 5 4 0E 09 2 0E 04 6 2E 9 2 5 4 0E 08 2 0E 03 4 4E 8 8 55 5520A Operators Manual 8 74 Input Impedance Verification Resistance Table 8 33 Input Impedance Verification Resistance Nominal Measured 1 Year Spec Value Q Deviation Q Q 40 0 04 50 0 05 60 0 06 600000 600 1000000 1000 1500000 1500 8 75 Input Impedance Verification Capacitance Table 8 34 Input Impedance Verification Capacitance Nominal Measured Deviation 1 Year Spec Value pF Value pF pF pF 5pF 0 75 29 1 95 pF 49 pF 2 95 pF 8 56 Calibrating the Time Base of an Oscilloscope 5520A SC300 Option Contents Page IntrOdUCLUlOfi n tet etre ose Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications Volt Function Edge Function Specifications eene Leveled Sine Wave Function Specifications Time Marker Function Specifications esee Wave Generator Specifications seen Trigger Signal Specifications for the Time Marker Function Trigger Signal Specifications for the Edge Function
415. s 0 00E 00 NONE Returns 0 and NONE when there is no recent measurement either because the Calibrator is not in a measurement mode or because no measurement has been made yet VVAL X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Measurement Voltage command Returns the last value of the thermocouple temperature measurement in volts If the last measurement was an overload or open thermocouple condition or there is no measurement returns OE 00 Responses measurement value in volts valid measurement 0 00 overload open or measurement Example VVAL returns 1 1047 03 1 1047 mV equivalent to 50 C with type K thermocouple and TC reference 23 0 C WAI X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Wait to Continue command Prevents further remote commands from being executed until all previous remote commands have been executed For example if you send an OUT command you can cause the Calibrator to wait until the output has settled before continuing on to the next command if you follow OUT with a WAI command The 6 55 5520A Operators Manual 6 56 WAI command is useful with any overlapped command preventing the Calibrator from processing other commands until the overlapped command is processed Example WAI Process all ex
416. s lit if not press EARTH Set up the calibrator by pressing 0 C enter Ensure the softkey labeled OUTPUT indicates If not press the OUTPUT softkey until it does 4 Select the thermocouple type and reference source by pressing the TC MENUS softkey Ensure the REF SRC softkey selection indicates intrnl If not press the REF SRC softkey Ensure the TYPE softkey indicates either J or K depending on which one the 51 is set to Continue to press the TYPE softkey until the selected thermocouple type is displayed 5 Enter the calibrator settings listed in Table 4 6 and verify performance is within specifications see Chapter 1 4 72 Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications Table 4 6 Thermocouple Performance 1 When changing thermocouple types be use to change the corresponding hookup wire e g K type thermocouple wire changes to J type thermocouple wire Thermocouple 5520A Display Readings Type 1 Setting Degrees C K 182 0 C 182 0 0 9 295 6 1 6 K 80 0 C 80 0 0 8 112 0 1 4 K 530 0 C 530 0 1 2 986 0 2 3 K 1355 0 C 1355 0 2 1 2471 0 3 8 J 197 0 C 197 0 1 0 822 6 1 7 J 258 0 C 258 0 1 1 496 4 1 9 J 705 0 C 705 0 1 5 1301 0 2 7 4 68 Calibrating the Thermometer The following procedure refers to the Fluke 51 as the Unit Under Test UUT Use copper hookup wire for all connections
417. s pressing the Calibrator front panel NEW key Parameter None Example NEWREF Set the reference value to the current Calibrator output value OLDREF X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential X Overlapped Coupled Old Reference command Sets the Calibrator output to the reference value and exit the error mode if selected If editing the output using the EDIT and INCR commands and you want to return to the reference value use the OLDREF command If editing the output and you want to make the edited value the new reference use the NEWREE command Parameter None Example OLDREF Set the output to the existing reference value clearing editing changes ONTIME IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Calibrator On Time query Returns the time in minutes since the Calibrator was most recently powered up Response days hours 24 hour clock Example ONTIME returns 47 Returns the time since the Calibrator was last powered up 47 minutes OPC IEEE 488 RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Operations Complete command Sets bit 0 OPC of the Event Status Register to 1 when all pending device operations are complete Also see the ESR command Parameter None Example KOBE Set bit 0 of the Event Status Register to 1 when all p
418. s rated over 4800 VA Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or loss of life Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to equipment SYMBOLS MARKED ON THE CALIBRATOR A WARNING Risk of electric shock Refer to the manual see the Index for references IH GROUND Ground terminal to chassis earth A Attention Refer to the manual see the Index for references This symbol indicates that information about usage of a feature is contained in the manual AC POWER SOURCE The Calibrator is intended to operate from an ac power source that will not apply more than 264V ac rms between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is required for safe operation USE THE PROPER FUSE To avoid fire hazard use only the specified replacement fuse e For 100 V or 120 V operation use a 5A 250V time delay fuse Fluke PN 109215 e For 220 V or 240 V operation use a 2 5A 250V time delay fuse Fluke PN 851931 GROUNDING THE CALIBRATOR The Calibrator uses controlled overvoltage techniques that require the Calibrator to be grounded whenever normal mode or common mode ac voltages or transient voltages may occur The enclosure must be grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord or through the rear panel CHASSIS GROUND binding post USE
419. s the RS 232 C settings for the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port To return the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port see the SP SET command The factory default values are shown below in bold type To return to the factory defaults see the FORMAT SETUP command Responses baud rate value 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 flow control XON xon xoff NOSTALL none RTS rts cts number data bits DBIT7 7 bits or DBITS 8 bits number stop bits SBIT1 1 bit or SBIT2 2 bits parity PNONE none PODD odd PEVEN even Example SET returns 9600 DBIT8 SBIT1 PNONE Returns the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port as shown when set to the factory default values VAL X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Measurement Value command Returns the last value of the thermocouple temperature pressure or scope impedance measurement The unit returns indicates the status of the reading Parameter Optional Units to return Responses 1 Float Measured temperature or pressure 2 Character CEL FAR OHM F PSI MHG INHG 20 FTH20 MH20 BAR PAL G CM2 INH2060F OVER value is over or under capability OPENTC open thermocouple or NONE wrong mode or no measurement Example VAL return
420. s to activate the calibrator output Two softkey labels appear on the Control Display V NOR V AUX and WAVE MENUS 4 35 5520A Operators Manual 4 36 a WAVE Va AJA MENUS AAR 2 A WAVE s s REF sine zine tied tri tri square truncz truncz SHRM lop cn 10 MHz i MHz 0 00 int SM HCOLIT ARAE nnO95f eps V NOR Voltage at NORMAL Terminals V AUX Voltage at AUX Terminals This is an information only softkey position and does not have an associated function It shows the output function is dual ac voltage WAVE MENUS Waveform Menus Opens submenus for selecting the type of harmonic waveform front panel LO terminal condition and phase HARMONIC MENUS Harmonic Frequency Menus Opens submenus for selecting harmonic outputs See Setting Harmonics later in this chapter for more information WAVE Normal Waveform Selects the waveform for the voltage at the front panel NORMAL terminals See Waveform Types later in this chapter for more information AUXWAVE Auxiliary Waveform Selects the waveform for the voltage at the front panel AUX terminals See Waveform Types later in this chapter for more information LO s Low Potential Output Terminals The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the 5520A When the front panel NORMAL LO and A
421. sample program shows how you can use WAT 10 REMOTE 20 PRINT 084 OUT 100V 1KHZ OPER WAI 30 PRINT 4 OUT 40 PRINT 84 A B C 50 PRINT OUTPUT SETTLED 60 PRINT OUTPUT IS A B C 70 END 5 64 Taking a Thermocouple Measurement 5520A ADDRESS IS 4 READ THE OUTPUT VALUE AS CONTAINS THE OUTPUT VALUE The following program takes one temperature measurement at a time 10 REM Set Bus Timeout to 20 seconds Init IEEE Bus 20 TIMEOUT 20 1000 30 INIT PORT 0 40 CLEAR 6 100 REM Reset 5520A TC measurement mod 110 PRINT 6 RST TYPE J TC MEAS FAR 200 PRINT Hit Carriage Return to take a Reading 210 INPUTLINE A 220 REM Request the measurement value 230 PRINT 06 VAL 240 REM Read measurement unit 250 INPUT 06 M U 260 GOTO 200 5 65 Taking a Pressure Measurement The following program takes one pressure measurement at a time 10 REM Set Bus Timeout to 20 seconds Init IEEE Bus 20 TIMEOUT 20 x 1000 30 INIT PORT 0 40 CLEAR 46 100 REM Reset 5520A pressure measurement mode 110 PRINT 6 RST PRES MEAS 200 PRINT Hit Carriage Return to take a Reading 210 INPUTLINE A 220 REM Request the measurement value 230 PRINT 06 VAL 240 REM Read measurement unit 250 INPUT 66 M
422. see Figure 1 4 The current may be provided 60 T I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in C room temperature is about 23 C and Lis the output current in amperes For example 17 A at 23 C could be provided for 60 17 23 20 minutes each hour 2 Floor specification is 1500 within 30 seconds of selecting operate For operating times gt 30 seconds the floor specification is 750 pA Range 0 to 329 999 uA 0 to 3 29999 mA 0 to 32 9999 mA 0 to 329 999 mA 0 to 2 99999 A Oto 20 5 Bandwidth 0 1 Hz to 10 Hz p p 2nA 20 nA 200 nA 2000 nA 20 uA 200 uA Noise Bandwidth 10 Hz to 10 kHz rms 20 nA 200 nA 2 0 pA 20 uA 1mA 10 mA Introduction and Specifications Specifications 1 DC Current Specifications cont Minutes per Hour Current Amps r 80 L 70 60 F 50 o L 40 gt 2 a 30 20 10 0 Figure 1 4 Allowable Duration of Current gt 11 nn326f eps 5520A Operators Manual 1 16 Resistance Specifications Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C ppm of output floor 2 Floor Range of output Time amp temp since ohms zero cal Resolution Allowable Current 1 90 days 1 year 12hrs 1 C 7 days 5 0 to 35 40 0 001 0 01 0 0001 1 mA to 125 mA
423. selected This is when the output location changes to the 20A terminal An overload condition is detected The OPR Operate key places the 5520A in operate mode Operate mode is indicated by OPR in the lower left corner of the Output Display and the lit indicator on the OPR key EARTH The EARTH Earth Ground key opens and closes an internal connection between the NORMAL LO terminal and earth ground An indicator on the key indicates when this connection is made The power up default condition is earth disabled indicator off The SCOPE Oscilloscope key activates or deactivates an oscilloscope calibration option if it is installed An indicator on the key indicates when the option is activated If an oscilloscope calibration option is not installed in the calibrator and the SCOPE key is pressed the calibrator displays an error message The EXGRD External Guard key opens and closes an internal connection between the internal NORMAL LO signal ground and the internal guard shield An indicator on the key indicates when this connection is made The power up default condition is external guard disabled indicator off Hi p N The PREV MENU Previous Menu key recalls the previous set of menu choices Each press of this key backs up one level of the menu tree until the display indicates the top level menu selection of the function selected Softkeys The functions of the five unlabeled blue softkeys are identified by labels on the
424. sembling the meter Refer to the diagrams and access procedures in the 80 Series Service Manual 4 66 Front Panel Operation 4 Sample Applications 4 62 4 63 Verify that the calibrator is set to 0 V dc in standby Press if it is not Turn on the 80 Series DMM and set its function switch to y Connect a set of test leads to the DMM as shown in Figure 4 18 Set the calibrator to 3 5 V dc and press The DMM should now display 3 500 0 001 If necessary adjust R21 to obtain the proper display poses My dp 6 Set the DMM function switch to Y and set the calibrator output to 3 500 V at 100 Hz 7 The DMM should display 3 500 0 002 If necessary adjust R34 to obtain the proper display 8 Change the calibrator output to 10 KHz 9 The DMM should display 3 500 0 004 If necessary adjust C2 to obtain the proper display 10 Change the calibrator output to 35 00 V at 10 KHz 11 The DMM should display 35 00 0 04 If necessary adjust C3 to obtain the proper display Testing a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer The Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer hereafter referred to as the Tester requires two voltages at varying phase relationships to test the functionality of the Power and Harmonics features The procedure for testing these two functions of the Tester are included here to demonstrate the operation of the dual voltage function of the Fluke 5520A Note These procedures are included here as a
425. seven numeric keys For example 123 4567 Press to select the polarity of the voltage default is Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry for the NORMAL terminals For example 123 4567 mV below 1z3 45 amp 65 mV 2 L nn071f eps 4 32 Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output Note Voltage on the AUX output is limited to 3 3 V maximum 9 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at the AUX terminals maximum six numeric keys For example 234 567 10 Press to select the polarity of the voltage default is 11 Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m 12 Press y 13 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries for the NORMAL terminals upper reading and AUX terminals lower reading see below 123 4567 mV 234 567 mV 2 4 15 14 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical TEY gosli EL o puii lir nnO90f eps 15 Press to activate the calibrator output A softkey labeled LO s appears on the Control Display tied 2 L tied open nnO91f eps e LO s Low Potential Out
426. shows the value of your entry For example a leading phase angle of 123 45 degrees below SHOW PF appears only for sine waves Fhase 0 Hew phase A1 A CA AT Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the New phase line and copies it to the Phase line of the Control Display 0 TEDN 4123 45 Press CE Jone or more times to return to previous menus Entering a Power Factor Complete the following procedure to enter a phase shift as a power factor PF PF Cosine where is the phase shift This procedure assumes you have already sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output using sine waves as the waveform 1 2 3 4 7 8 Press the softkey WAVE MENUS opening the waveform menu Press the softkey PHASE opening the phase entry menu Press the softkey SHOW PF opening the power factor entry menu Press the decimal point key and numeric keys to enter the desired power factor maximum three numeric keys For example 678 Press the softkey PF to toggle between a leading lead or lagging lag power factor default is lead The Control Display now shows the value of your entry For example a leading power factor of 678 below Factor 1 000 FF SHO Hew pF 6FE lead FHASE ES A 5 nn112f eps Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the New pf line and copies it to the Power
427. ss To disconnect the signal press stev You cannot change the output impedance in Edge mode e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to toggle the trigger off and on When on the reading will show 1 which indicates that the external trigger is at the same frequency as the edge output The external trigger can be useful for many digital storage oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on fast rise time signals You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing e MODE Indicates you in Edge mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes 8 72 5520A SC300 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 100 Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope This sample procedure shows how to check the oscilloscope s pulse response Before you check your oscilloscope see your oscilloscope s manual for the recommended calibration settings Before you start this procedure verify that you are running the oscilloscope option in Edge mode If you are the Control Display shows the following menu at SCOFE TRIG MODE terminal 50 OFF edge La 5 si s glo28i eps Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the pulse response 1 Connect the 5520A to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope Select 500 impedance or use 500 ter
428. ss 221010 2 then press ENTER 8 27 5520A Operators Manual Note You may enter the equivalent frequency instead of the time marker value For example instead of entering 200 ns you may enter 5 MHz 3 Set your oscilloscope s time base to show 10 time markers The time markers should align with the oscilloscope divisions as shown in the example below For an accurate reading align the signal s peaks with the horizontal center axis Peaks are aligned with center axis gl011i eps 4 Repeat this procedure for all time marker values recommended for your oscilloscope Repeat for digital and analog mode as required Some oscilloscopes may need the magnification changed while calibrating in analog mode 5 Remove the signal by pressing stsy 8 42 Testing the Trigger SC600 option The oscilloscope s ability to trigger on different waveforms can be tested using the wave generator When the wave generator is used a square sine or triangle wave is transmitted and the wave s output impedance offset and voltage can be varied in order to test the triggering capability at different levels Note The wave generator should not be used for checking the accuracy of your oscilloscope 8 28 5520A SC600 Option 8 Testing the Trigger SC600 option The wave generator is available through the WAVEGEN menu shown below To access this menu press the so
429. standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns SACV for ac or SDCV for dc Example SCOPE VOLT OUT 4 V 1 kHz ac voltage 4 V peak to peak 1 kHz EDGE Oscilloscope EDGE mode Programs 25 mV peak to peak 1 MHz output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns EDGE Example SCOPE EDGE OUT 0 5 V 5 kHz Edge 0 5 V peak to peak 5 kHz LEVSINE SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns LEVSINE Example SCOPE LEVSINE OUT 1 V 50 kHz Leveled sine wave 1 V peak to peak 50 kHz MARKER Oscilloscope MARKER mode Programs the period to 1 ms output at the SCOPE BNC standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns MARKER Oscilloscope LEVSINE mode Programs 30 mV peak to peak 50 kHz output at the Example SCOPE MARKER OUT 2 MS Marker period of 2 ms WAVEGEN Oscilloscope WAVEGEN mode Programs 20 mV peak to peak square wave 1 kHz no offset output impedance 1 MQ standby if from OFF or previously in standby FUNC returns WAVEGEN Example SCOPE WAVEGEN OUT 1 V 1 kHz Wave Generator 1 V peak to peak 1 kHz 8 35 5520A Operators Manual 8 36 Table 8 15 SCOPE Command Parameters cont Parameter Description Example VIDEO Oscilloscope VIDEO mode Programs 100 output 1 V p p line marker 10 format NTSC FUNC returns VIDEO
430. strument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register and the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register ISCEO Loads two bytes into the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register ISCEO Returns the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register ISCE1 Loads two bytes into the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register ISCE1 Returns the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register ISCR Returns the OR of the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register and the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register and clears both registers ISCRO Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 1 Change Register ISCR1 Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 0 Change Register ISR Returns the contents of the Instrument Status Register ONTIME Returns the time since the Calibrator was powered up last 6 13 Thermocouple TC Measurement Commands TC MEAS Changes the operating mode to thermocouple measurement TC OFFSET Sets a temperature offset for the thermocouple measurement mode TC OFFSET Returns the temperature offset when in the thermocouple measurement mode TC OTCD Returns whether or not the open thermocouple detection circuit is set TC OTCD Activates or deactivates the open thermocouple detection circuit in thermocouple measurement mode VAL Returns the last thermocouple pressure or for the SC600 impedance measurement value VVAL Returns t
431. strument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Parameter value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example SCEO 6272 Load decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 to enable bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT ISCEO X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable query Returns the two bytes from the 16 bit ISCEO register See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Response value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example SCEO returns 6272 Returns decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 if bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT are set to 1 ISCE1 X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable command Loads the two bytes into the 16 bit ISCE1 register See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information 6 22 Remote Commands Commands 6 Parameter value decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 SCE Load decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 to enable bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT 6272 Example ISCE1 Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable
432. t Arm nun lt x lt ODUZPESESCOCO rm omm zc gt oooo 1000 1001 1010 1011 on o 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 0001 0010 0011 NOOO 0100 0101 0110 0111 C3 m CGD GD m 09 G T zm o r VIA 074 075 076 077 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 3 oOzocomco B 5520A Operators Manual B 4 Appendix C RS 232 IEEE 488 Cables and Connectors IEEE 488 Connector The IEEE 488 connector on the rear panel mates with an IEEE 488 standard cable The pin assignments of the rear panel IEEE 488 connector are shown in Figure C 1 IEEE 488 connection cables are available from Fluke as shown in Table C 1 See Chapter 9 Accessories for ordering information Table C 1 IEEE 488 Connection Cables IEEE 488 Connection Cable Fluke Part Number 0 5 m 1 64 feet PM2295 05 1 m 3 28 feet PM2295 10 2 m 6 56 feet PM2295 20 SHIELD SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 DIO2 LOGIC GND GND GND DIO8 DIO6 GND 10 8 6 FE 01 EPS Figure C 1 IEEE 488 Connector Pinout connection side C 1 5520A Operators Manual Serial Connectors The two 9 pin serial connectors on the rear panel of the 5520A Calibrator are used to interface with a computer or controller and an instrument serial
433. t Function is DCV The instrument has been on for 134 minutes Check for programming errors as in the following sample programs Check the Error Available EAV bit in the serial poll register using a serial poll 300 A SPL 6 CHECK FOR ERRORS 310 IF A AND 8 THEN PRINT There was an error 320 PRINT 86 CLS CLEAR ERRORS Retrieve errors and explanations as follows Since errors are accumulated in a queue you must read the entire queue to retrieve and clear all the errors 400 PRINT 86 ERR CHECK FOR ERRORS 410 INPUT 86 AS READ IN THE ERROR 420 IF A 0 THEN GOTO 500 NO MORE ERRORS 430 PRINT Error AS PRINT ERROR AND EXPLANATION 440 GOTO 400 500 END 5 60 Writing an SRQ and Error Handler It is good practice to include fault error handling routines in your applications The following sample program lines show a method for halting program execution on occurrence of an SRQ Service Request on the bus checking to see if the Calibrator is the source of the SRQ retrieving its fault messages and acting on the faults You should modify and extend this code as necessary for your application If you want to use SRQs first use the SRE ESE and ISCE commands to enable the desired event Refer to Checking 5520A Status for more information
434. t maximum five numeric keys Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press the kilo multiplier key k Then press the key For example 1 1234 kHz below 2 44947 V 1 1234 kHz 2 L 9 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical 1 STEM nn075f eps 10 Press to activate the calibrator output Several softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the ac voltage function depending on which waveform is selected DUTY OFFSET and WAVE 4 22 Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 4 24 DUTY OFFSET amp REF WAVE au 00 0 0000D wv HEHLIS zquare L S a 1 00 ta Sec zine 77 005 specifications tri Square trunci nn076f eps e DUTY Duty Cycle When the square wave is selected DUTY appears allowing you to modify the duty cycle of the square wave The range is 1 00 to 99 00 The default is 50 00 The duty cycle must be 50 00 if you want to enter an OFFSET see below e OFFSET Voltage Offset appears when the desired output is less than 33 V sine waves 65 V square waves or 93 V triangle waves and truncated sine waves This softkey allows you to add a positive or negative dc offset voltage to the ac output signal See Entering a DC Offset later in this chapter for more information When a voltage output
435. t Win32 interactive control A DOS window opens with a prompt as shown here Win32 Inter ontrol Copyright onal Instruments Corporat ion ALL right Type help or q to quit 5 9 5520A Operators Manual 6 Atthe prompt type the following line to activate the IEEE interface card lt ibdev 0 4 0 10 1 0 The second number in this line is the primary address of the calibrator If the address has been changed from the factory default change this line accordingly 7 The prompt reads uao From this prompt type lt ibwrt remote then press the ENTER or RETURN key Verify that the calibrator is now in remote control 9 Select the Local command from the Control menu then click OK in the Parameter Input Window Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes back to the reset condition below S30 my auta te 4 10 From the ud0 prompt type q and then press the ENTER or RETURN key Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control The Calibrator is fully programmable over an RS 232 link with a PC the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port Figure 5 2 You can enter individual commands from a terminal write your own programs using for example a Windows based language such as Visual Basic or run optional Windows based Fluke software such as 5520 CAL or MET CAL The RS 232 cable length for the port should not exceed 15 meters 50 feet although longer cable lengths are
436. tage Limits 1020 V Remote I F SROSTR term Remote commands see Chapter 6 SRO 02x 02x 04 04x PUD string cleared Output Display and Control Display respectively There are 8 levels 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Reference Clock Internal dBm Impedance 600 Q Defaults Reference Phase 0 Pressure Unit PSI 6 19 5520A Operators Manual 6 20 FUNC X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Function query Returns the present output measurement or calibration function See the response below for output amp measurement modes Responses Example Returns DCV_ HARMONIC DCV ACV LJ FI V X IEEE 488 dc volts function ac volts function dc current function ac current function ohms function capacitance function temperature with an rtd function temperature with a thermocouple function dc power function ac power function dual dc volts function dual ac volts function measure temperature with a thermocouple oscilloscope ac volts function oscilloscope dc volts function oscilloscope marker function oscilloscope leveled sine function oscilloscope edge function UNC returns DCV_DCV DCV when the Calibrator output function dual dc volts RS 232
437. ted and the output increments or decrements as the knob is rotated If a digit rolls past O or 9 the digit to its left or right is carried An error display appears on the Control Display showing the difference between the original reference output and the new output The 4 and K keys adjust the magnitude of changes by moving the highlighted digit The 5017 key allows you to move from voltage or current to frequency and back In practice for voltage and current outputs the knob and arrow keys are used to adjust output until the UUT reads correctly The error display then displays UUT deviation from the reference Features Softkey Menu Trees 3 Que 9 The power switch turns the power on and off The switch is latching push push type When the switch is latched in power is on The MORE MODES key provides access to the measure pressure function You need a Fluke 700 Series pressure module to measure pressure DIV The DIV Divide key immediately changes the output to 1 10th reference value not necessarily the present output value if the value is within performance limits In the SCOPE mode the DIV key changes the output to the next lower range The MULT Multiply key immediately changes the output to 10X the reference value not necessarily the present output value if the value is within performance limits This key sets the 5520A to standby if this change is from below 33 V In the SCOPE
438. ter describes methods for operating the Calibrator by remote control Remote control can be interactive with the user controlling each step from a terminal or under the control of a computer program running the Calibrator in an automated system The Calibrator rear panel has three ports for remote operations IEEE 488 parallel port also known as a General Purpose Interface Bus or GPIB port and two RS 232 serial ports SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT IEEE 488 The IEEE 488 parallel port is usually used in larger control and calibration systems An IEEE 488 system is more costly to set up but has the ability to serve multiple Calibrators and multiple UUTs Also parallel system throughput is faster than serial system throughput The controller in an IEBE 488 system is typically a MS DOS compatible personal computer PC equipped with one or more IEEE 488 ports You can write your own computer programs for system operation using the command set or you can purchase optional Fluke calibration software MET CAL or 5520A CAL and property management software MET TRACK Typical IEEE 488 configurations are shown in Figure 5 1 The configuration showing the PC with two IEEE 488 ports is used with MET CAL which prefers UUTs on a separate IEEE 488 port You can also piggy back the connectors on a single IEEE 488 port Remote Operation Introduction 5 IEEE 488 Port ET Va IEEE 488 Port 5520A Calibrator UUT System for a UUT w
439. th a two wire input This connection is used for all values of resistance and capacitance and is usually selected when the analog meter or DMM level of accuracy does not require the additional precision This is the default condition whenever an ohms or capacitance output is made following an output that was not ohms or capacitance 5520A Operators Manual 4 18 Cable Connection Instructions Table 4 1 indicates a figure reference for each type of connection between a UUT and the 5520A Calibrator referencing Figures 4 2 through 4 10 When calibrating Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs using the three terminal connection shown in Figure 4 9 be sure the test leads have identical resistances to cancel any errors due to lead resistance This can be accomplished for example by using three identical test lead lengths and identical connector styles When calibrating thermocouples it is especially important to use the correct hookup wire and miniconnector between the Calibrator front panel TC terminal and the UUT You must use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of thermocouple For example if simulating a temperature output for a type K thermocouple use type K thermocouple wire and type K miniplugs for the hookup To connect the calibrator to a UUT proceed as follows 1 Ifthe calibrator is turned on press to remove the output from the calibrator terminals 2 Make the connections to the UUT by selecting the app
440. the remote command ESR The ESR is cleared set to 0 every time it is read To read the contents of the ESE send the remote command ESE The ESE is not cleared when it is read When you read either register the Calibrator responds by sending a decimal number that when converted to binary represents bits 0 through 15 The following sample BASIC program retrieves the contents of both registers 10 THIS PROGRAM READS THE ESR AND THE ESE REGISTERS 20 PRINT 86 ESR ASK FOR THE ESR CONTENTS 30 INPUT 086 RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS 40 PRINT 86 ESE ASK FOR THE ESE CONTENTS 50 INPUT 6 B RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS 60 PRINT ESR A DISPLAY THE ESR REGISTER CONTENTS VALUE 70 PRINT ESE B DISPLAY THE ESE REGISTER CONTENTS VALUE 80 END 5 41 5520A Operators Manual Convert the contents of variables A and B into binary and you can read the status of the registers For example if A is 32 its binary equivalent is 00000000 00100000 Therefore bit 5 CME in the ESR is set 1 and the rest of the bits are reset 0 This means that the Calibrator tried to execute an incorrectly formed command By setting the bits in the ESE you can mask disable the associated bits in the ESR For example to prevent t
441. the well and positioning the bead with a piece of tissue may help the bead stay in place Do not hold the bead in place with your hands as this may introduce a measurement error Wait for the temperature reading to stabilize Adjust R16 for a temperature reading on the UUT that is the same as displayed on the 5520A Calibrator Power down the UUT and reassemble Ln a de W W Wa UA a N d ke A l CA CA CA CA CA CA CA CA 5 34 5 35 Chapter 5 Remote Operation Contents INTO DU CHIOM RD Setting up the IEEE 488 Port for Remote Control TEEE 488 Port Setup Procedure sss sese sese eee Testing the IEBE 488 Port Setting up the RS 232 Host Port for Remote Control RS 232 Host Port Setup Procedure eese Testing the RS 232 Host Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic Setting up the RS 232 UUT Port for Remote Control RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure sss sese sese sees Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via RS 232 Host Port Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation using Visual Basic Testing the RS 232 UUT Port via IEEE 488 Port Changing between Remote
442. ther designated standards is qualified transfer error The sum of all new errors induced during the process of comparing one quantity against another transfer standard Any working standard used to compare a measurement process system or device at one location or level with another measurement process system or device at another location or level transport standard A transfer standard that is rugged enough to allow shipment by common carrier to another location 5520A Operators Manual true power The actual power real power used to produce heat or work Compare to apparent power true value Also called legal value the accepted consensus 1 the correct value of the quantity being measured uncertainty The maximum difference between the accepted consensus or true value and the measured value of a quantity Uncertainty is normally expressed in units of ppm parts per million or as a percentage units Symbols or names that define the measured quantities Examples of units are V mV A kW and dBm See also SI System of Units UUT Unit Under Test An abbreviated name for an instrument that is being tested or calibrated var Symbol for voltampere reactive the unit of reactive power as opposed to real power in watts verification Checking the functional performance and uncertainty of an instrument or standard without making adjustments to it or changing its calibration constants volt The u
443. thermal block and when the selected thermocouple has copper wires Press the REF softkey to enter the value of the external temperature reference e REF Temperature Reference Displays the value of the temperature reference When the Reference Source is Internal the display shows the internal reference When the Reference Source is External the display shows the value you entered for external reference OFFSET Measurement Display Offset Selects an offset value to be added or subtracted from the actual measurement This is useful for differential measurements temperatures above and below a desired temperature e TYPE Thermocouple Type Selects the thermocouple type used for measurement The default is K The 10uV C setting is used for customer supplied linearizations 1 mV RH and 1 mV C settings are used for the Vaisala humidity temperature probes 4 35 Waveform Types 4 46 AC voltage ac current dual ac voltage and ac power functions provide a softkey to select between four different waveform types sine wave sine triangle wave tri square wave square and truncated sine wave truncs When the calibrator output is sine wave ac power or dual ac voltage the Control Display shows additional softkeys for harmonics and fundamental frequencies Front Panel Operation 4 Waveform Types 4 36 Sine wave When the wave selection is sine a sine wave current or voltage signal is present on the calibrator outputs Fi
444. ting DC Power Output Note Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the 5520A via the LO s softkey selection tied The calibrator produces a dc power output by sourcing a dc voltage on the NORMAL outputs and a dc current on the AUX outputs Complete the following procedure to set a dc power output If you make an entry error press CE or more times to clear the display then reenter the value Caution Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the interconnecting wiring 1 Press to clear any output from the 5520A 2 Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT by adapting the voltage and current connections 4 26 Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 3 4 997 h m 10 11 12 13 14 15 Set the UUT to measure dc power on the desired range Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output maximum seven numeric keys For example 123 4567 Note At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above nominal you may notice a slight high pitched sound This is normal Press to select the polarity of the voltage default is Press a multiplier key if necessary For example press m Press y The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry For example 123 4567 mV below 123 4567 mV La 4
445. ting Line Voltage The calibrator arrives from the factory configured for the line voltage normally appropriate for the country of purchase or as specified at the time of your purchase order You can operate the 5520 A Calibrator from one of four line voltage settings 100 V 120 V 200 V and 240 V 47 Hz to 63 Hz To check the line voltage setting note the voltage setting visible through the window in the power line fuse compartment cover Figure 2 1 The allowed line voltage variation is 10 above or below the line voltage setting To change the line voltage setting complete the following procedure 1 Disconnect line power 2 Open the fuse compartment by inserting a screwdriver blade in the tab located at the left side of the compartment and gently pry until it can be removed with the fingers 3 Remove the line voltage selector assembly by gripping the line voltage indicator tab with pliers and pulling it straight out of its connector 4 Rotate the line voltage selector assembly to the desired voltage and reinsert Verify the appropriate fuse for the selected line voltage 100 V 120 V use 5 A 250 V slow blow 220 V 240 V use 1 25 A 250 V slow blow and reinstall the fuse compartment by pushing it back into place until the tab locks Preparing for Operation 2 Connecting to Line Power 2 5 Connecting to Line Power ZA Warning To avoid shock hazard connect the factory supplied three conductor line power cord to a pro
446. tions for resistance Figures 4 5 and 4 6 illustrate connection configurations for capacitance The external sensing capability of the four and two wire compensated connections provides increased precision for resistance values below 110 kQ and capacitance values 110 nF and above Part of the setting up the calibrator output for resistance and capacitance includes selections for four wire compensation COMP 4 wire two wire compensation COMP 2 wire and two wire no compensation COMP off See Setting Resistance Output and Setting Capacitance Output later in this chapter Note that compensated connections for capacitance are to compensate for lead and internal resistances not for lead and internal capacitances Four Wire Connection The four wire connection is typical for calibrating laboratory measurement equipment Increased precision is provided for resistance values below 110 kQ For other values the lead resistances do not degrade the calibration and the Calibrator changes the compensation to off COMP off Two Wire Compensation The two wire connection is typical for calibrating precision handheld Digital Multimeters DMMs with a two wire input Increased precision is provided for resistance values below 110 and capacitance values 110 nF and above For other values the Calibrator changes the compensation to off COMP off Compensation Off Compensation off is a typical connection for calibrating handheld analog meters or DMMs wi
447. to calibrate the vertical gain 1 Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope making sure the oscilloscope is terminated at the proper impedance 1 MQ for this example Verify that the key on the Calibrator is lit indicating that the signal is connected 2 Key in the voltage level that is recommended for your oscilloscope For example to enter 20 mV press 2 0 v then press enter See Keying ina Value earlier in this chapter 3 Adjustthe oscilloscope as necessary The waveform should be similar to the one shown below with the gain at exactly the amount specified for the calibration settings for your oscilloscope This example shows the gain at 20 mV to be 4 divisions at 5 mV per division gl006i bmp 4 Change the voltage to the next value recommended for calibrating your oscilloscope model and repeat this procedure at the new voltage level verifying the gain is correct according to the specifications in your manual 5 Repeat the procedure for each channel 5520A SC600 Option 8 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope 8 30 Calibrating the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope The pulse response is calibrated with a square wave signal that has a fast leading edge rise time Using this signal you adjust the oscilloscope as necessary until it meets its particular specifications for rise time and pulse aberrations
448. tput current 1 A dc for 10 watts real power Example POWER returns 1 00000E 01 Returns 10 when the output voltage is 10 V ac and output current 2 A ac and power factor is 5 for 10 watts real power PR PRT X IEEE X RS 232 X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Description Prints a self calibration report out the selected serial port STORED ACTIVE or CONSTS PRINT designed to be read SPREAD designed to be loaded into a spreadsheet Parameters 1 Type of report to print 2 Format of report 3 Calibration interval to be used for instrument specifications in the report I90D 90 day spec I1Y I year spec 4 Serial port through which to print HOST UUT Example PR PRT STORED PRINT I90D HOST PRES X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Pressure Module query Queries the attached pressure module for its model and serial number Responses Indefinite ASCII A message containing four fields separated by commas as follows 1 Manufacturer 2 Model number 3 Serial number 4 Firmware revision 0 Example FLUKE 700P05 9467502 0 Remote Commands 6 Commands PRES MEAS X IEEE
449. ts may be entered in UPPER or lower case Table 5 8 Units Accepted in Parameters and Used in Responses Units Meaning Or copatom imela O E we copatom triads Z Os H OEO y Os s Period in units of seconds 5 33 5520A Operators Manual Table 5 8 Units Accepted in Parameters and Used in Responses cont PSI Pressure in pound force pre square inch MHG Pressure in meters of mercury INHG Pressure in inches of mercury INH2O Pressure in inches of water 2 Pressure in feet of water MH20 Pressure in meters of water BAR Pressure in bar PAL Pressure in Pascal G CM2 Pressure in grams per centimeter squared INH2O60F Pressure in inches of water at 60 degrees Fahrenheit General Rules The general rules for parameter usage is as follows 1 When a command has more than one parameter the parameters must be separated by commas For example OUT 1V 2A 2 Numeric parameters may have up 15 significant digits and their exponents can be in the range 1 0E 20 Including too many or too few parameters causes a command error Null parameters cause an error e g the adjacent commas OUT 1V 2A Expressions for example 4 2 13 are not allowed as parameters Qc m GR Binary Block Data can be in one of two forms Indefinite Length and
450. ture on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired temperature output maximum 6 numeric keys For example 123 456 5 Foran output in C press the key For an output in F press and then the ec key 6 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your temperature output For example 123 456 C below nn102f eps 7 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical STBY nn103f eps 8 Press to activate the calibrator output Four softkey labels appear on the Control Display Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output Note The entered temperature will be cleared to 0 C 32 F if you change between tc and rtd or change the type of thermocouple except for a type B thermocouple which clears to 600 C If this should occur select OUTPUT tc the desired thermocouple TYPE and then reenter the temperature Guta TC terminal 50 09700 mV MENS 5 gu L TYPE K cr CL tc L Jdin li Tdin Louver imo B IM E J ps REF SRC REF Du intrnl E EJ 2 0 BLC intrnl 250 to F extrnl 2316 HE r ote A im L Jdin Tdin Louver Limite B LC E nn104f eps Out TC terminal Output at the front panel TC terminals Displays the actual dc voltage
451. ty The relationship between two quantities when a change is the first quantity is directly proportional to a change in the second quantity linearity error Linearity error occurs when the response curve of a meter is not exactly a straight line This type of error is measured by fixing two points on the response curve drawing a line through the points then measuring how far the curve deviates from the straight line at various points in the response curve MAP Measurement Assurance Program A program for measurement process A MAP provides information to demonstrate that the total uncertainty of the measurements data including both random error and systematic components of error relative to national or other designated standards is quantified and sufficiently small to meet requirements MTBF Mean Time Between Failures The time interval in operating hours that can be expected between failure of equipment MTBF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived through extrapolation MTTF Mean Time To Fail The time interval in operating hours that can be expected until the first failure of equipment MTTF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived through extrapolation MTTR Mean Time to Repair The average time in hours required to repair failed equipment metrology The science of and the field of knowledge concerned with measurement minimum use specifications A compilation of spec
452. tyles Set the UUT to measure temperature on the desired range 4 Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired temperature output maximum 6 numeric keys For example 123 456 5 For an output in C press the key For F press and then the key 4 42 Front Panel Operation 4 Setting the Output 6 The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your temperature output For example 123 456 C below nn102f eps 7 Press enter The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it into the Output Display below is typical STBY nn103f eps 8 Press to activate the calibrator output Four softkey labels appear on the Control Display Press the OUTPUT softkey to toggle the rtd selection displaying the rtd setup menu and four softkey positions Note The temperature you entered above will be cleared to 0 C 32 F if you change between tc thermocouple and rtd resistance temperature detector or change the type of rtd If this occurs select OUTPUT rtd the desired rtd TYPE and then reenter the temperature following steps 4 to 8 OUT di NORMAL d RE OUTPUT COMP 100 000 s 385 rtd OFF 2 5 rtd OFF tc 2 Wire 4 wire nn105f eps 4 43 5520A Operators Manual 4 44 Out NORMAL displays the location of the output terminals always NORMAL for rtd connections TYPE RTD Type selects the rtd curve from
453. uest A control line that any device on the bus can assert to indicate that it requires attention Refer to Checking 5520A Status for details STB Status Byte The status byte is what the 5520A sends when it responds to a serial poll interface message SPE 5 29 Compound Commands A compound command is two or more commands in a single command line For example the following two commands could be entered individually OUT 1 V 60 HZ OPER where the Calibrator sources 1 V ac at 60 Hz and then goes into operate or they could be combined into a compound command OUT 1 V 60 HZ OPER using a semi colon as a separator Care must be taken when a compound command includes any of the coupled commands See Coupled Commands 5 30 Coupled Commands A coupled command refers to two or more commands that appear in a compound command see Compound Commands that perform actions that could interfere with each other causing a fault Commands in a compound command are separated by using the character Compound commands using only coupled commands are not order dependent In Chapter 6 the command graphic X Coupled shows a check for coupled commands The coupled commands excluding scope commands are CUR_POST DBMZ DC_OFFSET HARMONIC OUT WAVE 5 29 5520A Operators Manual An example of the coupled command interference is the command RST OUT 100V 1KHZ WAVE SINE followed by the
454. ument Input Buffer Operation Remote Operation 5 Introduction Warning The 5520A Calibrator hereafter referred to as The Calibrator can produce voltages up to 1000 V rms and must be programmed with caution to prevent hazardous voltages from being produced without sufficient warning to the operator Write programs carefully and test them extensively to ensure safe operation of the Calibrator Fluke suggests that you include error catching routines in your programs These error catching routines will help you identify programming errors that may cause the Calibrator to behave other than intended You can program the Calibrator to cause an SRQ when an error is detected by setting the Service Request Enable SRQ register The following skeleton program includes error catching code 10 PRINT 4 CLS Clear status 20 PRINT Q4 SRE 8 Set SRE Error Available 30 ON SRQ GOTO 1000 Enable SRQ Function 100 Place body of program here 900 STOP End of program 1000 REM Start of SRO Handler Start routine 1010 PRINT Q4 FAULT Request fault code 1020 INPUT 84 A Input fault code 1030 PRINT 64 EXPLAIN A Request fault text 1040 INPUT Q4 AS Input fault text 1050 PRINT Fault 4 5 detected Print message 1060 PRINT Q4 STBY Place 5520A in standby 1070 STOP 5520A Operators Manual 5 1 5 4 Introduction This chap
455. uncated sine wave current or voltage signal is present on the calibrator outputs Figure 4 14 The variables for the truncated sine wave are amplitude and frequency Whenever a truncated sine wave is selected the Output Display indicates amplitudes in p p units 44 1 2 Period P Peak to Peak 4 67 5 112 5 Figure 4 14 Truncated Sine Wave nnO29f eps 4 40 Setting Harmonics When the calibrator is outputting dual ac voltages or ac power sine waves only the calibrator sources two signals with adjustable harmonic difference with a maximum harmonic frequency output of 10 kHz For example a 120 V 60 Hz signal can be set on the front panel NORMAL terminals and a 1 V 300 Hz 5th harmonic output on the AUX terminals The fundamental can be configured on either the NORMAL or the AUX terminals with the harmonic output on the opposite terminals Note that the maximum AUX output is 3 3 V while the maximum NORMAL output is 1000 V Unless both the fundamental and harmonic frequencies are allowed for the given amplitude the output is not allowed Complete the following procedure to enter a harmonic output This procedure assumes you have already sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output 1 Press the softkey WAVE MENUS opening the waveform menu 2 Press the softkey HARMONIC MENUS opening the harmonic submenu below is typical 4 48 Front Panel Operation 4 Adjusting the Phase
456. uple C type thermocouple E type thermocouple J type thermocouple K type thermocouple default N type thermocouple R type thermocouple S type thermocouple T type thermocouple 10 uV C linear output relative humidity 1 mV C linear output Example TC TYPE returns K Returns K when the thermocouple type for simulating a temperature output is a K type thermocouple TC TYPE D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Thermocouple Type Default command Sets the default thermocouple TC sensor type which is saved in the Calibrator non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands The TC type is set to the default at power on and reset Parameters B 2 K N R S T x Y Z B type thermocouple C type thermocouple E type thermocouple J type thermocouple K type thermocouple default N type thermocouple R type thermocouple S type thermocouple T type thermocouple 10 uV C linear output relative humidity 1 mV C linear output Example TC TYPE Dvd Set the thermocouple type default to a type J thermocouple 6 49 5520A Operators Manual 6 50 TC TYPE D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled
457. urve NI120 120 ohm RTD empirical curve Example RTD TYPE returns PT3926 Returns PT3926 when a 100 ohm RTD with curve 0 0 003926 ohms ohm C is set as the RTD type TYPE D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Resistance Temperature Detector Type Default command Sets the default Resistance Temperature Detector RTD at power on and reset which is saved in the Calibrator non volatile memory While saving configuration data in the non volatile memory a period of about 2 seconds the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands 6 41 5520A Operators Manual 6 42 Parameters PT385 100 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 200 200 ohm RTD curve az0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 500 500 ohm RTD curve o 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT385 1000 1000 ohm RTD curve 0 0 00385 ohms ohm C PT3926 100 ohm RTD curve 00 003926 ohms ohm C PT3916 100 ohm RTD curve 00 003916 ohms ohm C CU10 10 ohm RTD empirical curve NI120 120 ohm RTD empirical curve Example RTD TYPE D PT3926 Set RTD default type to a 100 ohm RTD with curve 60 003926 ohms ohm C TYPE D X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Resistance Temperature Detector Type Default query Returns the default Resistance Temperature Detector RTD used at powe
458. utput Display the display on the left side The following example shows the default settings for Volt mode which are set when you start the Oscilloscope Calibration Option gl022i eps If STBY is displayed press the key The Output Display will show OPR and the output should appear on the oscilloscope 8 66 5520A SC300 Option 8 Starting the Oscilloscope Calibration Option 8 88 Adjusting the Output Signal The 55204 provides several ways to change the settings for the output signal during calibration Since oscilloscope calibration requires many adjustments of the output signal the three available methods for changing these settings for oscilloscope calibration are summarized below These methods provide the means of jumping to a new value or sweeping through a range of values 8 89 Keying in a Value To key a specific value directly into the 5520A from its front panel 1 Key in the value you want to enter including the units and prefixes For example to enter 120 mV press 1 2 0 Km y The Control Display will show 1 20 IS 910021 Note Units and prefixes printed in purple in the upper left corner of the keys are accessed through the key For example to enter 200 us press 2 0 0 m 8 If you make an error press CE to clear the Control Display and return to the menu 2 Press to activate the value and m
459. ve Signal 1 50 Q Load 1 MO Load 50 O Load 1 MO Load Amplitude Characteristics Range OVto 6 6V 0 V to 130 V 1 mV to 1 mV to 6 6 V p p 130 V p p Resolution Range Resolution 1 mV to 24 999 mV 1uv 25 mV to 109 99 mV 10 uV 110 mV to 2 1999 V 100 uV 2 2 V to 10 999 V 1 mV 11 V to 130 V 10 mV Adjustment Range Continuously adjustable 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty 0 25 of 0 05 of 0 25 of 0 1 of teal 5 C output output output 40 output 40 uV 40 uV uV 40 uV 2 Seguence 1 2 5 e g 10 mV 20 mV 50 mV Sguare Wave Freguency Characteristics Range 10 Hz to 10 kHz 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal 5 C 2 5 ppm of setting Typical Aberration within 4 us from 50 of leading trailing edge lt 0 5 of output 100 uV 1 Selectable positive or negative zero referenced 2 For square wave frequencies above 1 kHz 0 square wave 25 of output 40 uV 5520A SC600 Option SC600 Option Specifications 8 8 4 Edge Specifications Table 8 2 Edge Specifications Edge Characteristics into 50 Load 1 Year Absolute Uncertainty teal 5 Rise Time 300 ps 0 ps 100 ps Amplitude Range p p 5 0 mV to 2 5 V 2 of output 200 uV Resolution 4 digits Adjustment Range 1096 around each sequence value indicated below Sequence Values 5 mV 10 mV 25 mV 50 mV 60 mV 80 mV 100 mV 200 mV 250 mV 300 mV 5
460. ve voltage is displayed as 6 0000 the resolution for the 3 3 to 32 9999 V range while the triangle wave is displayed as 6 00000 the resolution for the 0 33 to 3 29999 V range You need to know the active range to enter the correct values for voltage offset because the maximum offsets are range specific For example the maximum peak signal for the 3 3 to 32 9999 V range is 55 V while the maximum peak signal for the 0 33 to 3 29999 V range is 8 V This means in the example above the 6 V rms sine wave could have offsets applied up to the maximum peak signal of 55 V because the active range is 3 3 to 32 9999 V while the 6 V p p triangle wave could have offsets applied up to the maximum peak signal of 8 V because the active range is 0 93 to 9 29999 V See Specifications in Chapter 1 and Entering a DC Offset later in this chapter for more information about dc offset voltages 4 20 Auto Range Versus Locked Hange A softkey is provided to toggle between the ranging method auto or locked This feature is available only for single output dc volts and dc current outputs my auta 4 L auta lacked nnO63f eps When auto is selected the default setting the calibrator automatically selects the range that provides the best output resolution When locked is selected the calibrator locks the selected range and will not change ranges when you are editing the output or entering new outputs Values lower
461. ves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted for repair in another country Fluke s warranty obligation is limited at Fluke s option to refund of the purchase price free of charge repair or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period To obtain warranty service contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center to obtain return authorization information then send the product to that service center with a description of the difficulty postage and insurance prepaid FOB Destination Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit Following warranty repair the product will be returned to Buyer transportation prepaid FOB Destination If Fluke determines that failure was caused by neglect misuse contamination alteration accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling including overvoltage failures caused by use outside the product s specified rating or normal wear and tear of mechanical components Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work Following repair the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges FOB Shipping Point THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS
462. vice Manual for instructions ZERO zeros the 5520A Calibrator OHMS ZERO zeros the ohms portion of the 5520A Calibrator ERR ACT Error Action set backup abort or cont continue Foto NORMAL terminals amp i au OH POPTIONS Connect voltmeter sure OC te set it to measur to AF GO ON and ABORT softkeys are used in the 5520A Calibrator calibration procedure See the Only if scope Service Manual for more information option installed Connect voltmeter to NORMAL terminals amp zet it to measure DU 1 BD OM PORTIONS nn021f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 20 Features 3 Softkey Menu Trees ABORT STORE SKIP UP NEST CAL iCOHMSTZi STEP STEF i SECTION DIAG FRONT SERIAL jDIGITRL i PANEL iIF TESTI TEST to AH to AJ Disconnect all cables From terminals amp Short 208 and AUK LO i ago ON PORTIONS EHDE KEY BELL DISPLAM TEST i TEST TEST MEAS CONTROL to AK to AL ALL CURSOR OH i OFF 1 TEST a A EG A ALL ALL OM O OFF a a A G A nnO22f eps Figure 3 4 SETUP Softkey Menu Displays cont 3 21 5520A Operators Manual 3 22 Table 3 3 Factory Defaults for SETUP Menus Power Up Defaults SETUP Menu in Parameter Setting Figure 3 4 User report string PUD Cleared D string Error units gt 0 196 at SC 600 opt
463. vious step using 3500 uA at 0 Hz Press on the calibrator and press the blue key on the DMM to switch to ac measurements Set the calibrator output to 350 0 uA at 60 Hz and press opr Verify the error is within specification Repeat the previous step with the following calibrator settings AC Current Frequency 350 0 uA 1 0 kHz 3500 0 pA 1 0 kHz 4 65 5520A Operators Manual 11 Test the High current function a Press on the calibrator b Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in Figure 4 20 FLUKE 87 TFUE RMS MULTETER 0501 Figure 4 20 Cable Connections for Testing 80 Series High Amps Function c Set the calibrator output to 3 5 A at 0 Hz and press opr Verify the error is within specification d Repeat the previous step using 10 0 A at 0 Hz Verify the error is within specification e Press on the calibrator and press the blue key on the DMM to switch to ac measurements f Set the calibrator output to 3 5 A at 60 Hz and press Verify the error is within specification g Repeat the previous step using the following calibrator settings AC Current Frequency 3 5A 1 0 kHz 10 0A 60 Hz 10 0A 1 0 kHz 4 61 Calibrating the Meter Continue with calibration if any range was out of tolerance in the previous procedure Note The adjustment for calibrating the meter requires disas
464. ware revision levels for the main and front panel CPUs and inguard PGA Enables setting of bit 0 OPC for Operation Complete in the Event Status Register to 1 when all pending device operations are complete Returns a 1 after all pending operations are complete This commands causes program execution to pause until all operations are complete See also WAI Returns a list of the installed hardware and software options Protected user data command This command allows you to store a string of bytes in nonvolatile memory This command works only when the CALIBRATION switch is in the ENABLE position Returns the contents of the PUD Protected User Data memory Resets the state of the instrument to the power up state This command holds off execution of subsequent commands until it is complete Overlapped command Loads a byte into the Service Request Enable register SRE Returns the byte from the Service Request Enable register Returns the status byte Changes the operating mode to thermocouple MEASURE triggers a measurement and returns the value of the measurement This command is equivalent to sending MEAS OPC VAL Initiates a series of self tests then returns a O for pass or a 1 for fail If any faults are detected they are logged into the fault queue where they can be read by the ERR query Prevents further remote commands from being executed until all previous remote commands have been executed
465. wavegen 10 video pulse meas Z overld You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown or you can press to return directly to the OTHER modes menu Each option in the PULSE menu is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press opr To disconnect the signal press stev e AMPL Indicates the output level You can select 2 5 V 1 0 V 250 mV 100 mV 25 mV or 10 mV e TRIG If you are using the external trigger use this key to cycle through the trigger settings The available trigger settings are off 1 trigger signal appears on each marker 10 trigger signal appears on every tenth marker and 100 trigger signal appears at every 100th marker You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing 1219 e MODE Indicates you are in PULSE mode Use the softkey to change modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes Default Pulse settings are 100 0 ns width and 1 000 ms period To change these values you have several options Usually you will enter values for both pulse width and period Do this by entering the pulse width value with units first followed immediately by the period value and units followed by enter For example you could enter a pulse width of 50 ns and a period of 200 ns with the following sequence 5 0 sue suit 2 2 0 0
466. wer and ac dual voltage outputs The NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference The set range is 0 00 to 180 00 degrees with for a leading phase difference and for a lagging phase difference Parameter lt phase value DEG DEG for degree is optional Example PHASE 60 DEG Set the phase difference so the freguency output at the AUX terminals lags the freguency output at the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees PHASE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 Sequential Overlapped Coupled Phase Difference guery Returns the phase difference between the Calibrator front panel NORMAL and AUX terminals for ac power and ac dual voltage outputs Response lt phase value 6 31 5520A Operators Manual 6 32 Example PHASE returns 6 000E 01 Returns 60 when the frequency output at the AUX terminals is lagging the frequency output at the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees POWER X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Calculate Power Output query Returns the equivalent real power for ac and dc power outputs based on the voltage and current settings and power factor ac only If the output is not ac or dc power the return is 0 00 zero watts Response value in watts Example POWER returns 1 00000E 01 Returns 10 when the output voltage is 10 V dc and ou
467. which appears when you start the SCOPE option or when you press the softkey under MODE to scroll through the oscilloscope calibration menus dl nc ac Score SI MODE SCOPE i 21 output 1 volt DC output 35s edge levzine marker gl024i eps Each menu item is described below e OUTPUT SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope press opr To disconnect the signal press DC AC Toggles between a dc and ac signal Pressing the softkey from the ac signal produces the dc equivalent output e SCOPE Z Toggles the calibrator s output impedance setting between 1 and 50 e V DIV MENU Opens the voltage scaling menu which lets you select the scale of the signal in volts per division This menu is described below in detail under The V DIV Menu e MODE Indicates you are in Volt mode Use the softkey to change modes and open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes 8 69 5520A Operators Manual 8 95 The V DIV Menu The V DIV menu shown below sets the number of volts denoted by each division on the oscilloscope This menu provides alternative methods for changing the output amplitude that may be more convenient for certain oscilloscope applications To access the V DIV menu press V DIV from the Volt menu
468. xit command from the File menu to close the Terminal accessory Testing RS 232 UUT Port Operation using Visual Basic Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 UUT port operation via the RS 232 Host port using a Visual Basic test program This procedure assumes you have already completed Appendix D Creating a Visual Basic Test Program to create the program used for this test Complete the following procedure to test RS 232 operation using Visual Basic 1 Complete the RS 232 UUT Port Setup Procedure earlier in this chapter to set up the 5520A RS 232 UUT port to match the parameters of the UUT RS 232 port Complete Testing RS 232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic to prepare the Calibrator RS 232 Host port After Step 6 return to this procedure and continue to Step 3 below Click the Command3 button below is typical Observe the UUT responds to the command you used when you completed Appendix D Creating a Visual Basic Test Program nn311f bmp If the UUT did not respond check the RS 232 parameters set for the Calibrator UUT port and set for the UUT port Verify you used a modem not null modem cable for the 5520A to UUT connection Check the Visual Basic program to make sure the UUT command was entered correctly including the end of line character if any 4 Close the program by clicking the top left corner and Close 5 19 5520A Operators Manual 5 20 5 15 Testing the RS 232 UUT P
469. y 00001 mV 6 21 5520A Operators Manual ISCE IEEE 488 RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status Change Enable command Loads two bytes into the two 16 bit ISCE mask registers ISCE1 and ISCEO See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Parameter lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example SCE 6272 Load decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 to enable bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT This is equivalent to sending the commands ISCEO 6272 and ISCE1 6272 see below ISCE X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status Change Enable query Returns the two bytes from the two 16 bit ISCE mask registers ISCE1 and ISCEO See Instrument Status Change Enable Registers in Chapter 5 for more information Response lt value gt decimal equivalent of the 16 bits 0 to 32767 Example ISCE returns 6272 Returns decimal 6272 binary 0001010001000000 if bits 12 SETTLED 10 REMOTE and 6 HIVOLT are set to 1 ISCEO X IEEE 488 X RS 232 X Sequential Overlapped Coupled Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable command Loads the two bytes into the 16 bit ISCEO register See In

Operators Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents